Velocity 3.1 Operators Guide.Book
Operator’s Guide
Version 3.1 R3
MAN007 MAN007-0211, February, 2011 Version 3.1 R3, Revision A
Copyright© 2011 Hirsch Electronics LLC. All rights reserved. ScramblePad® and ScrambleProx® are registered trademarks of Hirsch Electronics. DIGI*TRAC™, MATCH™, ScrambleCard™, SCRAMBLE*NET™ (abbreviated S*NET), X*NET, and Velocity™ are all trademarks of Hirsch Electronics.
Microsoft, MS and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- tion.
Velocity systems are suitable for use over private (intranet) and public (internet) data networks when configured to use an encryption method including an Authentication Header and an algorithm capable of Triple-DES or better that is NIST certi- fied. The encryption must be provided using Listed (NWGQ) Lantronix Model SecureBox SDS1100 encryption modules and Listed (EPBU) Ever Glow Electronic Co., Ltd., Model DCU120030 plug-in transformers.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) has awarded the Velocity 3.0 AES Certificate #281.
Hirsch Electronics 1900-B Carnegie Avenue Santa Ana, CA 92705-5520
Phone: 949-250-8888 or 888-809-8880 (toll-free) Fax: 949-250-7372 Web: www.HirschElectronics.com Getting Help
If you encounter a problem that is not discussed in this guide and you need technical support, do the following: 1. Contact your local dealer or the provider of this product. 2. If your dealer is not available, contact Hirsch Technical Support directly. This can be done in a number of ways: Mail: Hirsch Electronics 1900-B Carnegie Avenue Santa Ana, CA 92705-5520
Attn: Technical Services Phone: 877-HIRSCHX (877-447-7249) toll-free Fax: (949) 250-7362 Email: [email protected] WWW: www.HirschElectronics.com
Whenever you call your local dealer or Hirsch, be sure to have your registration material, serial number and software version number available. For future reference, record these numbers here. Serial Number: ______Version Number: ______Dealer: ______Dealer Phone #: ______CCM Rev/Version #: ______UL Requirements
The following UL issues are addressed here: GENERAL 1. UL terms that are applicable to this application can be found “Glossary” on page 283 of the Velocity Operators Guide (MAN007). 2. The UL Listed Velocity System is comprised of the following: Central Supervisory Station, XBox, M1N, M2, M8, M16, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX, Power Limitation Board, PS2, DTLM1, DTLM2, DTLM3, MELM1, MELM2, and MELM3. The M2, M8, and M16 may employ the following expansion boards: MEB/BE, AEB8, REB8, and SNIB. VELOCITY 1. If Alarm Priority levels are assigned by user, then priority must be assigned as follows for UL applications: a. Fire alarm and industrial supervision where a risk of injury to persons, or damage or destruction of property may be involved. b. Hold-up or panic alarm. c. Burglar alarm. d. Watchman tour. e. Fire-alarm supervision. f. Burglar-alarm supervision. g. Industrial supervision where a risk of injury to persons, or damage or destruction of property will not be involved. h. Other supervisory services. Items (b) and (c) may have equal priority. Items (e) and (f) may have equal priority. Items (g) and (h) may have equal priority. 2. Alarm Stacking feature is not to be used for UL applications. 3. Return to Normal feature is not to be used for UL applications. 4. Video capability of Velocity 3.1 software has not been evaluated by UL. CENTRAL SUPERVISORY STATION 1. See the introduction to the Velocity Installation Guide (MAN004) for the minimum hardware and software requirements of the central supervisory station equipment. 2. The data processing equipment and office appliance equipment used as central supervisory station equipment shall be Listed under Office Appliances and Business Equipment (UL 114) or Information Processing and Business Equipment (UL 478) or Information Technology Equipment (UL 60950). 3. Instructions for switching over from the primary Velocity workstation to a backup computer are provided in the Redundant Server Configuration Guide (MAN009). 4. A redundant server configuration must be employed where the servers and workstations are networked via a dedicated Ethernet LAN. The network interfaces the protected premise units through an XBox. 5. The Map Builder function must be employed to display the state and condition of all alarm points of the system. 6. A “panel logged off” event may be a compromise attempt on the system. 7. Supply line transient protection complying with the Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, UL 1449, with a maximum marked rating of 330 V shall be used on Central Monitoring Station Equipment. 8. If the XBox is not installed in the Central Monitoring Station, signal line transient protection complying with the Standard for Protectors for Data communications and Fire Alarm Circuits (UL 497B) with maximum marked rating of 50 V shall be used on communication circuits extending beyond 25 feet from the computing systems. 9. The Central Monitoring Station Equipment shall be installed in a temperature-controlled environment. A temperature-controlled environment is defined as one that can be maintained between 13–35°C (55–95°F) by the HVAC system. Twenty-four hours of standby power shall be provided for the HVAC system. The standby power for the HVAC system may be supplied by an engine-driven generator alone. A standby battery is not required to be used. 10. In addition to the main power supply and secondary power supply that are required to be provided at the central supervisory station, the system shall be provided with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with sufficent capacity to operate the computer equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes. If more than 15 minutes is required for secondary power supply to supply the UPS input power, the UPS shall be capable of providing input power for a least that amount of time. 11. The UPS shall comply with the Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment (UL 1778) or the Standard for Fire Protective signaling Devices (UL 1481). 12. In order to perform maintenance and repair service, a means for disconnecting the input to the UPS while maintaining continuity of power to the automation system shall be provided. 13. The alarm system’s network settings shall be designed such that the maximum time lapse from the initiation of an initiating device circuit until it is annunciated at the central supervising station shall not exceed 90 seconds. 14. The alarm system’s network settings shall be designed such that the maximum time for the central supervising station to annunciate a single break, single ground, wire-to-wire short, loss of signal, or any combination of these shall not exceed 200 seconds. 15. The alarm system configuration shall be designed such that the number of signals on a single channel shall be limited to 1000. XBOX 1. XBox configuration and installation are addressed in ,“XBox Installation,” of the Hirsch DIGI*TRAC Design and Installation Guide (MAN001). 2. UL has not verified the XBox hookup for a remote dialup controller or the modem loop configuration. 3. The alarm relay contact is rated 24 VDC, 2 A, resistive. 4. Wiring to the RS-232 circuit is limited to the same room (50 feet). 5. Shielded cable must be used on the RS-232 circuit. M1N 1. Input rating of the M1N is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 500 mA. 2. The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive. 3. The M1N shall not employ a secondary battery. M2 1. UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS37L, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX, and DS47L-HI-SPX with the M2. 2. The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive. M8 1. UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS37L, DS37LH, DS47L, DS47L-HI, DS47L-SPX, and DS47L-HI-SPX with the M8. 2. The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive. M16 1. Input rating of the M16 is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1A. 2. UL has verified compatibility of the Hirsch DS47L-SPX with the M16. 3. The Alarm/Control Relay contact rating is 24 VDC, 1 A, resistive.
MAN007-0211 Contents
Getting Help ...... iii UL Requirements ...... iv Introduction...... 1 Who Should Read This...... 2 Getting Started...... 3 Preliminaries ...... 3 Starting Velocity ...... 3 Exiting Velocity ...... 4 Velocity Main Menu...... 5 Velocity Administration Main Screen ...... 6 System Tree Window (System Tree Pane) ...... 6 Expanding and Contracting the System Tree ...... 7 Velocity Configuration Folder...... 8 DIGI*TRAC Configuration Folder ...... 10 Interfaces Configuration Folder...... 13 Components Window (Components Pane) ...... 14 Velocity Icon Tool Bar ...... 15 Velocity Menu Bar...... 17 File Options...... 18 Console Options...... 19 Window Options ...... 19 Add-Ins Options...... 20 Help Options ...... 21 Help Topics...... 21 Velocity Hot Keys...... 22 Status Line...... 23 Off Normal Points...... 24 System Icons ...... 24 Navigating Velocity...... 26 Navigating Between Modules...... 26 Using the Mouse and Keyboard...... 26 Mouse Functions ...... 26 Keyboard Functions ...... 26 Using Velocity Fields and Tools...... 27 Switching Operators...... 28 Locking Workstations...... 29 Managing Desktop Space...... 30 Managing Velocity Windows ...... 30 Column Management...... 31 Sorting By Column Header...... 33 Rearranging Column Headers ...... 33 Resizing Columns and Panes ...... 34 Using Velocity Programs...... 35 Advice for Operators...... 36
vii Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Viewer ...... 39 Starting Alarm Viewer...... 40 Alarm Viewer Main Screen ...... 41 Icon Bar ...... 42 Alarm Viewer Columns...... 42 Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop ...... 45 How To Use Alarm Viewer...... 46 Acknowledging an Alarm...... 46 Acknowledging All Alarms...... 46 Clearing an Alarm ...... 47 Clearing All Alarms ...... 47 Displaying a Credential ...... 47 Copying to Clipboard ...... 48 Operator Notes...... 48 Replaying a WAV File ...... 50 Playing DVR Video...... 50 Get Recorded Alarm Video...... 50 Viewing Instructions for an Alarm...... 51 Viewing a Map for an Alarm...... 51 Refresh Alarms on the Alarm Viewer...... 51 Closing Alarm Viewer ...... 52 Status Viewer...... 53 Status Viewer Main Screen...... 54 Status Window Columns ...... 55 Status Viewer: How to Use...... 60 Status Viewer Right-Click Options...... 60 Creating Status Groups...... 62 Status Groups Page...... 63 Column Headers Page ...... 64 Status Messages...... 65 Graphics Designer...... 67 Displaying a Drawing...... 68 Switching between Drawings...... 68 Panning Drawings...... 69 Viewing Linked Maps...... 70 Monitoring Placed Objects ...... 71 Controlling Placed Objects...... 75 Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms...... 76 Suspending Alarm Switching...... 79 Executing Command Sets...... 81 Show Credential Information ...... 82 Enrollment Manager...... 83 Opening Enrollment Manager ...... 84 Enrollment Manager Main Screen...... 85 Enrollment Manager Menu Bar...... 87 People Tree Pane ...... 89 Person Group Subfolders...... 90
viii MAN007-0211
Personal Information Pane ...... 90 General Property Sheet ...... 91 TAB1 - TAB10 Property Sheets ...... 93 Groups Property Sheet ...... 93 Additional Images Property Sheet ...... 94 Personal Information Form ...... 95 Enrolling a New Person...... 97 Editing Multiple Persons...... 98 Person Templates ...... 99 Assigning a Credential to a Person ...... 101 Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person...... 101 Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential...... 103 Assigning a New Credential to a Person...... 103 Assigning a Credential Template to a Person ...... 104 Unassigning Credentials...... 104 Downloading Credentials...... 104 Downloading Multiple Credentials...... 105 Finding a Person...... 106 Search Groups...... 107 Search Groups Screen ...... 108 Finding a Card Credential...... 110 Search Filters...... 112 Person Filters...... 112 Quick Find...... 113 Wildcard Symbols...... 114 Multiple People Selection ...... 115 Displaying Credentials for Multiple Persons...... 115 Modifying an Existing Person...... 117 Modifying Existing Credentials for a Person...... 118 Deleting Persons ...... 118 Person Groups ...... 120 Adding People to Person Groups...... 121 Batch Enroll Card Credentials ...... 123 Capturing a Signature...... 126 Capturing a Photo...... 128 Video Capture ...... 129 Video Dialog Box ...... 130 TWAIN Capture...... 131 TWAIN Setup Dialog Box ...... 131 File Capture...... 133 Image Preview...... 133 Image Preview Dialog Box...... 134 Additional Images...... 136 E-mailing a Photo...... 137 Saving a Photo to Another Source ...... 138 Scanning Enrollment Data ...... 139 Previewing a Badge...... 142 Print Preview Screen...... 142 Printing a Badge...... 144
ix Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Badge Print Status ...... 144 Double-Sided Badge Printing...... 145 Credentials ...... 146 How to Define Credentials ...... 147 Credential Properties Dialog Box...... 147 General Property Sheet...... 148 Function Property Sheet ...... 152 Limits Property Sheet ...... 153 Options Property Sheet...... 156 Define Function Dialog Box...... 158 Credential Biometrics Properties Sheet...... 159 Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential ...... 162 ID Formats (IDF)...... 164 Duress Digits ...... 165 Setting Up Duress Digits...... 165 Using Duress Digits With Code Extension Digits ...... 165 Credentials: Set Expiration Date...... 166 Credentials: Link to Template ...... 167 Credentials: Concatenating UDFs ...... 168 Credentials: Reissue ...... 169 Credential Tasks ...... 169 Display Credential Information...... 172 Absentee Limiting ...... 172 Use Limiting...... 173 Day Limiting...... 173 Executive Passback Override ...... 173 Forgiving Passback...... 174 Forgiving Users ...... 174 Alert...... 174 Tagging...... 175 Auto-Delete ...... 175 Report Manager ...... 177 Opening Report Manager ...... 179 Report Manager Main Screen...... 180 Report Manager: Menu Bar...... 181 Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar ...... 182 Creating a Report...... 183 Add a New Report...... 183 List of Existing Reports...... 184 Customizing an Existing Report...... 190 Criteria Page ...... 193 Sorting Page...... 195 Selected Criteria List Pane ...... 196 Saving Custom Reports ...... 197 Previewing a Report...... 198 Report Preview Screen ...... 198 Preview Screen Features...... 200 Printing Reports...... 202
x MAN007-0211
Access & Control Functions...... 203 Access Functions...... 206 Access Functions: Momentary Access ...... 206 Access Functions: Unlock a Door...... 207 Access Functions: Relock a Door ...... 207 Access Functions: Extended Access...... 207 Alarm Functions...... 208 Alarm Functions: Momentary Door Masking...... 210 Alarm Functions: Momentary Input Masking ...... 210 Alarm Functions: Masking Doors...... 210 Alarm Functions: Masking Inputs...... 211 Alarm Functions: Unmasking Doors ...... 211 Alarm Functions: Unmasking Inputs ...... 211 Control Functions...... 212 Control Functions: Triggering Doors and Relays...... 213 Control Functions: Lock Open for a Door...... 214 Control Functions: Lock Open for a Relay...... 214 Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Door...... 214 Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Relay ...... 215 Control Functions: Lock Down a Relay ...... 215 Control Functions: Lock Down a Door...... 216 Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Door ...... 216 Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Relay ...... 216 Control Functions: Force On Doors...... 217 Control Functions: Force On Relays...... 217 Control Functions: Force On Release for a Door ...... 217 Control Functions: Force On Release for a Relay ...... 218 Control Functions: Force Off a Door...... 218 Control Functions: Force Off a Relay...... 218 Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Door...... 219 Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Relay...... 219 Password Functions...... 220 Special Functions ...... 221 Indexed Command: Clear Code Tamper ...... 224 Indexed Command: Count Users Other Side...... 224 Indexed Command: Count Users This Side...... 225 Indexed Command: Forgive All Users ...... 226 Indexed Command: Manual Holiday Tables ...... 226 Indexed Command: Manual Unholiday Tables ...... 227 Function Priority Levels...... 227 Time Zone Control of Relays...... 228 CCTV Viewer ...... 231 CCTV Viewer...... 232 CCTV Viewer Functions...... 235 Pan-Tilt...... 235 Zoom Mode...... 235 Focus Mode...... 235 Iris Mode...... 235
xi Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Auto Pan ...... 235 DVR/NVR Operation...... 237 Operating the DVR ...... 238 Addressing the DVR/NVR and Attached Cameras...... 238 Addressing a DVR/NVR Camera Directly...... 239 Viewing DVR/NVR Video From Attached Cameras ...... 240 Viewing Camera Video ...... 240 Live View ...... 240 Live Video Screen...... 241 Video Explorer ...... 243 Search & Retrieve Recorded Video ...... 245 Play & Export Local Video ...... 246 Play Video Window...... 247 Menu Tool Bar ...... 248 Location Indicators...... 249 Control Buttons & Speed Slider...... 249 Start & End Time Fields...... 249 Navigation Buttons...... 250 Image Tools...... 250 Export DVR/NVR Video ...... 252 Generate and Stop Host Alarm...... 252 Get Alarm List...... 253 Get Motion Events List ...... 256 Time Synchronization ...... 258 Drag & Drop Camera Views ...... 258 Drag & Drop with Live View...... 258 Drag & Drop with Video Explorer...... 259 DVR/NVR View Groups...... 259 Camera Control ...... 260 PTZ Camera Controls...... 263 All Video Events...... 265 Event History Viewer...... 268 Generating History Logs ...... 268 Customizing DVR/NVR Logs...... 269 Event List Functions...... 271 Who’s Inside ...... 273 How To Use Who’s Inside ...... 274 Who's Inside Screen ...... 275 Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials ...... 277 Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone...... 278 Velocity Learning Center ...... 279 Opening the Learning Center...... 280 Learning Center Main Screen...... 280 How to Use the Learning Center ...... 281 Closing Learning Center...... 281 Glossary ...... 283 Index...... 319
xii MAN007-0211 Introduction
Velocity© Version 3.1 is the latest version of the Hirsch Electronics security access program that simplifies the task of controlling and monitoring access to any surveillance system, no matter how large or small it is. Velocity provides the kind of functionality you normally only expect from high-end programs with the ease-of-use of an entry-level system. Features you'll find in Velocity include:
Easy-to-use graphical interface Intuitive operation Choice of controller networks (hardwired, dial-up, or networked) Centralized monitoring and control Real-time alarm and event monitoring Interactive maps with alarm, status, and control Dozens of standard reports Quick and easy badge and graphics creation
1 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Who Should Read This...
If you are an administrator or configurator, tasked with the job of setting up and administering this Velocity system, continue with the Velocity Administrators Guide. If you are an operator involved in the day-to-day processes of enrolling badge holders, monitoring security, and generating reports, refer to the Velocity Operators Guide.
2 Who Should Read This... MAN007-0211
Getting Started
Preliminaries If you are running Velocity Server or Velocity Workstation, the run-time version of SQL Server 2005 (SQL Server 2005 Express) is automatically started every time you start Windows. Service Control Manager (SCM) loads automatically every time you start Windows. If you are running Velocity Server or Velocity Workstation, the run-time version of SQL Server 2005 (SQL Server 2005 Express) is automatically started every time you start Windows. Service Control Manager (SCM) loads automatically every time you start Windows. You can tell whether SQL is running by looking at the icon located in the system tray in the lower right hand corner. You can start and/or stop DIGI*TRAC Network Service (DTNS), Security Domain Service (SDS), Velocity Extension Service, and CCTV Service from this manager. Starting Velocity To start Velocity:
If, during Velocity installation, you checked the box that put the Velocity shortcut on your Windows desktop, then double click the icon. If the Velocity shortcut icon does not appear on your Windows desktop, at the Start menu on the Windows 2000 desktop, select Programs > Hirsch Electronics Velocity > Velocity. The Velocity splash screen appears. This screen disappears after a few seconds and the main Velocity screen appears. To modify the text that appears on this splash screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. You can make starting Velocity even easier by moving Velocity to your desktop. While you have the choice to place the shortcut during Velocity installation, you can create a shortcut later using the following procedure. To create a shortcut for Velocity on your desktop: 1. From the Windows desktop, select Start > Programs > Hirsch Electronics Velocity. 2. Right click on Velocity. A list of options pop up. 3. Select Send to > Desktop (create shortcut). The Velocity icon appears on your desktop as a shortcut, . Once the Velocity icon is on your desktop, you only need to double click the icon to start Velocity.
Getting Started 3 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Exiting Velocity To exit Velocity: Do one of the following:
Select File > Exit from the Velocity menu bar Click the Exit button, , in the upper right hand corner From Velocity, press Alt + F4.
4 Getting Started MAN007-0211
Velocity Main Menu
When you open Velocity, a main screen like the following example appears:
This screen is divided into four main sections.
Menu tool bar This is the main menu providing pull-down option lists for such features as selecting different Velocity program modules (Console option), quitting the program (File option), adding programs (Add-Ins), consulting help, and selecting windows within the program (Window option). The program modules accessed through the Console option are also accessible through the Icon Tool Bar.
Icon Tool Bar The icon bar enables the Velocity user to click and open any of the Velocity modules. The most frequently used modules, such as the Enrollment Manager and the Event Viewer, are displayed on the left side of this bar. The less frequently used functions, like the Badge Designer and the SQL Manager, are grouped on the right end of this bar.
Main window This is the space within which the Velocity modules appear, including the Administration window. If docked, Velocity modules cannot be dragged beyond its border. For more on this, refer to “Managing Velocity Windows” on page 30.
Status Line Contains information about the operator currently logged on, the current number of alarms, the current threat level as well as date and time. For more on this, refer to page 23.
Velocity Main Menu 5 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Administration window is nested within the main window and appears once you press F2 or select Administration from the Console option list. For more on this, refer to “Velocity Administration Main Screen” starting on page 6. Velocity Administration Main Screen The Administration main screen is normally nested within the confines of the main menu and looks like this example:
The Administration main screen contains the:
System Tree window (see page 6) Components window (see page 14) The term ‘window’ is used interchangeably with pane in this guide. Both terms refer to an area within a larger screen where data or options are displayed. For example, you will find references to both 'System Tree pane' and 'System Tree window'. They are the same entity. Use the Velocity Administration main screen to:
Add components to the system Configure components Delete or copy components Specify a particular task to be performed by the current system (Task option) View the current system from two perspectives (View option) Both the DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces Configuration folders include the computer name for each Velocity server/client included in this system, as shown in the previous example. There should be a separate DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces Configuration folder for the Velocity server and each defined client. The Administration window is only available to operators who are members of the administrator's role.
Hint Most Velocity operators won't need to access the administrator's window. Their job is to monitor the system and identify possible problems. Only administrators responsible for configuring the system should be granted access to this screen.
System Tree Window (System Tree Pane) The System Tree pane is located on the left side of the Velocity Administration main screen and provides a hierarchical display of basic Velocity system components. There are three main tree branches or folders: Velocity Configuration
6 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
DIGI*TRAC Configuration Interfaces Configuration These three branches and subsidiary files are shown in the following example:
Notice that each DIGI*TRAC Configuration and Interfaces Configuration folder is followed by the workstation ID. Each Velocity server/client defined for this system should have a separate entry here. Each folder is described briefly in the following subsections. More detailed descriptions are available for each configuration topic in the following sections:
The Velocity Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Velocity Configuration” starting on page 215. The DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Hardware Configuration” starting on page 57. The Interfaces Configuration folder and its uses is outlined in “Interfaces Configuration” on page 343. Expanding and Contracting the System Tree Here are instructions on expanding and contracting the system tree:
To expand a folder: To contract one or more folders: Click on the sign. Click on the sign.
Double click the folder. Double click the expanded folder.
Select and press the right arrow Select the expanded folder and press the left key. arrow key.
Select and press Enter. Select and press Enter.
Tree elements can consist of several different component types. Each element is associated with an icon. These icons are described briefly in System Icons.
Velocity Main Menu 7 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An example of a fully expanded system tree is shown below:
Notice that the relationship of top-level folders to second-level folders is indicated by dotted lines running between them. This not only establishes the relationship between them but also the dominant and subordinate nature of the relationship. As you click each plus mark to reveal the levels beneath it, the tree can expand to display any number of nested levels. You can display the components of a selected folder in the Components window. To display a selected folder:
From the System Tree window, double click the element you want to display. The element you selected appears in the Components window. Velocity Configuration Folder One of the three major folders of the Configuration Tree is Velocity Configuration. This folder provides all the information an operator requires to define the non-hardware elements of this system. An example of the Velocity Configuration folder tree is shown below:
8 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
The subfolders comprising the Velocity Administration folder are:
This Defines: Folder:
Person A group of values that can be applied to a person during Templates enrollment that can expedite the entering of values into the Enrollment Manager Personal Information Form. For more on this, refer to “Person Templates” on page 283 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Credential Most field values for card or code holder credentials. Filling out all Templates credential fields for each card or code holder is time-consuming and repetitive. To save time, use a credential template to preset many of the fields in a template, then only customize a few remaining fields to individualize the credential, as required, in Enrollment Manager. For more on this, refer to “Credential Templates” starting on page 228 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Time Zones All time zones defined for this system. This includes three possible types of time zones: standard, master, and grand master time zones. For more on this, refer to “Time Zones” starting on page 313 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Holidays Holidays recognized by this system. For more on this, refer to “Holidays” starting on page 330 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Door Groups All door groups associated with this system. A door group associates one or more readers/ keypads with one or more time zones. A master door group associates several door groups. For more on this, refer to “Door Groups” starting on page 257 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Function Access and control functions are performed whenever an Groups extension digit is entered along with the normal PIN. For more on this, refer to “Function Groups” starting on page 265 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Roles The tasks and forms an operator can access and use. It also specifies which events and alarms are routed to them. For more on this, refer to “Roles” on page 285 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Operators All system operators recognized by the system. A system operator is any person who can use Velocity to monitor or configure the system. For more on this, refer to “Operators” starting on page 275 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Velocity Main Menu 9 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This Defines: Folder:
Command One or more DIGI*TRAC commands that can be batched and Sets triggered by any function you select, such as access to a drug pantry or control to a control zone. For more on this, refer to “Command Sets” starting on page 216 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Workstations All workstations currently defined for this system. The available workstations are displayed on the Velocity server automatically. For more on this, refer to “Workstations” starting on page 334 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Alarm A list of operator notes that can be entered quickly in Alarm Viewer. Responses For more on this, refer to “Alarm Responses” on page 337 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Threat Levels A list of available threat levels. You can rename any of these threat levels as required. For more on this, refer to “Threat Levels” on page 338 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Card Data Digits in established codes or cards that are mapped to MATCH Mappings code. For more on this, refer to “Card Data Mapping” on page 340 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. DIGI*TRAC Configuration Folder The DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder displays all the information an operator requires to define and configure hardware for the Velocity system. Each DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder that appears in the System Tree pane is identified (in parenthesis) by the name of the computer it represents.
The Velocity server computer name follows the folder name in parenthesis. Each Velocity server defined for this system should possess a separate folder here. The three sub-folders under DIGI*TRAC Configuration specify the three possible network protocols Velocity supports:
SNET Short for SCRAMBLE*NET protocol. This is the proprietary network protocol used to connect Hirsch controllers to a host PC port. The host port can use either a serial or TCP/IP connection. For more on this, refer to “S*NET Systems” starting on page 68.
10 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
XNET Short for XBox Network protocol. This is the network protocol you should choose if your host PC is connected to Hirsch controllers through an intervening XBox. The host port can use either a serial or TCP/IP connection. For more on this, refer to “X*NET Systems” starting on page 72.
Dial-Up This branch enables you to configure one or more controllers connected to this server by a dial-up modem. For more on this, refer to “Dial-Up Configuration” starting on page 136. The structure of the DIGI*TRAC tree depends on the protocol you define above. The second level folders define the Port. Three types of ports are supported by Velocity:
SNET port—This defines a port used by the host PC to connect directly to one or more controllers. XNET port—This defines a port used by the host PC to connect to one or more controllers via an XBox. Dial-Up port—This port specifies a modem installed in the host PC that can connect to and communicate with one or more remote controllers. The next level indicates the component to which the port is connected:
If this is SNET, , the controller connected to the SNET port is defined. This specifies values used to configure the controller. If this is XNET, , the XBox is next in line. Define the properties of the XBox connected to this port. You then add one or more controllers that are connected to this XBox. If this is a dial-up connection, , the dial-up location, connected remotely to the modem is defined. You then define the remote modem settings and one or more controllers that are connected to this remote modem. The lowest level defines the components or devices connected to the controller. These include:
This Folder: Defines:
Inputs Line modules (alarm inputs) connected to this controller. For more on this, refer to “Inputs” starting on page 179.
Relays Relays connected to this controller. Locks connect to the controller via these relays. For more on this, refer to “Relays” starting on page 168.
Expansion Inputs Any expansion inputs (installed or uninstalled) connected to this controller. For more on this, refer to “Expansion Inputs” starting on page 187.
Expansion Relays Any expansion relays (installed or virtual outputs) connected to this controller. For more on this, refer to “Expansion Relays” starting on page 173.
Velocity Main Menu 11 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This Folder: Defines:
Readers Any reader connected to this controller, including card, ScramblePad, and biometric readers. For more on this, refer to “Readers & Keypads” starting on page 194.
Doors Doors connected to this controller. A door includes all inputs, relays, and readers associated with this door. You can also bundle unbundled inputs, relays, and readers to form a door. For more on this, refer to “Bundling Components to Create Doors” starting on page 148. For more on this, refer to “Doors” starting on page 146. If SNET is designated, then a final tree structure like this example appears:
If XNET is designated, a tree structure like this example appears:
If the Dial-Up connection is designated, a tree structure like this example appears:
12 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
Interfaces Configuration Folder The Interface Configuration folder is the third main branch in the system tree pane. It contains all of the subfolders and components required to install and configure an attached CCTV system. It also provides support for E-mail writers and serial port writer. An example of the Interface Configuration fully expanded is shown in the following example:
The elements of this branch are:
This Folder: Defines:
CCTV Closed-circuit TV systems attached to this Velocity system. For detailed information on configuring and using the CCTV subsystem functions, refer to “CCTV Configuration” starting on page 657 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Serial Port Writers How and when alarms/events are sent to the serial port and in what format. For more on this, refer to “Serial Port Writers” starting on page 344 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
E-mail Writers How to notify qualified operators and administrators by E-mail when a specified Velocity alarm occurs. For more on this, refer to “E-mail Writers” starting on page 348 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
XML Writers How and when to send data in XML form to a specified port or application. For more on this, refer to “XML Writers” starting on page 360 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Message Queue How to set up a data output compatible with the Microsoft Writers Windows message queue. For more on this, refer to “Message Queue Writers” on page 356 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
DVR/NVR Configuration and use of one or more DVR or NVR systems connected to this Velocity network. For more on this, refer to “Configuring the DVR/NVR” starting on page 719 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator Guide.
Central Stations Configuration and monitoring of fire alarm systems. For more on this, refer to “Central Stations” on page 365 of the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Velocity Main Menu 13 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
When you select the Interfaces Configuration folder, the Hirsch Trigger Action Manager appears in the components pane. This is an administrative feature and is detailed in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Components Window (Components Pane) The Components pane is located to the right of the System Tree window within the Administration Main Screen. This window displays elements contained within the file selected in the System Tree window. For example, if you select the top-level Configuration folder in the System Tree window, the Components window displays this arrangement of modules:
This window contains not only all the Velocity modules but also the main Velocity folders (Velocity Configuration, DIGI*TRAC Configuration, and Interfaces Configuration). Double click any of the components within this window to open the selected module or, in the case of the three configuration folders, expand the folder to reveal all relevant sub-folders. If you select a lower-level folder, such as Velocity Configuration, from either the System Tree or Components Window, the Components Window displays the contents of that folder like this example:
This provides a flat view of the system as opposed to the hierarchical view provided by the System Tree window. By expanding the folders within the System Tree window, the elements displayed within the Components window become more specific, gaining greater granularity.
14 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
For example, if you select Holidays from either the System Tree or Components Window, the Components window displays all holidays currently defined for the system. In most cases, you will also see a folder at the top of the Components window entitled Add New... (for example, Add New Holiday). Double click this folder and a dialog box appears that guides you through the creation of the relevant system component. Velocity Icon Tool Bar The Velocity icon toolbar looks like this:
A single click on one of these icons opens the associated program. The most commonly used modules are grouped on the left side of the icon bar:
Opens this This program can also be opened This icon: program: through the:
Alarm Viewer main menu bar Console option or by pressing F8
Event Viewer main menu bar Console option or by pressing F7
Enrollment Manager main menu bar Console option or by pressing F3
Graphics main menu bar Console option or by pressing F6 (Opens Designer in Graphics mode)
Video Explorer main menu bar Console option
Report Manager main menu bar Console option
Status Viewer main menu bar Console option or by pressing F9
Velocity Main Menu 15 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Less frequently used modules are grouped on the right side of the icon bar:
This This program can also be opened Opens this program: icon: through the:
Administration Module main menu bar Console option or by pressing F2
Customization Manager main menu bar Console option
Badge & Graphics Designer main menu bar Console option (Opens Designer in Badge mode.)
SQL Database Manager main menu bar Console option
Scheduling Agent main menu bar Console option
CCTV Viewer main menu bar Console option
Who’s Inside main menu bar Console option
16 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
Velocity Menu Bar The Velocity menu (tool) bar is located at the top left of the main menu screen, just below the Velocity title bar, and looks like this:
It contains four menu items:
File This menu item contains these menu options: Import/Export, Switch Operator, Restart Operating System, Lock Workstation, Log on as Different Windows User, and Exit. For more on this option, refer to “File Options” on page 18.
Console This menu item contains options for accessing Velocity programs as well as the option to set preferences. These programs include: Administration, Alarm Viewer, Badge & Graphics Designer, CCTV Camera Viewer, Customization Manager, Video Explorer, Enrollment Manager, Event Viewer, Graphics, Report Manager, Status Viewer, SQL Manager, Scheduling Agent, and Who’s Inside. For more on using these programs, see “Using Velocity Programs” starting on page 35. Notice that several of these programs can be started by pressing one of the function keys along the top of your keyboard. For example, if you press the F8 key, the Alarm Viewer appears. See “Velocity Hot Keys” on page 22 for more on this. The final option shown in this list is the Preferences... option. This includes setup options for: •General •Network •Alarm Options •Printers •CCTV For more on this last option, refer to “Setting Velocity Preferences” starting on page 46. For more on the Console options, refer to page 18.
Window This menu item enables the operator to move between open Velocity modules or to change the patterns in which the open modules are displayed. For more on the Window options, refer to page 19.
Add-Ins This menu item enables the operator to designate E-mail writers and server extensions as required by the installation. For more on this, refer to “Add-Ins Options” on page 20.
Help This menu item provides on-line help topics, the Diagnostic window, and additional information about Velocity including Velocity registration information. For more on the Help options, refer to page 19.
Velocity Main Menu 17 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
File Options
The File option includes these options:
Import/ This option includes these five submenu options: Export • CCM (Import Only) •SAM (Import Only) • Customizations • Velocity Data Export • Velocity Data Import • SNIB2 (Import Only) For more on the import/export options, see “Import/Export Wizards” starting on page 381.
Switch Enables you to switch from one operator to another without Operator... exiting Velocity. For more on this, refer to “Switching Operators” on page 28.
Restart Select this option to restart the workstation. Operating This option should only be made available to qualified operators System since restarting the workstation can result in a loss of current data {Restart} and make the system vulnerable for the time required to restart.
Lock Return to the Windows log on screen with all open programs still Workstation running. For more on this, refer to “Locking Workstations” on page 29.
Log On as Select this option to close Velocity and any other programs that Different are currently running and return to the Windows log on screen. Windows Note: The Velocity Service Control Manager along with other TSRs remains User open.
Exit Offers several options for exiting and logging off Velocity.
18 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
Console Options The console options list is accessed from the Velocity main menu bar. It contains a list of all currently available Velocity programs:
Bring up the programs listed by selecting the program name. Many of these options can also be activated by pressing a hot key from anywhere within the Velocity program. Each hot key is displayed to the right of the option. For example, to open the Event Viewer, press F7 and the Event Viewer appears. This list also includes the Preferences... option. This important option enables you to modify or activate components of the Velocity system. You cannot utilize many aspects of Velocity without first visiting and using this option. For more on the modules displayed in this list, refer to “Using Velocity Programs” starting on page 35. For more on this last option, refer to “Setting Velocity Preferences” starting on page 46. Window Options The Velocity menu bar Window option provides one way to bring open Velocity window to the front.
The standard options above the divider are:
Cascade Arrange open windows in an overlapping pattern from top left to bottom right, where the last used window is top most, bottom right.
Tile Arrange open windows edge-to-edge in a horizontal line. If enough Horizontal screen area is available, all windows are completely visible.
Tile Arrange open windows edge-to-edge in a vertical line. If enough Vertical screen area is available, all windows are completely visible.
Arrange Arrange minimized windows in a vertical array. This is particularly Icons helpful if windows are behind another window.
Reset to Return window arrangement to the Velocity default. This cancels any Defaults modifications to the Velocity windows you have made.
Velocity Main Menu 19 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Below the divider is a list of windows that are currently opened as MDI child windows. There is a check mark next to the active window. Select a window from this list to make it active. This can be done in one of two ways:
Select the Window option list, then press the number on your keyboard corresponding to the number that appears before the open window name. For example, if you want to display the open window designated as 3, press 3 and that window appears. Select the Window option list, then either cursor down to the window you want and press Enter, or click the window you want. The selected window appears. The windows that appear in this option list are those set to MDI Child. Modules like Report Manager, Enrollment Manager, and SQL Database Manager are opened as parent applications (displayed in the Windows desktop tray) and are not shown in the Window option list. Add-Ins Options When you access the Add-Ins option on the Velocity menu tool bar, you see the following two options:
This option enables you to:
Add-In This feature enables a qualified operator to augment Velocity's Manager feature set with new Velocity functions without waiting for upgrades or patches.
Server This feature brings up the Server Extensions dialog box. Use this to Extensions configure systems for serial port writer, E-mail writers, DVR reader, and Central Stations.
Once you have added new features using the Add-In Manager, the Add-Ins option list increases to include those options, like the following example:
Add-In programs listed as options
In the preceding example, the add-ins External Application Launcher and Velocity Remote Desktop have been configured. Velocity add-ins are published to the Hirsch website as they become available from where they can be downloaded and installed on a Velocity computer. They are also available on CD or diskette upon request. For more on these functions, refer to “Add-In Manager” starting on page 406.
20 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
Help Options When you access the Help option list on the Velocity main menu tool bar, you see these options listed.
These options are: Help View Velocity's on-line help which is the document you are viewing Topics now. For more on this, see “Help Topics” on page 21.
Diagnostic This is an extremely handy tool for diagnosing problems with the Window system. It also enables an operator knowledgeable about DIGI*TRAC commands to configure individual controllers. For more on the diagnostic window, refer to page 703. Note: This should only be used for troubleshooting.
Velocity Select this option to open the Velocity Learning Center screen. Learning This screen provides a portal to a number of Velocity documents, Center including: •Release Notes • Online Help (alternative route) • System Planning Guide • Tutorials (alternative route)
Create The Velocity System Report wizard appears. Use this option to create System a report you can E-mail to Hirsch for further evaluation of a Report Velocity-related problem. This report lists all relevant aspects of your Velocity system. For more on this, refer to “System Report Wizard” on page 1193.
About This dialog box displays information on the current version of Velocity Velocity including the name of the person possessing the license for this version of Velocity and the product build number. From this dialog box, you can press the Register button to register this version, if needed. For more on registering Velocity, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Click OK to return to the main menu. Help Topics Once inside Velocity Help, use the Contents, Index, or Search tabs to locate the specific topic you need. To display the relevant topic, just double click the entry. There is also a Glossary tab that provides you with definitions for terms used in the help file.
Velocity Main Menu 21 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
You can also use the numerous links located throughout the document to jump from one topic to another as needed. Notice that topics are arranged in sequences (the yellow window above the web page), so that you can read about related topics simply by clicking the topic in the Sequence pane or using the Previous or Next button to arrive at the topic you want. If you don’t see this window, refer to the note box on the Velocity hot keys page (page 22). To navigate to the last screen you displayed, click the Back button, . In addition, you can jump to related topics using the See Also topics list displayed at the bottom of most pages. Velocity Hot Keys If you're an experienced user, you probably like to keep your hands on the keyboard as much as possible. Velocity enables you to do this through the use of many function keys and keyboard combinations. A list of these is shown below. Open Velocity Programs
Administration F2
Enrollment Manager F3
Browser F4
Graphics F6
Event Viewer F7
Alarm Viewer F8
Status Viewer F9 Of course, the preceding keys only work as long as Velocity is Windows’ current focus. Exit Screens/Programs
Exit Velocity Alt + F4
Exit Velocity modules Alt + F4 from within: Enrollment Manager, Report Manager, Graphics Designer, Customization Manager, SQL Manager, Scheduling Agent, and CCTV Viewer. It does not work with Administration, Alarm Viewer, Event Viewer, and Status Viewer.
Exit a dialog box or Esc from within dialog box or prompt for: prompt Enrollment Manager, Report Manager, Customization, Status Viewer, Scheduling Agent, and CCTV Viewer. It does not work in Administration, Alarm Viewer, Event Viewer, Graphics Designer, and SQL Manager.
22 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
Moving/Manipulating Within a Screen/Program
Move one field forward Tab
Move one field Shift + Tab backward
Activate a function Enter Move cursor up Up arrow key
Move cursor down Down arrow key
Move cursor left Left arrow key
Move cursor right Right arrow key
Printing Report
Print the report Ctrl + P
Badge & Graphic Designer contains a separate set of hot keys. For these, see “Designer Hot Keys” starting on page 449. Status Line The bottom line on the main Velocity screen is the status line.
This line contains the following sections:
This Field: Displays: Current User Current Velocity operator.
Active Alarms Current number of active alarms. Double click this icon to bring up the Alarm Viewer screen which provides details about the active alarms. For more on the Alarm Viewer, refer to “Alarm Viewer” starting on page 417.
Ack Alarms Current number of acknowledged alarms. Double click this icon to bring up the Alarm Viewer screen which provides details about the acknowledged alarms. For more on the Alarm Viewer, refer to “Alarm Viewer” starting on page 417.
Off Normal Current number of off-normal points. This indicates hardware that has been configured but not yet enabled. Double click this icon to bring up the Off Normal Points screen. For more on this, refer to “Off Normal Points” starting on page 24.
Velocity Main Menu 23 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Download Monitors downloads as they occur. Monitor Double click this icon to bring up the Download Monitor screen which provides details of all downloads occurring at that moment. For more on this, refer to “Download Monitor” on page 134.
Threat Level This field indicates the current threat level for the system. If Velocity detects no threat, the level is 00.
Date Current date at this computer. The default format is month/day/year; however, this defaults to whichever format you specify in Control Panel (Date & Time).
Time Current time at this computer. The default format is a 12-hour clock with AM or PM; however, this defaults to whichever format you specify in Control Panel (Date & Time).
Off Normal Points The Off Normal Points dialog box provides a quick list of disabled points.
Two off-normal points
In most cases, off normal points describe two types of activities:
points associated with a controller, port, input, or expansion input that is temporarily disabled for maintenance points associated with a controller, port, input, or expansion input that has been programmed off-line and is connected but not yet enabled In both cases this usually means the 'Enable' checkbox in the device (point) definition is currently deselected (unchecked). Each off-normal entry is listed by name, type, and address. System Icons The components displayed in both the System Tree and Components windows can include these icons and the elements they represent:
This indicates: icon: Alarm Response
Credential Template
CCTV Port
24 Velocity Main Menu MAN007-0211
CCTV Switcher
CCTV or DVR Camera
Command Set
Controller (including the M1N, M2, M8, M16, or MSP)
Dial-Up Location
Door. This door is only enabled when the box to the left is checked. If unchecked, Velocity considers the door's constituents (input, relay, keypad, etc.)
Door Group
DVR Camera
E-mail Writer
Expansion Input (Red = Active, Black = Inactive)
Expansion Relay (Red = Active, Black = Virtual)
Folder. One or more elements of the tree are contained under this topic.
Function Group
Holiday
Input
Operator
Person Template
Reader
Relay
Role
Serial Port Writer
SNET Port. The physical link between the host PC and the controller using the serial SNET protocol.
Trigger Action Manager
XBox. The device that enables multiple controllers to communicate with Velocity using the XNET protocol.
XML Writer
XNET Port. The physical link between the host PC and one or more controllers through an XBox using the XNET protocol.
Workstation
Velocity Main Menu 25 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Navigating Velocity
Navigating Between Modules Velocity modules are of two types and can be accessed in three different ways:
One Velocity module, SQL Database Manager, is a separate entity. This program can be opened from the Windows desktop as well as within Velocity. You can toggle between open modules by using either the Windows option on the Velocity menu bar or pressing the Ctrl + Tab key combination. Five other Velocity modules—Report Manager, Enrollment Manager, Customization Manager, Badge & Graphic Designer, and Task Scheduler—can only be opened from within Velocity. You can toggle between open modules by pressing the Alt + Tab key combination or by clicking the appropriate icon in the Windows system tray. You can dock or undock some Velocity modules by right clicking in the window's title bar. Dockable modules are:
Administration Alarm Viewer Event Viewer Status Viewer Using the Mouse and Keyboard While most of the mouse and keyboard methods in Velocity are the same as most other MS Windows products, Velocity has a few differences as well. Mouse Functions The mouse can be used to move items around the screen or select options from pop-up menus. In general, these functions are active within Velocity: Point Move the mouse and the cursor it controls to a word, phrase, icon, link, or other window function. In many cases, if you hold the mouse over a link or option for more than three seconds, a short message pops up telling you what the option or link does. Click Point your mouse and press the left mouse button. If this is an active area of the screen, this procedure selects and activates the feature or program. Right Click Point the mouse and press the right mouse button. If this is an active area of the screen, the user will see a pop-up option list displaying one or more options. Drag Point and click an item (normally an icon or object) on the desktop. Then, with the left mouse button held down, pull the selected item to another part of the screen. Then release the mouse button to leave the item in the new location. If this is text, the action selects and highlights the text specified by the dragging motion.
Keyboard Functions These are functions that use keys on the keyboard to enter information. The keyboard can also be used to exit windows, activate programs, or perform functions.
26 Navigating Velocity MAN007-0211
Some functions that are performed repeatedly utilize the Control (Ctrl) or Alt (Alt) key in combination with other keys. Newer keyboards also possess a Windows key, which has a Windows symbol on it. This key is used in combination with several letters to bring up integrated Windows programs. These key combinations are called hot keys, shortcut keys, or keyboard shortcuts. For a complete list of hot keys used in this program, refer to “Velocity Hot Keys” starting on page 22. Cursor keys refer to the up, down, left, and right arrow keys normally located on the number pad portion of your keyboard. Using Velocity Fields and Tools Velocity fields differ little from the fields you use throughout MS Windows. A brief introduction to the fields and tools should help you use them successfully. A few of the common field types are shown here:
Field Icon Name Description
Radio Button This is a toggle button. It is either selected or cleared; there is no third choice. To select, click in the circle and dot appears; to clear it, click again and the dot disappears.
Check Box Like the radio button, the check box is either selected or cleared; there is no third option. To select, click the box and a check mark appears; to deselect, click again and the check mark disappears.
Text Type the required text into this field. The length of the text string depends on the type of information required. (Frequently, the required size of the string is specified next to the field.)
Combo Box / Either type in the required value or click the down Option Box arrow to the right of the box, and a list of possible options appears. Depending on the type of information required, you will see all currently-defined instances of the type displayed. In lists such as Time Zone options,
Navigating Velocity 27 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Field Icon Name Description
Spin Control This field is used to increment or decrement a value as required. Use the up spin control button to increase the value in the box; use the down spin control button to decrease the value. You can also type a value directly into the box. With more complex versions of this field, you can use the Tab key or mouse to move from one field within the box to the next, using the spin control buttons to change each field value as required.
Tool/Button
Slider Bar Use this tool to move a window or list left or right, up or down. This can be either vertical or horizontal depending on the type of list. If a list in a window is longer than the window can accommodate, the slider will be vertical; if the list is wider than the window, the slider will be horizontal. Both horizontal and vertical sliders appear when a list is both longer and wider than a window can fit.
Button These come in many sizes and shapes. Normally they are used to bring up another window or dialog box or, as in the case of this example, to confirm and store the current values for a dialog box and return to a previous screen. Position your mouse over the button then left-click. The OK button can also be accessed by pressing the Enter key on your keyboard.
Pop-Up Box The pop-up box is normally activated by the right mouse button. Right-clicking can bring up a pop-up box in many places within Velocity. For example, if you right click on a Velocity module's title bar, the docking box appears. The option that appears depends on the field or function closest to the click. Switching Operators Use this option to switch between authorized operators without exiting Velocity. To switch between operators: 1. From the menu tool bar, select File > Switch Operator... The Switch Operator dialog box appears.
2. At the 'User Name' field, enter the name of this operator.
28 Navigating Velocity MAN007-0211
3. At the 'Password' field, enter the password for this operator. 4. If required, at the 'Domain' pick list, select a domain represented by this operator. This field is normally only used in single workstation installations that are authenticating against a domain controller. Select either the local computer workgroup (default) or the windows domain to which the computer belongs. 5. Click OK. The Velocity screen appropriate to this operator appears. Only those rights and permissions authorized for this operator appear. If a window is open that is not permitted for the new operator, it is closed automatically. Locking Workstations There are many instances when an operator will need to leave his/her post. While away, they should secure Velocity by locking the computer. To lock the Velocity workstation:
At the Velocity menu bar, select File > Lock Workstation. The Windows log on screen appears, listing all currently enrolled users of this machine. All programs currently running, including Velocity, remain running in the background. In order to secure your system, you must have a Windows password. Consult your system or Windows administrator for more on this. A user without a password is inviting intrusion. To unlock a locked Velocity workstation: 1. Click the operator name on the log on screen. A password screen appears. 2. Enter a valid password and click OK. The Velocity program reappears in exactly the same state as when you locked it.
Navigating Velocity 29 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Managing Desktop Space
There are times when Velocity operators will find themselves with multiple Velocity windows open. Velocity enables an operator to view several windows on the screen at one time. For example, an operator might be monitoring the Event Viewer, the Alarm Viewer, and a map-level view of a floor using the Badge & Graphics Designer module while simultaneously enrolling new employees. This requires that four separate windows be open at the same time. Even with dual monitors this can become crowded. Luckily, Velocity provides the ability to rearrange windows using a number of different techniques: operators can dock or float multiple windows as well as treat several windows as child entities within another window or associate specified windows with specified Velocity modules. Managing Velocity Windows Ordinarily, Velocity modules are tied (docked) to the main Velocity screen; however, this is not always necessary or useful. To rearrange Velocity windows: 1. Bring up the Velocity module you want to arrange. This technique does not apply to dialog boxes or pages within a module, only to the main screens of certain Velocity modules, including Event Viewer, Alarm Viewer, Administration, and Status Viewer. This technique does not work with Enrollment Manager, Graphics, Report Manager, Customization Manager, SQL Database Manager, or Scheduling Agent. 2. Right click on the module's title bar. A pop-up option list appears like this:
3. Select the option you want. The available options are:
Docked Affix to the nearest available corner of the screen on startup. Modules that can be docked are: • Administration • Alarm Viewer •Event Viewer • Status Viewer • Who’s Inside
Floating Allow to move outside the boundaries of the main Velocity program. This enables operators to drag the module outside the Velocity window to a free space where it can be easily viewed, such as to a second monitor (if dual monitors are configured for this system).
30 Managing Desktop Space MAN007-0211
MDI Keep the window inside its current module. Child For example, if you specify that Alarm Viewer is a child while it is inside the main Velocity screen, then you cannot move it outside the Velocity frame. The windows you can set as an MDI child are: • Administration • Alarm Viewer • Event Viewer • Status Viewer • Who’s Inside
Docked Specify where the window should be fixed within the Windows to desktop: top, left, bottom, right. You can specify which corner the window adheres to using the Docked to... option.
MDI Specify whether the current module should be minimized, Child as maximized, or restored within the parent window. Attempts to move it outside the Velocity shell will fail. •If Minimized, the window appears as an icon within the main Velocity window. •If Maximized, the window opens at the largest possible size within the main Velocity screen. •If Restored, the window appears at its default size within the Velocity screen.
MDI is the abbreviation for Multiple Document Interface. 4. When you release the mouse button over your choice, the window is set. 5. If you selected Docked, select the required docking relationship from the Docked to list. If you selected MDI Child, select the required child relationship from the MDI Child as list. You can arrange two or more open windows into various patterns using the Window option on the menu bar. You can also resize Velocity windows as required using normal MS Windows resizing techniques. Column Management One of the most overlooked features of Velocity is column management. This is a feature built into most Windows products but is frequently not discussed.
Managing Desktop Space 31 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Velocity has many screens that contain columns as shown below:
Prime examples of this are:
Enrollment Manager People tree pane Enrollment Manager Credentials pane Event Viewer main screen Alarm Viewer main screen Customization Manager main screen Status Viewer main screen Who’s Inside screen
32 Managing Desktop Space MAN007-0211
Sorting By Column Header When you have a list in a columnated window, you can sort the list according to any feature in the column. For example, if we wanted to sort the People Tree List by first name rather than last name, all we would have to do is click on the First Name column and the list is automatically reordered like this example:
Notice that the list is now ordered alphabetically A - Z by first name rather than last. Click the First Name column again and the list inverts: you now see the list sorted Z - A like this:
You can perform this same ordering trick for any column appearing in the table. For example, if you want to reorder the list by ID, scroll over to the ID column and click the ID column header. The list is reordered by ID number. This provides an easy way to rearrange people, credentials, or any other list element by a category value without using a search filter. Rearranging Column Headers In addition to sorting, Velocity also enables you to move column headers from one position to another in the following modules:
Event Viewer Alarm Viewer Status Viewer This feature is not available in the Enrollment Manager, Customization Manager, or Who’s Inside. To do this, simply left click on the column header you want to move and drag it to the new location.
Managing Desktop Space 33 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
For example, say you want to move the Status column in Status Viewer from its current position to the left of Address:
To do this, click on the Status column header and drag it to the left until it is on top of the Address header then drop it. The Status Viewer changes to look like this:
Resizing Columns and Panes Windows enables you to resize both panes and columns in the same manner. To do this: 1. Move your mouse pointer to the column or pane border. The pointer icon changes. If it rests over the division line between panes, it changes to this:
depending on whether the pane or column is arranged horizontally or vertically. If it rests over the division line between columns, it changes to this:
2. Click your left mouse button and drag the border in whichever direction you need. Release the mouse button and the column or pane is resized.
34 Managing Desktop Space MAN007-0211
Using Velocity Programs
Velocity programs (modules) are accessible in one of three ways:
With the top-level Configuration folder highlighted in the System Tree pane, Velocity modules are displayed in the Components pane. Double click the required module to open it. From the Console Options on the main menu bar. Select the required module to open. From the icon bar, click the required icon.
Hint The term Velocity program is used interchangeably with Velocity module in Velocity Help when referring to the interlinked routines that make up the Velocity suite.
The modules currently available are:
Select this Module: To: Velocity Configuration Configure the Velocity program.
DIGI*TRAC Configure hardware comprising the Velocity system. Configuration
Interfaces Configure and use attached CCTV systems, Serial Port Configuration Writer, E-mail Writer, XML Writers, and attached DVRs.
Add-Ins Learn to operate both the Add-In Manager and the Server Extension features.
Alarm Viewer View and manage alarms as they occur throughout the security system.
Badge & Graphic Design and draw badges for Velocity. Designer The Designer opens in Badge mode.
CCTV Camera Viewer Configure and operate a CCTV subsystem connected to Velocity. This enables you to view live video from the attached cameras. A CCTV Camera Viewer option appears in the Components pane when the top-level Configuration folder is selected in the System Tree pane.
Customization Customize the Velocity database and interface for the Manager specific needs of this client.
DVR Camera Viewer Open Video Explorer. This option appears in the Components pane when the top-level Configuration folder is selected in the System Tree pane.
Enrollment Manager Enroll people (badge and/or code holders) as well as create and assign credentials to those enrolled people for this security system.
Event Viewer View events as they occur throughout the security system.
Using Velocity Programs 35 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Select this Module: To: Graphics Create map views of security systems throughout the system. Place alarm and relay points on these maps and administer them directly from the maps. Designer opens in Graphics mode.
Report Manager Generate and create reports on system security and Velocity operations.
SQL Manager Manage the Velocity database. This option links directly to the SQL 2005 Database Manager. If you are using the run-time version of SQL 2005, SQL 2005 Express, the management program is SQL Server Management Studio Express.
Status Viewer View real-time status of all components connected to this Velocity system.
Scheduling Agent Schedule housekeeping for the Velocity system including credential activation/deactivation and system archiving.
Video Explorer Display Video Explorer for DVR viewing. The Video Explorer option appears in the Components pane when the top-level Configuration folder is selected in the System Tree pane.
Who's Inside Track the identity of people inside a designated zone.
These modules enable you to handle every aspect of security. Advice for Operators If you are an operator, you won’t need to access the configuration functions in Velocity. Your main duties involve the following modules:
Use: To: See:
Alarm Viewer View, acknowledge and clear alarms as they page 39 occur. The Alarm Viewer appears automatically whenever a new alarm occurs.
Status Viewer View real-time status of all components page 53 connected to this Velocity system.
Graphics View existing maps and, with the proper page 67 permission, respond to alarms and issue commands using the map icons.
Enrollment Enroll people and assign them credentials. page 83 Manager
36 Using Velocity Programs MAN007-0211
Use: To: See:
Report Generate reports. page 177 Manager The job of customizing existing reports is normally an administrator function.
Control Monitor and control security functions from page 203 Functions both Graphics and the System Tree pane.
CCTV Monitor your CCTV subsystem. page 231
DVR Monitor, retrieve, review, and export video from page 237 your attached DVR subsystem.
Who’s Inside Monitor a specified area and identify who is page 273 currently inside that area.
As an operator, you might never have to use these modules:
Velocity Configuration DIGI*TRAC Configuration Interfaces Configuration Badge & Graphics Designer (Badge mode) Customization Manager SQL Database Manager Task Scheduler
Using Velocity Programs 37 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
38 Using Velocity Programs MAN007-0211 Alarm Viewer
Alarm Viewer is the module in Velocity that enables a qualified operator to view alarms as they occur, react to them as required, and dispose of them as needed. This section includes the following topics:
Opening Alarm Viewer (page 40) Alarm Viewer Main Screen (page 41) Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity desktop (page 45) How To Use Alarm Viewer (page 46) Acknowledging Alarms (page 46) Clearing Alarms (page 47) Displaying a Credential (page 47) Adding Operator Notes (page 48) Viewing a map from Alarm Viewer (page 51)
39 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Starting Alarm Viewer
Use the Alarm Viewer to view and respond to all alarms Velocity detects on this security system. To open the Alarm Viewer, do one of these:
From Velocity, press F8. From the Velocity desktop, click the Configuration file in the System Tree window and select Alarm Viewer from the Component window, . From the Velocity menu bar, select Console > Alarm Viewer. From the Velocity main menu status line, double click on either the 'Active Alarms' or 'Ack. Alarms' status field. The status line displays the number of alarms Velocity currently detects in either the acknowledged or unacknowledged states. The Alarm Viewer appears.
40 Starting Alarm Viewer MAN007-0211
Alarm Viewer Main Screen
The Alarm Viewer screen looks like this example:
This screen is divided into these sections:
Icon bar Click one of these icons to perform a variety of tasks. For more on this, see “Icon Bar” on page 42.
Unacknowledged This pane shows all the alarms Velocity has detected which Alarms pane have not yet been acknowledged by an operator. The columns displayed are defined in “Alarm Viewer Columns” on page 42. Alarms are listed in order of their priority level. Alarms assigned the highest priority are shown at the top of the list. Initially, all alarms have the same level 1 priority. You can change alarm priority levels through the Customization Manager. To scroll through the available columns, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the pane. Like most tables in Velocity you can both sort the alarms on this list and reorder columns in the table using Column Management.
Acknowledged This pane shows all the alarms Velocity has detected which Alarms pane have been acknowledged by an operator. The columns displayed are defined in “Alarm Viewer Columns” on page 42. To scroll through the available columns, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the pane. Like most tables in Velocity you can both sort the alarms on this list and reorder columns in the table using Column Management.
Comments pane This pane displays either instructions or notes depending on which tab is selected. The instructions or notes apply to the currently-selected alarm.
Instructions When the Instructions tab is selected, it displays any window instructions specified for this alarm.
Notes window When the Notes tab is selected, the operator can type notes pertaining to a specific alarm.
This screen is either viewable or hidden from view based on the role assigned to a specific operator.
Alarm Viewer Main Screen 41 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon Bar There are a number of options you can perform either by using the menu bar options or right clicking your mouse.
Icon Click this icon to:
Acknowledge the currently selected alarm.
Clear the currently selected alarm.
Acknowledge all alarms in the unacknowledged alarms pane.
Clear all alarms in the acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms pane, depending on which pane was selected when the button was clicked.
Record a note. When you click this icon, the Operator Comments dialog box appears. Type your note here.
View the current Alarm Viewer properties sheet. Change these properties if required.
Refresh the Alarm Viewer. This updates the Alarm Viewer immediately, adding any alarms that have occurred since the Alarm Viewer was opened.
View on-line help for this topic.
This bar and buttons on it are either enabled or disabled based on the role assigned to a specific operator. For more on acknowledging and clearing alarms, see “How To Use Alarm Viewer” on page 46. Alarm Viewer Columns Unacknowledged Alarms Pane The Unacknowledged Alarms pane contains columns of information pertaining to each alarm. These columns are:
This column displays the icon appropriate to the current alarm status. Available alarm status icons are: —An unacknowledged, unsecured, active alarm. —An unacknowledged but secure active alarm. —An RTN (return to normal): the alarm has returned to normal.
If the alarm generated is caused by or associated with a DVR camera, this icon appears in the alarm's column. You can either view the current video or replay stored video from the alarmed camera as required. For more on this, refer to Play Video and Get Recorded Video.
42 Alarm Viewer Main Screen MAN007-0211
Count If you have accepted the default Alarm Stacking enabled in Alarm Options Preferences, this column displays all occurrences of alarms for this device that are still unacknowledged. The earliest alarm is marked as 1 and each subsequent alarm is incremented.
Controller The current time at the controller site when this alarm occurred. Time This can be different from the host's time if the controller and host are in different time zones.
Host Time The current time at the Velocity host site when this alarm occurred. This can be different from the controller's time if the controller and host are in different time zones.
Description A brief description of the alarm
Address The specific location where this alarm took place using the standard address format. For more on interpreting the address format, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Level Level assigned an alarm. Initially, all alarms have the same level 1 priority. You can change alarm priority levels through the Customization Manager (see “How To Use Customization Manager” on page 678). For more on alarm levels, refer to “Alarm Levels” on page 698.
Alarm ID The ID generated by Velocity for this alarm. Each alarm type has a different alarm ID.
To include or exclude any of these columns from the pane, refer to the Column Headers section of the the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Acknowledged Alarms Pane The Acknowledged Alarms pane contains these columns of information pertaining to each alarm. These columns are:
This column displays the icon appropriate to the current alarm status. Available alarm status icons are: —An unacknowledged, unsecured, active alarm. —An unacknowledged but secure active alarm. —An RTN (return to normal): the alarm has returned to normal.
If the alarm generated is caused by or associated with a DVR camera, this icon appears in the alarm's column. You can either view the current video or replay stored video from the alarmed camera as required. For more on this, refer to Play Video and Get Recorded Video.
Alarm Viewer Main Screen 43 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Count If you have accepted the default Alarm Stacking enabled in Alarm Options Preferences, this column displays all occurrences of alarms for this device that are still unacknowledged. The earliest alarm is marked as 1 and each subsequent alarm is incremented.
Controller The current time at the controller site when this alarm occurred. Time This can be different from the host's time if the controller and host are in different time zones.
Host Time The current time at the Velocity host site when this alarm occurred. This can be different from the controller's time if the controller and host are in different time zones.
Acknowledge The date and time when this alarm was acknowledged. Time
Workstation The unique ID generated by Velocity for the Velocity workstation acknowledging this alarm.
Description A brief description of the alarm.
Address The specific location where this alarm took place using the standard address format. For more on interpreting the address format, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Acknowledged The operator acknowledging the alarm. By
Level Level assigned an alarm. Initially, all alarms have the same level 1 priority. You can change alarm priority levels through the Customization Manager (see “How To Use Customization Manager” on page 678). For more on alarm levels, refer to “Alarm Levels” on page 698.
Alarm ID The ID generated by Velocity for this alarm. Each alarm type has a different alarm ID.
To include or exclude any of these columns from the pane, refer to the Column headers section of the the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. To sort and manage columns on either pane, refer to “Column Management” on page 35.
44 Alarm Viewer Main Screen MAN007-0211
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop
If you aren't using a multiple monitor setup for your Velocity workstation, you may have to arrange Velocity modules so you can see them all on the screen. Velocity enables an operator to reposition the Alarm Viewer on the Velocity desktop using the docking and floating features. To position Alarm Viewer: 1. Resize the Alarm Viewer as you require using the standard window resizing techniques (such as moving the cursor over the Alarm Viewer corner until the cursor changes to a two-way arrow then left clicking the mouse key and changing the window dimensions). 2. Right click anywhere in the Alarm Viewer title bar. The dock/float options appear. 3. Select the docking or floating attributes you need. This not only resizes the Alarm Viewer screen but imposes the desired limitations of the screens visibility and movement within the Velocity desktop space.
Placing Alarm Viewer on the Velocity Desktop 45 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
How To Use Alarm Viewer
While you're in Alarm Viewer, you can perform the following tasks:
Acknowledge an alarm Acknowledge all alarms Clear an alarm Clear all alarms Add a note to an alarm View instructions for an alarm View credential Replay sound file Copy to clipboard Go to the map to see an alarm Refresh alarms list Play DVR Video Replay recorded DVR video Most of these tasks can be accomplished in one of several ways. For specific instructions, see the following procedures. Acknowledging an Alarm To acknowledge an alarm, do one of these:
In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to acknowledge. Click the Acknowledge icon from the menu bar, . In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to acknowledge. Right click on the highlighted alarm and select Acknowledge from the pop-up option list. The alarm is moved to the Acknowledged Alarms window and the alarm tone for that alarm is halted. Acknowledging All Alarms Use this function to move all alarms currently Unacknowledged to the Acknowledged Alarms pane. Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are satisfied that none of them requires comment or special response. To acknowledge all alarms, do one of these:
Click the Acknowledge All icon from the menu bar, . In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, right click on one of the alarms you want to acknowledge and select Acknowledge All from the pop-up option list. All alarms in the Unacknowledged Alarms pane are moved to the Acknowledged Alarms pane and the alarm tone for all alarms is halted. You can acknowledge any number of alarms up to the maximum specified in the 'Maximum Alarms to Display on Refresh' setting (see the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide). If you are trying to acknowledge more than this number of alarms, you must do it in sections.
46 How To Use Alarm Viewer MAN007-0211
Clearing an Alarm Clearing an alarm removes the alarm from the Acknowledged Alarms pane. Before you clear an alarm, you must first acknowledge it. To clear an alarm, do one of these:
From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to clear. Click the Clear icon, , from the menu bar. From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, click to highlight the alarm you want to clear. Right click on the highlighted alarm and select Clear from the pop-up option list. The alarm is erased. A record of it still appears in the Event Viewer. Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are satisfied that none of them requires comment or special response. Clearing All Alarms Clearing all alarms removes all alarms from the Acknowledged Alarms pane. Before you clear all alarms, you must first acknowledge all the alarms. You cannot clear alarms from the Unacknowledged Alarms pane unless you have previously unchecked the ‘Require Acknowledge before Clearing’ box on the Preferences Alarm Options page (see page 50). To clear all alarms in the Acknowledged Alarms pane, do one of these:
Click the Clear All icon from the menu bar, . From the Acknowledged Alarms pane, right click on one of the alarms and select Clear All from the pop-up option list. All alarms in the Acknowledged Alarms pane are erased. A record of these alarms are still kept in the Event Viewer. Don't use this function unless you have inspected each alarm and are satisfied that none of them needs to be retained. Displaying a Credential When Alarm Viewer records an alarm involving a credential, such as deny access or incorrect key entry, a qualifier operator can review the credential from within this module. To display a credential: 1. From Alarm Viewer, right click on the alarm in question. A pop list appears. 2. Select Display Credential from the pop-up list. The badge template associated with that credential holder appears. The credential only appears if you have selected a specific badge template under console preferences. For more on this, refer to “General Page Preferences” on page 47. Only that information specified by the badge template appears (see page 494).
How To Use Alarm Viewer 47 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Copying to Clipboard Use this feature to paste selected alarm entries from the Alarm Viewer into another program, such as a text editor or E-mail program. To copy specified alarms to the clipboard: 1. From either the Unacknowledged or Acknowledged Alarms panes, click to highlight one or more alarms. Use Ctrl + click to select a non-contiguous group of entries. Use Shift + click to select a contiguous range of entries. 2. Right click on the highlighted alarm(s) and select Copy to Clipboard from the pop-up option list. 3. Open another program that can accept a clipboard entry, such as a text editor, word processor, or E-mail agent. 4. Paste (Ctrl + V) the alarm text into the program as required. Operator Notes When you add a note, it is displayed in the Comments pane on the right side of the screen. Notes are generally made:
as a response to a specific deviation from an expected alarm as a required response to a particular alarm as a description of how a specific alarm was resolved To add a note to an alarm: 1. From either the Unacknowledged or Acknowledged pane, do one of these: • Right click on an alarm you want to annotate and select Add Operator Note. • Click to highlight the alarm you want to note. Click the Add Note icon from the menu bar, . The Operator Notes dialog box appears like this example:
If you have one or more of the appropriate boxes checked on the Preferences Alarm Options page, the Operator Comments text box appears automatically when you try to acknowledge and/or clear alarms. The Operator Notes dialog box has three windows: • The top window displays a brief description of the currently selected alarm. This field is automatically populated by Velocity. • The 'Select an Alarm Response' combo box provides a list of previously defined Alarm Responses.
48 How To Use Alarm Viewer MAN007-0211
• The bottom window is a text box that provides space for a qualified operator to enter information about this alarm, when needed.Type the note you need to make in this text field. 2. If required, click the 'Select an Alarm Response (Optional)...' combo box and select a previously defined Alarm Response. This is an optional feature. The text associated with the selected Alarm Response is attached to the alarm. 3. In the bottom window, enter the text you need to describe this alarm and/or the nature of its resolution. 4. When you're finished, press Enter or click OK. Once a note is entered for an alarm, whenever the alarm is selected, the date, time, operator and note type appear in the upper pane under the Notes tab like the following example:
No text appears in the lower text box. To view a note you have created for this alarm, refer to the brief instructions below. To display the actual note: 1. Click the Notes tab on the Comments pane. 2. Select the alarm with the associated note. The date, time, and operator appear in the upper window of the pane as shown in the example above. 3. From the upper window of the Comments pane, click the note you want to display. The associated note appears in the lower window of the pane like the following example:
If you have selected an Alarm Response, the text associated with this selection appears in the lower window. For more on defining Alarm Responses, refer to “Alarm Responses” on page 337.
How To Use Alarm Viewer 49 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Replaying a WAV File You can replay a WAV (sound) file associated with a particular alarm using the following option. WAV files are associated with an alarm using the Options column in the Customization Manager. To replay a WAV file: 1. In the Unacknowledged Alarms pane, right click the alarm whose sound file you want to replay. 2. From the pop-up option list, select Replay WAV File. Playing DVR Video If a video symbol, , appears in the video column for this alarm, you can view video from the alarmed camera. To play DVR video: 1. Right click on the selected alarm in either the Acknowledged or Unacknowledged Alarms panes. A pop-up list appears. 2. Select DVR Alarm Video > Show Viewer. The Live Video screen appears showing video from the camera associated with this alarm for the time specified in the alarm. Get Recorded Alarm Video If a video symbol, , appears in the video column for this alarm, you can replay video stored by the DVR for the alarmed camera. To get recorded alarm video: 1. Right click on the selected alarm in either the Acknowledged or Unacknowledged Alarms panes. A pop-up list appears. 2. Select DVR Alarm Video > Get Recorded Alarm Video. The Recorded Alarm Video screen appears like this example:
All video selections for the time specified in the alarm window appear here. 3. Double click the selection you want. The selected video plays in the Live Video screen.
50 How To Use Alarm Viewer MAN007-0211
Viewing Instructions for an Alarm Alarms can have instructions associated with them. These instructions tell the operator how to proceed, what process to use, or who to call for a specific alarm. Instructions can be associated with specific alarms through the Instructions column on the Customization Manager. For more on this, refer to “Creating Instructions” on page 698. To view instructions for an alarm: 1. Click the Instructions tab of the Comments pane. 2. Click on the alarm you want in either the Acknowledged Alarms or Unacknowledged Alarms panes. The instructions appear under the Instructions tab on the right side of the screen. Viewing a Map for an Alarm Sometimes it's just easier to visualize the location of an alarm if you can see it on a map. This feature enables the operator to jump from an unacknowledged alarm to an existing map in order to display the icon representing the currently alarmed component. To view a map associated with an alarm component: 1. Right click on a selected alarm in the Unacknowledged Alarms panes. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Go to Graphic. The program jumps to the Graphic module and displays the alarm on the map. 3. Control the alarm with the graphics module using the instructions found in the Velocity Operator’s Guide under these topics: • “Controlling Placed Objects,” starting on page 75 • “Access & Control Functions,” starting on page 203 Refresh Alarms on the Alarm Viewer Once the Alarm Viewer appears it only displays the alarms it has trapped up to the time the Viewer was opened. The Refresh List option clears and repopulates the viewer. The number of alarms it can grab at one time is specified by the number specified in the ‘Maximum Alarms to Display on Refresh’ field (see the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide). To add any new alarms that might have occurred while the Alarm Viewer was open, use this feature. To refresh the Alarm Viewer:
Click the Refresh List icon, . You can also rearrange columns in order to sort information on the page. For more on this, refer to the “Column Management” on page 35.
How To Use Alarm Viewer 51 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Closing Alarm Viewer
To close Alarm Viewer, perform one of these actions:
Click the button in the upper right hand corner of the screen header bar. Click the Hirsch symbol in the upper left hand corner of the screen header bar, , and select Close from the drop-down list. With the Alarm Viewer window selected, press Ctrl + F4.
52 Closing Alarm Viewer MAN007-0211 Status Viewer
The Status Viewer enables you to quickly review all of the current component settings. To open the Status Viewer, use one of these methods:
From the components window, double click the Status Viewer option, . From the icon tool bar, click the Status Viewer icon, . From the menu bar, select Console > Status Viewer. Press F9. The Status Viewer main screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer Main Screen” on page 54. Once the Status Viewer appears, review it as required.
Expand each component group Review current status for selected groups (page 60) Perform tasks (page 60) Define status groups (page 62) For dial-up connections, status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a current dial-up connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking status, Velocity will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not be continuously updated.
53 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status Viewer Main Screen
One possible version of Status Viewer looks like this example:
This viewer includes the following fields and buttons:
Click this button to display only those points currently masked in this status window. A simplified screen appears like this example:
Notice that the reason for masking each item is displayed in the third column, 'Reason Masked'. To display all currently selected points again in the status window, click the Status Group button. The Masked and Status Group buttons are mutually exclusive: if one is selected, the other one is deselected.
Select the class of points from the drop-down list you want to display. This filters the points displayed. The Masked and Status Group buttons are mutually exclusive: if one is selected, the other one is deselected. Only those points currently defined for this status group appear in this list.
Select the status group from this drop-down list that you want to display in the status window. Only those status groups currently defined for this system appear in this list. None is the default.
Click this button to display the Status Viewer Properties and either define a new status group or modify an existing status group. For more on this, refer to Status Viewer Properties.
status Displays the status of all currently selected points. The columns that window appear change according to the type of component displayed. For a complete description of the columns and items displayed here, refer to Status Window Columns below.
Click this button to display Velocity online help.
54 Status Viewer Main Screen MAN007-0211
Status Window Columns The columns and items for each component type are described briefly here:
Component Columns Explanation
Doors Door Name Name assigned to this door
Address Address Velocity generated for this door. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Status of inputs associated with this door (i.e. active, inactive, open circuit, etc.)
Alarm Indicates whether this door is currently alarmed (Yes) or not (-).
Masked Indicates whether this door's input is currently masked (Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled Is this door enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM Status of this door's line module Alarm point. All LMs have a first point for Alarms. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE Status of this door's line module RQE point. All LM2s and LM3s have a second point for RQEs. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR Status of this door's line module Tamper point. All LM3s have a third point for tamper. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM Type of line module associated with this door, where: 1 = LM1 2 = LM2 3 = LM3
LM Volts Voltage level for this door's line module.
Relay Whether the relay associated with this door is currently ON or OFF.
2PR Is this door enabled for two-person rule? (Yes/No)
Updated The date and time when the status of this door was last refreshed.
Inputs Input Name Name assigned to this input
Status Viewer Main Screen 55 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Component Columns Explanation
Address Address Velocity generated for this input. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of this input (i.e. active, inactive, etc.)
Alarm Indicates whether this input is currently alarmed (Yes) or not (-).
Masked Indicates whether this input is currently masked (Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled Is this input currently enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM Status of this line module's Alarm point. All LMs have a first point for Alarms. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE Status of this line module's RQE point. All LM2s and LM3s have a second point for RQEs. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR Status of this line module's Tamper point. All LM3s have a third point for tamper. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM Type of line module this input uses, where: 1 = LM1 2 = LM2 3 = LM3
LM Volts Voltage level for this line module.
Updated The date and time when the status of this input was last refreshed.
Relays Relay Name Name assigned to this relay.
Address Address Velocity generated for this relay. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of this relay (i.e. active, inactive, etc.).
Updated The date and time when the status of this relay was last refreshed.
Readers Reader Name Name assigned to this reader.
56 Status Viewer Main Screen MAN007-0211
Component Columns Explanation
Address Address Velocity generated for this reader. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of this reader.
Code Tamper Indicates whether this reader is currently experiencing a code tamper condition (Yes) or not.
Physical Indicates whether this reader is currently Tamper experiencing a physical tamper condition (Yes) or not.
Updated The date and time when the status of this reader was last refreshed.
Controllers Controller Name assigned to this controller Name
Address Address Velocity generated for this controller. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of this controller (online, inactive, etc.).
Enclosure Current status of the door protecting this controller board. The lock alarm can indicate one of three conditions: secure (door is closed), tamper (door is ajar), or blank if the system does not know.
Enabled Is this controller currently enabled for Velocity? (Yes/No)
Terminal Indicates whether this controller is using a SCIB to connect to a terminal. This enables it to issue D*T commands directly to the controller through an terminal emulate program. (Logged ON/Logged OFF)
AC Power The voltage/amperage at which this controller is running.
UPS Battery Current status of this controller’s UPS. (OK/Weak/Failed)
Local Whether this controller is currently being Programming programmed by an attached keypad. (OFF/ON)
Mem Current state of controller memory. (OK/Parity Error/etc.)
Status Viewer Main Screen 57 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Component Columns Explanation
Printer Current state of the connected parallel printer. (Offline/Online)
S Printer Current state of any connected serial printer. (Offline/Online)
Tamper Current tamper state (Pending/Not Pending). Pending
Updated The date and time when the status of this controller was last refreshed.
XBoxes XBox Name Name assigned to this XBox.
Address Address Velocity generated for this XBox. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Enabled Is this XBox currently active? (Yes/No)
Rev What is the revision number for this XBox as detected by Velocity?
Updated The date and time when the status of this XBox was last refreshed.
Ports Port Name Name assigned to this port.
Address Address Velocity generated for this port. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of the port.
Enabled Is this port currently active? (Yes/No)
Updated The date and time when the status of this port was last refreshed.
Expansion Inputs XInput Name Name assigned to this expansion input.
Address Address Velocity generated for this expansion input. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of the expansion input.
Alarm Indicates whether this expansion input is currently alarmed (Yes) or not (-).
58 Status Viewer Main Screen MAN007-0211
Component Columns Explanation
Masked Indicates whether this expansion input is currently masked (Yes) or unmasked (-).
Enabled Is this input currently enabled? (Yes/No)
1ALRM Status of this line module's Alarm point. All LMs have a first point for Alarms. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
2RQE Status of this door's line module RQE point. All LM2s and LM3s have a second point for RQEs. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
3TMPR Status of this door's line module Tamper point. All LM3s have a third point for tamper. If no point is detected, a dash appears.
LM Type of line module this input uses, where: 1 = LM1 2 = LM2 3 = LM3
LM Volts Voltage level for this line module.
Updated The date and time when the status of this expansion input was last refreshed.
Expansion Relays XRelay Name Name assigned to this expansion relay.
Address Address Velocity generated for this expansion relay. For more on interpreting this address format, refer to “Address Format” on page 422.
Status Current status of this expansion relay.
Updated The date and time when the status of this expansion relay was last refreshed.
Status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a current dial-up connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking status, Velocity will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not be accurate. Expand or contract each component type as required.
To expand a component type, click the plus button to the left of the group, . The plus button becomes a minus button. To contract an expanded group, click the minus button, . The minus button becomes a plus button.
Status Viewer Main Screen 59 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status Viewer: How to Use
To customize the status viewer: 1. From the main Velocity screen, do one of these: • From the icon tool bar, click the Status Viewer icon, . • From the menu bar, select Console > Status Viewer. •Press F9. The Status Viewer main screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer Main Screen” on page 54. 2. From the 'Status Group' combo box, select one of the available options: • one of the existing status groups • None to display no status The window changes to display all components for the selected status group. If required, create a new status group. We strongly recommend that you create status groups as soon as possible, since viewing the status of 'all points' (the default value) on all controllers can take a long time. Velocity must poll each point on all connected controllers before it displays the results. For instructions on adding, modifying, or configuring a status group, click Create Status Groups. 3. If required, customize the column headers that appear on the status viewer. 4. Expand or contract each component group as required and monitor the current status of the system. Polling status of the selected points takes place as soon as you pick the points you want to view. To decode messages, refer to “Status Messages” on page 65. 5. Perform one or more of the right-click tasks available for a selected component. For more on this, refer to “Status Viewer Right-Click Options” on page 60. 6. Click to exit Status Viewer and return to the main Velocity menu. Before you can view the status of inputs or expansion inputs, first configure the required inputs to report the required status. To do this, enable the required reporting features in either the door inputs general property sheet or inputs/expansion inputs general property sheet under the 'Enable State Change Reporting' section. Status is not available from the Status Viewer unless there is a current dial-up connection. If Velocity needs to dial up the connection before seeking status, Velocity will disconnect from the location after two minutes and status will not be accurate. Status Viewer Right-Click Options Status Viewer provides a variety of options you can perform from this module. To perform a task: 1. Right click on a specific component or point that appears in the status window. An option list appears.
60 Status Viewer: How to Use MAN007-0211
2. Select one of these options:
Click this option... To:
Access Functions Perform one of the access functions on the selected device. Only doors support this function.
Control Functions Perform one of the control functions on the selected device. Only those functions available to the device/point appear in the sublist. For example, a door supports a full set of control options while an expansion input or relay supports only some. All other categories of points do not support control functions at all.
Refresh Consult the controller for the most up-to-date information on the selected device/point.
Configure Device Bring up the properties sheet for the selected device/point. For example, if you select this option for a reader, the reader properties sheet for that reader appear. The qualified operator can change values on the property sheet and modify the device/point as required. When you're finished, click OK to return to the Status Group screen.
Status Viewer: How to Use 61 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Creating Status Groups
When you first open Status Viewer, you have a choice of only one group: All. This displays the status of all devices on all controllers throughout your entire system. This often provides a very large and daunting status list to the operator. In order to limit the number of devices shown in Status Viewer, you must create one or more status groups. To create a status group: 1. From the Status Viewer, click the Configure Status Group button, , on the menu tool bar. The Status Viewer Properties dialog box appears with the Status Groups page showing. For more on this, refer to “Status Groups Page” on page 63. 2. From the 'Status Group' combo box on the Status Group property sheet, select the
62 Creating Status Groups MAN007-0211
Status Groups Page The status groups page looks like this:
It includes these combo boxes, buttons, and windows:
Status Click this combo box to select the status group you want to display. Group: If you want to create a new status group, select
View as: Click the radio button that describes the components you want to view on the Status Viewer during the specified status group. Click All to display all relevant components. Available This window displays all the components you specified to show in the 'View as' section. Select from this window and the selection appears in the 'Selected' window.
Selected This window displays all the components you selected from the 'Available' window and included using one of the right arrow buttons.
Click this button to select only those components you have highlighted in the 'Available' window. They now appear in the 'Selected' window.
Click this button to select all the components appearing in the 'Available' window. All the components now appear in the 'Selected' window.
Creating Status Groups 63 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this button to remove one or more highlighted components from the 'Selected' window and return them to the 'Available' window.
Click this button to remove all displayed components from the 'Selected' window and return them to the 'Available' window.
For information on the Column Headers page, see the next topic. Column Headers Page When you select the Column Headers tab from the Status Viewer Properties dialog box, a screen like this example appears:
Use this page to define which columns appear on the Status Viewer for the specified Status Group. To customize the Status Viewer for this specific status group: 1. From the 'Object' combo box, select the object whose properties you want to define. The properties specific to the selected object appear in the lower window. 2. Check the boxes of all those properties you want displayed on the Status Viewer for the selected object. Only checked items appear as columns for that object on the Status Viewer; all unchecked items do not appear on the Status Viewer. 3. Rearrange the displayed columns as required. • Click the Move Up button to move a selected item up in priority. Each click moves the selected item one column left on the Status Viewer. The nearer the top an object appears in the 'Check an item...' window, the farther to the left it appears on the Status Viewer. • Click the Move Down button to move a selected item down the list. Each click moves the selected column to the right by one column on the Status Viewer. The nearer the bottom of the window an object appears, the farther to the right it appears on the Status Viewer. 4. Repeat Steps 1 - 3 for each object you need to customize this status group. 5. When you're finished, click OK to return to the Status Viewer. Changes to the look of the Viewer for this Status Group are reflected on the screen.
64 Creating Status Groups MAN007-0211
Status Messages Here is a complete list of status messages currently displayed by the Status Viewer together with their meaning:
Message Meaning Possible Response
Active This device is currently active None required. or actuated.
Inactive This device is currently inactive None required. or de-actuated.
Open Circuit Velocity has detected that Check to make sure the DTLM there is no DTLM input. is connected properly.
Secure No alarm, no tamper, and None required. relay OFF. Note: A door can have a Secure status even if it is being tampered with, so it's important to monitor the Status and Alarm Viewers.
Unlocked Relay ON. None required.
Masked Input is masked. None required.
Door open Switch open. None required.
Short Velocity has detected a short Check the circuit and in the circuit. connections between the controller and this device.
Noisy Velocity has detected unusual Check the circuit and static or noise on this line. connections between the controller and this device.
Out of spec Velocity has detected that the Check the circuit and voltage on this line is currently connections between the not within acceptable limits. controller and this device.
Relays have two possible normal states:
Energized (LED On) De-energized (LED Off) Inputs have two possible normal states:
Normally Open Normally Closed
Creating Status Groups 65 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
66 Creating Status Groups MAN007-0211 Graphics Designer
This section provides instructions on using those features in Graphics Designer generally performed by operators. Although Designer can also be used to design badges and maps, these features are only available to administrators. For more on these features, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Only a few qualified operators are assigned the role(s) necessary to enter Design Mode, design a drawing, design a badge template, and place icons on that drawing. A few more operators may have the role(s) required to control the objects that are placed on a map. Most operators possess a role enabling them to enter Graphics and perform the following tasks:
Display drawings Pan and zoom drawings View linked maps Monitor the status of all icons (objects) on the map Control objects on a map Acknowledge and clear alarms from a map Execute command sets Display credential information
67 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Displaying a Drawing
Unlike most programs, Designer opens all existing drawings when the module is opened. Your task is not to open the drawing but rather to select it from the drawing list. In effect, there is no Open function, nor is there a Close function as there is with most programs. The reason for this is that all drawings and graphics in Designer are stored in Velocity's SQL database rather than in separate files. This guarantees that your graphics and floor plans are stored in the same manner as your personnel data and cannot be readily accessed by an unwanted user. To select and display an existing drawing: 1. From the menu tool bar, select Modes > Graphic. All drawings currently stored in the Velocity database appear on the canvas with their own drawing tab displayed. 2. Do one of these: • From the drawing selection tab bar, click the tab that corresponds to the drawing you want to display. • From the Directory pane, expand the Drawings folder until the drawing you want appears. Double click the drawing you want. • On the Navigation Icon Tool Bar, click the button to see the previous drawing in the drawing list. Click the button to see the next drawing in the drawing list. The drawing appears in the canvas window. Switching between Drawings Whenever you open Designer you automatically open all drawings. These drawings are displayed in a stack on the canvas.
Hint You can tell how many drawings you have by looking either at the drawing selection tab bar at the bottom of the canvas or in the Directory pane under the VSO folder.
To switch between drawings, do one of these:
At the drawing selection tab, click the tab that corresponds to the drawing you want. In the Directory pane, expand the tree until the current drawing appears. Click on the drawing in the drawing tree. On the Navigation Icon Tool Bar, click the button to see the previous drawing in the drawing list. Click the button to see the next drawing in the drawing list. The drawing appears in the canvas window.
68 Displaying a Drawing MAN007-0211
Panning Drawings
Panning is the act of moving the center of a map or drawing from one spot to another. Panning is used for maps that are larger than the Graphics window can accommodate. For example, if the Graphics window is showing the northeast corner of a floor and you want to see the southeast corner, use the Pan function to move the map's viewing frame. To pan a map: 1. Go to Live Mode. 2. Bring up the drawing you want to pan. 3. Do one of these: • Right click in the canvas. A hand cursor icon appears. With the right button pressed, pull the canvas frame in whichever direction you require. • Open the Pan and Zoom Pane. In the Pan and Zoom pane, use your mouse to move the drawing around on the canvas.
Panning Drawings 69 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Viewing Linked Maps
The Graphics module enables the qualified operator to drill down from a main map to more detailed maps or drill up from a detail map to a general map. To view a linked map: 1. Make sure Designer is in Live mode. 2. Move your mouse across the canvas to the Link object, . The map to which this object is linked appears in the text box. The normal cursor pointer changes to a pointing finger. 3. Click the left mouse button. The map jumps to whichever map is currently linked to that location. This procedure only works if a qualified operator or administrator has previously imported the required maps then linked them.
70 Viewing Linked Maps MAN007-0211
Monitoring Placed Objects
Most operators have permission to monitor the state of the icons on maps. When an alarm occurs, the affected icon on the map displays a message like this example:
In general:
door open = alarm contact is active green border around door = RQE has not been pushed red door = tamper switch yellow background = noisy, shorted, out of spec, or open circuit yellow door = contact in open state red background = DOTL Icons show their states with a combination of shapes and color as shown below:
Icon Icon Description / States Type
Special
This indicates that this map is linked to another map either as a submap or an overview of the current map. Click this icon to see the linked map. The name of the map linked to this map appears in the text box.
This object indicates that it is associated with a command set. Click this icon to execute the command set. The name of the command set appears in the text box.
Indicates either the AXIS Digital Camera Viewer or the Quick Link Viewer. Click on this object and the corresponding viewer appears.
Controllers
The controller's memory battery is secure.
The controller's memory battery is bad.
The controller's memory battery is bad and the unit is in alarm.
Monitoring Placed Objects 71 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon Icon Description / States Type
Doors (For more on door contacts, refer to Inputs.)
Top view. Door is closed. RQE normal. Alarm tamper secure. Input unmasked. Door relay OFF. All alarm points are normal.
Top view. Door is open. Contact is open (alarm is active). RQE has been pushed.
Top view. RQE is active.
Top view. Door Tamper alarm is active.
Top view. Door input masked.
Top view. Door relay ON.
Front view. Door is closed and locked.
Front view. Door is unmasked and/or unlocked.
Front view. Door is open and unlocked.
Front view. Door masked and unlocked.
Readers
ScramblePad Reader is currently being used and is active.
Prox Reader is currently being used and is active.
Finger Reader is currently being used and is active.
Inputs
Line Module input is open or active and unmasked.
Line Module input is open or active and masked.
72 Monitoring Placed Objects MAN007-0211
Icon Icon Description / States Type
Line Module input is closed and unmasked.
Line Module input is closed and masked.
Motion sensor is closed or unmasked.
Motion sensor is masked.
Motion sensor is open and active.
Relays
Relay or expansion relay is an annunciator and is inactive. No power is currently applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is an annunciator and is energized. Power is currently applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is inactive. No power is currently applied to this circuit.
Relay or expansion relay is active. Power is currently applied to this circuit.
XBox
XBox is online and active.
Cameras
Indicating a dome camera. Click on this camera icon to bring up the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer showing video input from that camera. Using the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer you should be able to control this camera as required.
Indicating a fixed camera. Click on this camera icon to bring up the CCTV Viewer or DVR Viewer showing video input from that camera. This camera cannot pan, tilt, or swivel.
Central Stations
Indicating a fire alarm receiver. A red border indicates alarm or tampering.
Monitoring Placed Objects 73 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Icon Icon Description / States Type
Indicating a fire alarm account, such as a building or campus. A red border indicates an alarm in this account.
Indicating a fire alarm area. A red border indicates an alarm is detected in this area.
Indicating a smoke or fire detector. A red border indicates an alarm is detected at this detector.
Indicating a fire-pull station. A red border indicates that this station was activated.
Indicating an intrusion. A red border indicates that this intrusion detector was activated by a breaking window or unauthorized entry.
Most operators should not have the permissions or rights needed to control placed objects. In addition to the predefined VIOs, you can also create new VIOs and customize behavior for them.
74 Monitoring Placed Objects MAN007-0211
Controlling Placed Objects
An operator qualified to view drawings such as backdrops and maps in Velocity can use these maps for two main tasks:
Monitoring placed object status Controlling placed objects The second of these activities is described below. Once VIOs are placed on maps they can be controlled in a number of ways:
acknowledge alarms clear alarms enter a note perform access functions perform control functions refresh the point's status To control an placed object: 1. At the appropriate map, right click on the placed object you want to control. A pop-up menu appears. The number and type of options you see here depend on the type of device represented by the placed object. For example, if this is an input, you will only see functions that deal with inputs. All objects include the Acknowledge Alarms... and the Clear Alarms... options. 2. Select the option you require. Each of these options is explained below.
Select this To do this: option:
Acknowledge Acknowledge this alarm. Alarms... When Velocity detects more than one alarm associated with the same point at the same time (for example, Out-of-spec and Open-Too-Long), selecting this option causes the Alarm Selection dialog box to appear. Select the specific alarm you want to acknowledge. You can also acknowledge an alarm through the Alarm Viewer. For more on this, refer to “Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms” on page 76.
Clear Alarms... Clear the acknowledged object. When Velocity detects more than one alarm associated with the same point at the same time (for example, Out-of-spec and Open-Too-Long), selecting this option causes the Alarm Selection dialog box to appear. Select the specific alarm you want to clear. You can also clear an alarm through the Alarm Viewer. For more on this, refer to “Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms” on page 76.
Controlling Placed Objects 75 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Select this To do this: option:
Access Perform one of three access functions on the placed object's Functions > associated device. A submenu appears:
Select one of the available functions. This performs the specified access function on the device represented by the selected placed object. For more on these access functions, refer to Access, Alarm, and Control Functions.
Control Perform one of several control functions on the placed Functions > object's associated device for inputs or outputs. A submenu appears:
Select one of the available control functions. This performs the specified control function on the device represented by the selected placed object. For more on these control functions, refer to “Access & Control Functions” on page 203.
If you have a version of Velocity that supports Central Stations, you cannot acknowledge or clear these alarms. Fire alarms must be acknowledged or cleared from the local fire alarm control panel. Acknowledging/Clearing Alarms When an icon on a map becomes alarmed, its appearance changes as shown in “Monitoring Placed Objects” on page 71. If this occurs, you can do one of five things:
Acknowledge a selected alarm Acknowledge all currently displayed alarms Clear a selected alarm Clear all currently displayed alarms Enter a note for a selected alarm Each of these operations is explained below.
76 Controlling Placed Objects MAN007-0211
To acknowledge a selected alarm: 1. Open the Alarm Queue pane and investigate the current status of the alarmed device. If an object is alarmed, a message also appears at the placed object on the canvas indicating the nature of the alarm as shown in this example:
The alarm should beep just as it would in the Alarm Viewer. 2. Perform the measures appropriate to ensure that the site is secure. This normally entails checking the area indicated by the icon or following the instructions indicated for the type of alarm this is. Instructions on how to handle particular types of alarms are frequently included in the lower pane of the Alarm Queue pane. Once the area has been secured, you can return the icon to its unalarmed state by acknowledging the alarm. 3. Acknowledge the alarm in one of two ways: • In the Alarm Queue pane, either right click on the alarm object and select Acknowledge from the drop-down list, or click to select the alarm then click the Acknowledge Selected icon, , from the Alarm Queue icon bar. • From the canvas, right click on the alarmed point. Select Acknowledge Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears like the example below. Select the alarm you want to acknowledge from the list and OK.
Once acknowledged, the object is grayed out, reflecting the acknowledgement. The alarm is simultaneously acknowledged on the Alarm Viewer and the beeping stops. To acknowledge all alarms: 1. Open the Alarm Queue pane and investigate the current status of the alarmed devices. If an object is alarmed, a message also appears at the placed object on the canvas indicating the nature of the alarm as shown in this example:
Controlling Placed Objects 77 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The alarm should beep just as it would in the Alarm Viewer. 2. Perform the measures appropriate to ensure that the site is secure. This normally entails checking the area indicated by the icon or following the instructions indicated for the type of alarm this is. Instructions on how to handle particular types of alarms are frequently included in the lower pane of the Alarm Queue pane. Once the area has been secured, you can return the icon to its unalarmed state by acknowledging the alarm. 3. Acknowledge all alarms in one of two ways: • In the Alarm Queue pane, click the Acknowledge All icon, , from the Alarm Queue icon bar. • From the canvas, right click on the alarmed point. Select Acknowledge Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears like the example below. Select all the alarms on this list by clicking the Select All button then click OK.
To clear a selected alarm: 1. Acknowledge the alarm as described above. 2. Clear alarms in one of two ways: • From the Alarm Queue pane, either right click on the alarm you want to clear and select Clear from the drop-down list, or click to select the alarm then click the Clear Selected icon, , from the Alarm Queue icon bar. • From the canvas, right click on the alarmed or acknowledged point. Select Clear Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears, like the example shown above. Select the alarm you want to clear from the list and OK. The alarm is cleared from the Alarm Queue pane. To clear all alarms: 1. Acknowledge the alarm as described above. 2. Clear all alarms in one of two ways: • From the Alarm Queue pane, click the Clear All icon, , from the Alarm Queue icon bar. • From the canvas, right click on the alarmed or acknowledged point. Select Clear Alarms... from the drop-down list. If there is more than one alarm associated with this point, the Alarm Selection dialog box appears, like the example shown above. Select all the alarms on this list by clicking the Select All button then click OK. All alarms are cleared from the Alarm Queue pane. To enter comments about an alarm: 1. Open the Alarm Queue pane and acknowledge the alarm as described above.
78 Controlling Placed Objects MAN007-0211
2. In the Alarm Queue pane, do one of these: • Right click on the acknowledged alarm. Select Add Note from the pop-up list. • Select the acknowledged alarm then click the Add Note icon, , from the Alarm Queue icon bar. The Operator Comments dialog box appears like this example:
The name of the currently selected alarm object appears. 3. In the text field, enter a note to describe information about the alarm. 4. When you're finished, click OK. The comments appear below the acknowledged alarm, like the following example:
Icons present themselves for acknowledgment automatically according to the queue configuration. This enables the operator to acknowledge alarms whether they appear on a single map or on multiple maps without having to bore down or zoom out of map hierarchies. Suspending Alarm Switching Velocity alerts the operator to alarms by queueing them in an order set by the Alarm Options page of the Preferences option (see “Alarm Options Preferences” on page 50 in the Velocity Administrator’s Guide). When new alarms come in, the alarm stack is reshuffled in accordance with the priority or chronology of the alarm. While this is an obvious and efficient way to view alarms in the Alarm Viewer, it does not always make for top efficiency in Graphics, since Velocity automatically jumps to the highest priority alarm object, even if that object is on a different map. This means that before you actually finish examining a current alarm on one page, Velocity may jump to another map in order to draw your attention to a newer alarm. For example, say you are trying to view video associated with an alarmed point at Door 2 and a second alarm comes in at Door 1. Because you have set up Door 1 as either later or higher priority than Door 2, the Door 1 alarm point is instantly activated and the Door 2 point is passed over. Use the Suspend Alarm Switching option to turn off the alarm jumping that Velocity ordinarily does and enable the operator to finish his current investigation before turning to the later alarm point.
Controlling Placed Objects 79 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To suspend alarm switching:
At the menu tool bar in Designer Graphics, select View > Suspend Alarm Switching. At the icon tool bar in Graphics mode, click . A check mark appears next to this option. Alarm switching is suspended. To reenable this function, choose this option again and the suspend alarm switching feature is toggled off.
80 Controlling Placed Objects MAN007-0211
Executing Command Sets
If a command set is placed on a map, you can execute it using this procedure. To execute a command set: 1. Make sure you are in Live Mode. 2. Display the map or backdrop where the command set exists. 3. Move your cursor across the canvas to the place where the command set object exists. The cursor arrow changes to a finger. 4. Click the command set object. The program automatically executes the command set indicated.
Executing Command Sets 81 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Show Credential Information
This feature enables a qualified operator to automatically display the name, photograph, and signature of the person who has just entered/exited a door. Before qualified operators can use this feature, a door must be enabled to use this function. To enable this feature within Graphics: 1. Open a graphic that is populated with one or more door objects. 2. Right click on the door for which you want to show credential information. A pop-up list appears. 3. Select Show Credential Information. From now on, this door is enabled for automatic display of credential information whenever a credential is used on that door. When a credential is used on the enabled door, the credential pop-up appears. This pop-up information can include name, ID, and photograph as well as the time and date when the credential associated with this person was last used. Before a photo will display, the enrolled person defined for this system must have photographs assigned to their Personal Information form through Enrollment Manager. From that point on, when any person enters or exits this door, a window is displayed on the screen. If no photo is selected for the person in question, only the default credential information appears.
82 Show Credential Information MAN007-0211 Enrollment Manager
Use the Enrollment Manager to add card and code holders to the system. Essentially this process involves combining a credential (user profile) with a photograph and/or signature to create an access privilege for a unique user. The result of the enrollment process is:
a badge that can used to gain access to the facility via a reader. a code that can be used to gain access to the facility via a keypad. both a code and badge that gains access to the facility via reader/keypad. To find basic information on using Enrollment Manager:
Topics See page:
Opening Enrollment Manager 84
Enrolling a New Person 97
Finding a Person 106
Previewing a Badge 142
Printing a Badge 144
Creating a Credential 146
83 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Opening Enrollment Manager
To start Enrollment Manager:
Method 1 1. Open Velocity. The Velocity screen appears. 2. Do one of these: • From the Velocity icon tool bar, click the Enrollment Manager icon, . • From the Velocity system tree window, select the top level folder, Configuration. Move to the Components window and double click Enrollment Manager, . The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
Method 2 1. Open Velocity. The Velocity main screen appears. 2. From the menu bar, select Console > Enrollment Manager. The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
Method 3 1. Open Velocity. The Velocity main screen appears. 2. Press F3. The main Enrollment Manager screen appears.
84 Opening Enrollment Manager MAN007-0211
Enrollment Manager Main Screen
The Enrollment Manager screen looks like this example when you first bring it up:
This screen involves these panes and fields:
Menu bar This menu bar provides many options for features within the Enrollment Manager. For more on this, refer to “Enrollment Manager Menu Bar” on page 87.
Tool bar This bar includes two items: • Search (see page 106) • Explore (see page 120) Person The pane in which person groups are created, modified, and Group pane displayed. The Everyone person group can not be deleted or added to.
People Tree This pane initially possesses four elements: the Add New Person pane option, the Add Person from Template option, and the Unassigned Credentials directory. Once you have assigned persons to the system, each person also appears. For more on this, refer to “People Tree Pane” on page 89.
Quick Find Use this field to perform limited searches of people within the field system by last name only. For more on this, refer to “Quick Find” on page 113.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 85 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Credential This pane lists all credentials currently assigned to this person. In pane addition, both the Add New Credential and Add New Credential from Template options appear in this area as shown in this example:
You can perform several tasks from this window by right clicking a credential after it has been assigned. The Credentials pane also contains a scrollbar at the bottom which can be used to scroll through all of the available columns. To arrange the columns or credential list, refer to “Column Management” on page 35.
Personal This pane displays all currently defined information for whichever Information person is selected. For more on this, refer to “Personal Information pane Pane” on page 90.
Form tabs The Personal Information form consists of up to 13 tabs: one general page, 10 pages of UDFs, one page of Person Groups, and one page of Additional Images. For more on this, refer to “Personal Information Pane” on page 90.
Photo Click this button to bring up the video capture screen. Capture For more on this, refer to “Capturing a Photo” on page 128. button Once a picture occupies this frame, you can either email the image or save it to another location by right clicking on the image. For more on these topics, refer to “E-mailing a Photo” on page 137 and “Saving a Photo to Another Source” on page 138.
Signature Click this button to bring up the signature capture screen. Capture For more on this, refer to “Capturing a Signature” on page 126. button
86 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
Selection Click on one or more of these buttons to: buttons • Add a new credential (see page 147) • Assign an existing credential (page 101) • Preview a badge (page 142) • Print a badge (page 144) In the row below this, there are three possible buttons: Apply — click this button to move information entered in the Personal Information Form to the Velocity database. Undo — click this button to undo the most recent personnel entries. All fields are blanked. Scan — click this button to start the attached scanner or PIV reader and populate the current Personal Information Form automatically with the detected information. For more on this feature, refer to “Scanning Enrollment Data” on page 139.
Status field This field displays information about the current employee database including: • Number of People currently enrolled • Number of Credentials currently assigned • Number of Credentials currently unassigned • Number of Guest Credentials currently defined Enrollment Manager Menu Bar The Enrollment Manager has a menu bar with these options:
Each option is discussed on the following pages. Two of these options display other menu options:
Option Sub-Option
File Batch Enroll Credentials—this enables you to enroll a large number of people at the same time using batch enrollment methods. For more on this, refer to “Batch Enroll Card Credentials” on page 123. Close—Exit Enrollment Manager and return to the main Velocity screen.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 87 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Option Sub-Option
View Show Last Access for Credentials— when checked, this displays the date and time in the Credential window's ‘Last Access’ column as well as the ‘Last Door’ column indicating the last door for which this credential was used. This is a toggle option. Show UDF Summary—when checked, this option displays data entered for the first 14 UDFs in the People Tree pane. (You must scroll to the right in the People Tree pane in order to see these additional User Defined columns.) This is a toggle option. By default, this is unchecked. When this option is unchecked, the load time for several thousand users has been reduced from minutes to a few seconds. Note: Neither of these options takes effect until you have refreshed the screen, either by pressing the F5 key or performing some other task. Tools Find Person...—this enables you to find a specific person in the database. For more on this, refer to “Finding a Person” on page 106. Find Credential...—this enables you to find a specific credential in the database. For more on this, refer to “Finding a Card Credential” on page 110. Report Manager...—this enables you to open Report Manager without leaving Enrollment Manager. For more on this topic, refer to the chapter, “Report Manager,” starting on page 999 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Badge Designer...—this enables you to open Badge Designer without leaving Enrollment Manager. For more on this topic, refer to the chapter, “Badge & Graphic Designer,” starting on page 439 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Person Filters...—this enables you to limit a search for employees using previously defined Person Filters. For more on this, refer to “Person Filters” on page 112. User Defined Fields...—this enables you to modify a user-defined field. For more on this, refer to “Changing User-Defined Fields” on page 780 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Device Configuration...–this enables you to configure credential enrollment stations, signature capture devices, card and passport scanners, and PIV readers for use with Velocity. For more on this, see “Device Configuration” on page 787 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Preferences...–this enables you to change the defaults in Enrollment Manager for print control, quick find, and credential shortcuts. For more on this, see “Preferences” on page 898 in the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Help Consult the help file for information on using Velocity.
88 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
People Tree Pane The People Tree Pane looks like this example:
The pane includes the following elements and options:
Click the Add Person option to bring up a new Personal Information form. For more on this, refer to “Enrolling a New Person” on page 97. Click the Add Person from Template option to bring up the Select Person Template dialog box. When you select a Person Template from this list, you create a new Personal Information form with fields already populated with the values specified in the selected person template. For more on Person Templates, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. For more on using Person Templates in Enrollment Manager, refer to “Person Templates” on page 99. Click the Unassigned Credentials option to view all currently existing unassigned credentials in the Credentials pane. These include all credentials that were once assigned to another user but have since expired or have been de-assigned for some reason. By default, all enrolled people appear in this pane. If you select a specific Person Group (other than Everyone) from the Person Group pane, the people belonging to that group appear in this pane. For more on Person Groups, refer to “Person Groups” on page 120. The scrollbar at the bottom of this pane enables you to scroll through all of the available columns of information from this pane. While you can't see most of these fields without scrolling, they are there. Initially, there should be four columns in this pane corresponding to the basic four possible fields at the top of the Personal Information form on the General tab. The more UDFs you define, the more columns can appear. To rearrange the people in this list or to reorder the columns, refer to Column Management. However, if you select View > Show UDF Field Summary from the Option Bar, up to 18 columns appear in this pane corresponding to the 18 fields that appear on the General tab. To suppress these fields, simply deselect the Show UDF Field Summary option.
Hint Under normal circumstances, you won't need to display all these columns of information in this narrow pane. However, when you are looking for a specific person in a long list of people, having access to this much information can prove extremely useful in finding the right one.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 89 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Group Subfolders Some person groups can become very large indeed and include members that are diverse enough to be categorized into subgroups. Velocity offers a method for creating subgroups by creating subfolders under person groups. To create a subfolder within a person group: 1. Display the Person Group pane. All person groups this operator has permission to view will appear in the pane. The Everybody person group is a special group and can neither be deleted nor have subfolders added on to it. 2. Right click on the person group to which you want to add subfolders. A pop-up option list appears. 3. Select Add Subfolder. You are prompted to enter a name for this folder.
4. In the text box, enter a name for this subfolder and click OK. The new folder appears under the selected person group. Just as with person groups, you can:
add members to this folder (see page 121) edit persons within this folder (see page 98) create a sub-subfolder under this folder rename this folder delete this folder search the folder (see page 107) use a person filter to search the folder (see page 112) Personal Information Pane There are three tabbed property sheets shown on this dialog box:
General property sheet Tab1 — Tab10 property sheets Person Groups property sheet Additional Images property sheet
90 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
General Property Sheet The general page of the Personal Information pane looks like this example:
Basic information is supplied on this page:
ID This is a read-only field generated by Velocity. Each new person has a unique ID.
Record Last This is a read-only field generated by Velocity indicating the date Updated (MM/DD/YYYY) when this record was last updated. Windows Control Panel determines the date format.
Name—This is a group of required fields that appear near the top of the panel. All the other fields are replaceable.
Prefix Select a prefix for this person from the pull-down option list. Options include: Mr., Mrs., and Ms.
First Name This is a required field. Type a first name for this person.
Middle Name Type a middle name or initial for this person.
Last Name This is a required field. Type a last name for this person.
Suffix Select a suffix for this person from the pull-down option list. Options include: Sr. and Jr.
User Defined Type or select in each field. You can specify what each field Fields means using the User Defined Setup option. Using this option you can also assign UDFs to one of the additional UDF tabs. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Each of these fields can be linked to a databound text object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic Designer. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Add New Click this button to bring up the Credential dialog box. Make Credential changes as required to this form. The credential is associated with that person. If you want to apply an existing Credential Template to this person, double click the Add New Credential from Template option in the Credentials pane above this panel.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 91 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Assign Click this button to assign an existing credential to this person. A Credential list of currently available credentials appears. Select one of these and the Credential dialog box for that credential appears. That credential is now assigned to that person.
Preview Click this button and the person's badge appears. This only Badge happens if you have already assigned a badge template on the Credential dialog box. For more on creating badge layouts, refer to Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Print Badge Click the Print button to print the badge. For more on this, refer to “Printing a Badge,” starting on page 144.
Double click this button to capture or acquire the user's photograph. The Image Preview dialog box (see page 134) appears. The image defined here can be linked to a databound image object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic Designer. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. If you need to define additional images, select the Additional Images tab. Double click this button to capture or acquire the user's signature. The Image Preview dialog box appears (see page 133). The signature defined here can be linked to a databound image object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic Designer.
92 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
TAB1 - TAB10 Property Sheets A TAB page of the personal information form looks like this example:
TAB 1 - By default, Tab 1 displays UDF 15 - 32; however, you can TAB 10 increase this number as needed. While you can display up to 999 UDFs on the Tab 1 page, you can also assign fields to any of the additional Tab pages as required. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Each field here can be linked to a databound text object placed on a badge template.
Groups Property Sheet This tab enables a qualified operator to add this person to one or more person groups.
The Groups tab of the Personal Information form appears between the TAB 10 tab and the Additional Images tab. It includes all the person groups currently defined by Enrollment Manager. To add a person to a person group from this tab: 1. Click this tab.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 93 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
A page like this appears:
2. Check each person group or person group subfolder to which you want to add this person. If you made a change by checking or unchecking on the person groups or subfolders, the Apply button is activated. 3. Click Apply. The next time you open one of the modified person groups, the person is included in that group's list. Additional Images Property Sheet This sheet only appears after you have defined a new person and clicked Apply, or selected an existing person from the People Tree pane. The Additional Images tab provides an image that looks like this example:
This page includes the following fields and buttons:
Image A window listing all the image placeholders currently defined by Placeholders the Additional Images page of the User Defined Setup screen. When you select a placeholder from this list, the Update Image... button is activated.
94 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
Update Click this button to import or capture an image. The process is Image... identical to that used to capture/import the main photograph on the General page. The image defined here can be linked to a databound image object placed on a badge template in the Badge & Graphic Designer. For more on this, refer to “Inserting a Databound Image” on page 514.
Remove Click this button to remove the selected image from the Current Image Image frame. Current Image This window displays the captured or imported image. If you need to remove it, click the Remove Image button.
Description: A text box where you can enter a title or other information about the added image.
For more on this, refer to “Additional Images” on page 136. If you need to customize the look of this form, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Personal Information Form The personal information form appears in the Enrollment Manager's Personal Information pane whenever you select a pre-existing credential or create a new user. Initially the form appears in the Enrollment Manager like this example:
The form includes vital security information about the new user such as name, address, telephone number, employee number, social security number, and so on. Fields can be customized and changed using the User Defined Fields tool. In addition to the General tab, the form also includes two other tabs:
TAB 1 - TAB 10 tabs—By default, TAB 1 displays UDF 15 – 32; however, you can increase this number as needed. While you can display an infinite number of UDFs on the TAB 1 page, you can also assign fields to any of the additional TAB pages as required.
Enrollment Manager Main Screen 95 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
These pages are only populated if you have defined more than fifteen user-defined fields using the User Defined Fields... tool. TAB 2 – 15 remain blank unless a qualified operator assigns UDFs to them. A tab can only be opened, if the operator currently viewing this screen has permission to open it. In this way, a valuable piece of information, such as a person's social security number, can be isolated on a UDF tab which can be made inaccessible to most operators. Groups tab — This tab enables you to add this enrolled person to one or more existing person groups. For more on this, see “Groups Property Sheet” on page 93. Additional Images tab — this tab enables you to add other images to a person's profile, such as side views, hand views, etc. For more on this, refer to “Additional Images” on page 136. If you need to customize the look of this form, refer to Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
96 Enrollment Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
Enrolling a New Person
Velocity uses the generic term ‘Persons’ to refer to all people who must access a facility, including employees (part-time and full-time), contractors, and personnel working for companies that supply services. To enroll (add) a new person: 1. Open Enrollment Manager as detailed in “Opening Enrollment Manager” on page 84. The Enrollment Manager screen appears. 2. From the People Tree pane, click Add New Person. A blank Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information pane. 3. Supply information to the existing fields as required. At a minimum, you must type in the new person's first and last name. 4. Enter the required information to any fields listed on this page. To customize a user-defined field, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 5. If you need to fill out more fields than can be accommodated on the General page, click the TAB 1 — TAB 10 as required. 6. Enter values for any user-defined fields appearing on these additional pages. 7. Click the Apply button. Notice that several folders appear in the Credentials pane. 8. Double click the photograph frame to import or capture a photograph. The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a photograph, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133. 9. To capture or import a signature, double click the signature frame, , located below the photo frame. The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a signature, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133. 10. If you need to add or capture any additional images, click the Additional Images tab. The Additional Images page appears. 11. Select any placeholders you need from this page then import or capture these additional images as needed. The import and/or capture process is identical to the one used on the General page. Before you can include additional images, you must first define the requisite placeholders using the User Defined Fields option. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 12. Assign a credential to the new person or create a new credential for this person, using one of these procedures:
To assign: Do this:
A new credential Double click the Add New Credential button on the form, or double click the Add New Credential folder in the Credentials pane.
Enrolling a New Person 97 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To assign: Do this:
A credential template Click the Add New Credential from Template to a new credential folder in the Credentials pane. The Select Credential Template dialog box appears. Select the template you want to use and click OK.
An existing, Click the Assign Credential button on the form. unassigned credential
The Credential dialog box appears. 13. Fill out or change the Credential dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum you must: • if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN • if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code • assign a valid door group or function group 14. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. The newly-assigned credential appears in the Credential pane. 15. Perform required tasks in the Credential pane. 16. If you are creating a badge for this person, click the Preview Badge button to view the way the final badge will look. In order for this feature to work, you must have assigned a Badge Template on the Credential dialog box. 17. Click the Print Badge button to create a badge for this person. In order for this feature to work, you must have a badge printer connected to and configured for this Velocity workstation. If you need to create a new badge for a new credential, you can access the Badge Designer through the Tools menu option. You can also access the Report Manager through the Tools menu option. If you need to change the fields appearing on the form, see the Velocity Administrator Guide. Editing Multiple Persons This feature enables the qualified operator to change one or more values on a person's Personal Information Form for multiple people. To edit multiple persons: 1. Select multiple people from the People Tree pane. 2. Right click within the highlighted area. 3. Select Edit Persons.
98 Enrolling a New Person MAN007-0211
The Multiple Person Edit form appears like the example below:
This screen includes most of the elements of the Personal Information Form, including the UDF values. In addition, notice that a note appears below UDF fields indicating the number of people currently selected for changes. 4. Check each box to the left of each field you need to change for all selected persons, then supply a new value in the text or pick list. 5. Click Apply or OK. The value in each checked field is changed for those people selected. For example, if you want to move three people from Research and Development to Administration, you would check the Division field and select Administration from the pick list. When you click Apply or OK, Velocity automatically reassigns the selected people to the Administration division. Person Templates Use Person Templates to expedite the task of assigning information to people being enrolled. Simply apply an existing person template to a new person and the field values assigned to the person template populate the relevant fields for that person. To use a person template to enroll a new person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager's Person Tree pane, double click the Add Person from Template option. The Select Person Template appears like this example:
Only those person templates currently defined for this system appear in the window. 2. In the person template window, click to select the template you want to apply to this new person.
Enrolling a New Person 99 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
3. Click OK. A new Personal Information Form appears. Fields on that form are populated with values taken from the selected person template. For example, if you defined a person template like this example:
then selected that person template when enrolling a new person like this:
those values entered in the selected person template are used to automatically populate the Personal Information form for the new person, like this:
100 Enrolling a New Person MAN007-0211
Assigning a Credential to a Person To assign a credential to a person:
To assign: Refer to:
An existing credential to a person “Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person” on page 101.
A new credential to a person “Assigning a New Credential to a Person” on page 103.
A credential template to a new “Assigning a Credential Template to a Person” credential on page 104.
A person to an unassigned “Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential” credential on page 103.
Once a person has been assigned one or more credentials, the credentials appear in the Credential window above the Personal Information form, like this example:
You can perform a number of tasks from this window by right clicking the credential. Once you've assigned one or more credentials to this person, capture a photograph or signature as required. For more on creating credentials, refer to “Credentials” on page 146. Assigning an Existing Credential to a Person To assign an existing credential to a person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to assign an existing, unassigned credential. 2. From the Personal Information form, click the Assign Credential button on the form. The Assign Credential to Person dialog box appears like this example:
Enrolling a New Person 101 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
3. Search for a specific credential by selecting one of these radio buttons:
Card Stamp If you select this radio button, enter the card stamp number Number: of the credential you are looking for in the text box to the right of this radio button. Once you click Find, the credential associated with this card stamp number appears in the lower window.
MATCH Code: If you select this radio button, enter the MATCH code of the credential you are looking for in the text box to the right of this radio button, or swipe the card associated with this credential at the Enrollment Station. Once you click Find, the credential bearing this MATCH code appears in the lower window.
PIN If you select this radio button, enter the PIN number for which you are searching in the active text box. Once you click Find, the credential bearing this PIN code appears in the lower window.
Show all If you select this radio button, all unassigned credentials are Unassigned displayed in the lower window. Credentials Once you click Find, all unassigned credentials are displayed in the lower window.
4. Click Find. All credentials matching the search criteria are displayed in the lower window, like this example:
If you need to see when an unassigned credential was last used, scroll over to the 'Last Access' column in the Credentials window. If this time and date does not appear, select the View > Show Last Access for Unassigned Credentials toggle option from the menu tool bar. 5. From the dialog box's lower window, click to select the unassigned credential you want to assign to this person. Double click on a selection to edit the credential. The credential properties dialog box for that credential appears. Edit the credential as required. When you're finished, click OK to return to the Assign Credential to Person dialog box. 6. Click Assign.
102 Enrolling a New Person MAN007-0211
The credential is assigned to the person whose name appears in the title bar of this dialog box. The existing credential is assigned to the designated person. Assigning a Person to an Existing Credential To assign an unassigned credential to a person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select Unassigned Credentials from the tree pane. All currently unassigned credentials appear in the credential pane like the following example:
2. From the credential pane, right click on the unassigned credential you want to assign to a person. A drop-down option list appears. 3. Select Assign from the drop-down option list. The Assign Person to Credential dialog box appears with a list of all currently defined people.
4. Select the person to whom you want to assign the selected credential. 5. Click OK. The credential is now assigned to the selected person. Assigning a New Credential to a Person To assign a new credential to a person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to assign the new credential. 2. From the Personal Information form: • click the Add New Credential button on the form or • double click the Add New Credential folder in the Credentials pane. The Credential dialog box appears. 3. Fill out the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum: • if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN
Enrolling a New Person 103 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code • assign a valid door group or function group 4. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. Assigning a Credential Template to a Person To assign an existing Credential Template to a Person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to assign the new credential. 2. From the Credential pane on the Personal Information form, double click the Add New Credential from Template folder in the Credentials pane. The Select Credential Template dialog box appears like this example:
3. Select the template you want to use and click OK. The Credential dialog box for that template appears. 4. Add and change the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum: • if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN • if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code • assign a valid door group or function group 5. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. Unassigning Credentials To unassign a credential currently associated with a person: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select a person from the tree pane. All currently assigned credentials appear in the credential pane. 2. From the credential pane, right click on the credential you want to unassign. An option list pops up. 3. Select Unassign from the drop-down option list. The credential disappears from the person's credential pane and is moved to the Unassigned Credentials file. Unassigning a credential does not change the function of the credential. Downloading Credentials Before new or modified credentials can take effect, they must be downloaded to their controller(s). This is routinely handled whenever Enrollment Manager is opened or closed; however, you can force a download using the following technique. To force a download of one or more credentials: 1. From the people tree pane, select the person whose credential(s) you want to download.
104 Enrolling a New Person MAN007-0211
The person's statistics appear on the Personal Information form and all credentials currently assigned to this person appear in the credential pane. 2. Right click the credential you want to force download. A list of options appear. 3. Select Force Download. The selected credential is immediately downloaded to the relevant controllers. To force the downloading of multiple credentials, refer to “Downloading Multiple Credentials” on page 105. Downloading Multiple Credentials This is a shortcut for downloading all current credentials to their respective controllers. To download all credentials: 1. From the people tree pane, select all the people whose credentials you want to download. To select a range of people, use the Shift + click combination; to select a non-contiguous group of people, use the Ctrl + click combination. 2. From the people tree pane, right click the highlighted group. Options pop up. 3. Select Display Credentials... The Credentials - Multiple People window appears like the following example:
4. Select one or more of these credentials. 5. Right click the highlighted group. A group of options pop up. 6. Select Force Download. 7. Click Close to close this window and return to the main Enrollment Manager screen.
Enrolling a New Person 105 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Finding a Person
It can be difficult to find a specific person in the Enrollment Manager once you have a few hundred employees, contractors, and part-timers to keep track of. To help you find a person quickly, Enrollment Manager includes a quick find feature. To find a person: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager screen appears. 2. Do one of these: • From the menu bar, select Tools > Find Person in All Groups... • From the icon tool bar, click the Search icon, . The Search All Groups dialog box appears. For more on this screen, refer to “Search Groups Screen” on page 108. 3. Click the 'Field' pick list and select the field you want to use for data in this search. All fields currently defined on the Personal Information form appear in this list. 4. Click in the first 'Function' pick list and select the first term of the argument. This is a simple 'is' or 'is not' term. 5. Click in the second 'Function' pick list and select the second term of the argument. If you select is greater than or less than as a search argument, a check box appears. 6. If appropriate, check the 'or equal to' box to extend the range of the argument. 7. Click in the Value field and enter an appropriate value for the argument you specified. If you are specifying an exact match using the equal to argument, a list of all data equivalents for the specified field appear. Select one or more of these. For example, if you specified Last Name in the 'Field' pick list and is equal to in the 'Function' pick lists, all relevant last names appear in the 'Value' field. If you specified a Like condition and are trying to find a variation of the value you entered in the 'Value' pick list, you can use one of several wildcards including %, _, [ ], and [^]. 8. Click Add. The full argument appears in the Search window. 9. Click Search. Enrollment Manager searches for and finds all persons matching the criteria you specified. 10. In the Person Groups pane, click the Search Results icon, . The results of the search appear in the People Tree pane. 11. To return to Enrollment Manager, click Cancel. To help you find a last name quickly, Enrollment Manager also includes a quick find feature. For more on the Quick Find feature, refer to “Quick Find” on page 113.
106 Finding a Person MAN007-0211
Search Groups This feature enables the qualified operator to search through one or more selected groups using a specified search term for resulting matches. To search a single group: 1. At the Person Group pane, right click the group you want to search. A pop-up list appears. 2. Select Search Group. The Search Group screen appears.
This dialog box is exactly the same as the Search All Groups screen and acts identically. For more on this, refer to “Search Groups Screen” on page 108. 3. Create one or more arguments as required. 4. Click Search. 5. In the Person Group pane, click to highlight the icon. A list of all relevant search results appears in the Person Tree pane. These results apply only to the currently selected Person Group. To search all existing groups: 1. At the Person Group pane, right click the top-level (root) of the tree. For example, in the following example, you would right click on the HIRSCHTEST root.
A pop-up list appears.
Finding a Person 107 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
2. Select Search All Groups. The Search All Groups screen appears.
For more on this, refer to “Search Groups Screen” on page 108. 3. Create one or more arguments as required. 4. Click Search. 5. In the Person Group pane, click to highlight the icon. A list of all relevant search results appears in the Person Tree pane. These results apply only to the currently selected Person Group. Search Groups Screen The Search Groups and Search All Groups screens appear when you select the Search Groups or Search All Groups right click option from the root item of the person group pane. This screen looks like this example:
108 Finding a Person MAN007-0211
This screen includes the following fields and buttons:
Field Description
Field: Select the field you want to use for this search. Choose from any of the available fields, default or UDF. All fields currently displayed on the Personal Information form appear in this list. For example, if you wanted to search the person database by the last name, you would select the Last Name option from the ‘Field’ pick list.
Function: Supply the first and second elements of the search argument you want to use for searching this person list. The two possible values for the first element appear in this pick list: is – The person you are searching for is the second element. is not – The person you are searching for is not the second element. The possible values for the second element appear in this pick list: equal to –‘ The person you are searching for has a value that is identical to the selected field value. less than – The person you are searching for has a value less than that you specified in the 'Value' field. greater than – The person you are searching for has a value greater than that you specified in the 'Value' field. starting with – The person you are searching for has a value that starts with that you specify in the 'Value' field. like – The person you are searching for has a value that is similar to the selected field value. For example, if you specified a value of 'Smith%' in the 'Value' field, Enrollment Manager searches for a value like 'Smith' such as 'Smithon' or 'Smithers'. If you don't use wildcard characters in the Like condition, it behaves like the equal to condition. If you select either less than or greater than as a second search argument, a check box appears to the right of the 2nd search argument pick list. or equal to – If you select either less than or greater than, this check box appears. Check this box to indicate that the search term is actually less than or equal to, or greater than or equal to. between – If you select a UDF that is defined as a date type, you can use this term. Two combo boxes appear into which you can enter the range of dates between which you want to search. within – If you select a UDF that is defined as a date type, you can use this term. Three combo boxes appear: two boxes enabling you to determine the range of your search and a box specifying the period (e.g. an hour, 12 hours, a year) for which you are searching.
Finding a Person 109 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Field Description
Value field Enter a value for this search in this text window. The functions you selected above apply to this. If you selected is equal to as an argument, all values relevant to this 'Field' appear in this window as shown in the following example:
For example, if you specified Last Name in the 'Field' pick list and is equal to in the 'Function' pick lists, all relevant last names appear in this field. Click to select one or more values relevant to your present search. If you selected either between or within as your 2nd search argument, two new pick lists appear like this example:
Click on the right arrow to reveal a calendar in order to refine your search dates. If you specified an is... like condition and are trying to find a variation of the value you entered in the 'Value' field, use any of several wildcards including %, _, [ ], and [^].
Add Click this button to add this element. If you change the argument once it is added, the button changes to Update. Search All added arguments are displayed in this window. If more than one window argument appears here, then additional conditions, like AND or OR are added here.
Save... Click this button to save this argument as a search filter. For more on search filters, refer to “Search Filters” on page 112.
Search Click this button to begin the search on the specified group. The results are displayed in the folder.
Close Close this screen and return to Enrollment Manager. Finding a Card Credential In large facilities with many people and credentials, it is often difficult to find who has been assigned a particular credential. In order to expedite the search, use Velocity's Find Card feature. You can search by either Card Reference Number or MATCH code. This enables you to cross-reference a card with a person and is particularly useful in the event that a card is recovered. To find a card credential: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager screen appears. 2. From the Enrollment Manager menu bar, select Tools > Find Card Credential...
110 Finding a Person MAN007-0211
The Find Card dialog box appears like this example:
The buttons and fields on this screen include:
Credential Id Click to select this radio button, then enter credential ID in the activated text field.
Card Stamp Click to select this radio button, then enter card stamp Number number in the activated text field.
MATCH Code Click to select this radio button, then either enter the MATCH code in activated text field or double click the Enrollment Station icon, , and swipe the credential through it; the number appears in the activated field.
PIN Code Click to select this radio button, then enter PIN code in the activated text field.
Find Click this button to search the database for the specified credential.
Edit Select the credential displayed in the Search results window and click this button to bring up the credential properties sheet for that credential. Make modifications as required.
Search results The search results appear in this window, including all window relevant credential information. To view complete columns, scroll right.
3. Perform one of the following operations: • Click the Credential Id radio button and type in a credential ID number. • Click the Card Stamp Number radio button and type in the card stamp number. • Click the MATCH Code radio button and either enter the code number in the text field or swipe the credential through the enrollment station. You can only swipe a card successfully if the enrollment station icon is green, indicating that the station is functional. You cannot swipe a card through an enrollment station unless one is connected to your system and properly configured.
Finding a Person 111 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• Click the PIN Code radio button and type in a PIN code. 4. Click Find. The results of the search appear in the Search results window. If no card credential matching the criterion is found, a message appears indicating that. Click OK. 5. To return to Enrollment Manager, click Close. Search Filters Creating a search filter is time-consuming, involving the formulation of a search criteria using the Velocity-specific query language. If you have enrolled a large number of employees for this system, you may want to define several search filters you can use repeatedly without having to invoke the Search Group dialog box each time. To create a search filter: 1. At Enrollment Manager, invoke the Search Group or Search All Group option. The Search Group or Search All Groups dialog box appears. 2. Create a search criteria. 3. Click Save... If this search criteria has not already been created, a dialog box like this appears:
The text that appears here initially represents the first line of the search criteria appearing in the Argument window. 4. Either accept this name by click OK or enter a new name and click OK. The new filter is added to the Person Filters index and appears when you bring up the Person Filters dialog box. To execute or edit person filters, refer to “Person Filters” on page 112. Person Filters Use this feature to find a specific person by matching a selected person group to an available search filter. To use a person filter: 1. From the Person Group pane, click to highlight a person group. Only one person group at a time can be selected. Only those person groups currently defined for this system appear in this pane. 2. Do one of these: • From the menu bar on the Enrollment Manager main screen, select Tools > Person Filters... • Right click on person group(s) you want to search and select Execute Saved Filter on Group...
112 Finding a Person MAN007-0211
The Person Filters screen appears like this example:
Any previously-defined person filters appear in the window. 3. Click to highlight the Person Filter you want to use. 4. Do one of these: • Click Execute to initiate a search on the currently selected person group. • Click Edit to bring up the Search Group screen associated with the selected Person Filter. Modify the search arguments as required then save the results. • Click Delete to delete the currently selected person filter. Click Yes to confirm your decision. 5. When you're finished, click Close to exit this dialog box and return to the Enrollment Manager. Quick Find The Quick Find field appears between the People Group pane and the People Tree pane. It enables you to search for a person in the People Tree pane by last name only. To use the Quick Find feature: 1. Using the Persons Group and People Tree pane, display the list of people from which you are trying to find a specific person. 2. Click in the ‘Quick Find’ text box and start typing. Each keystroke you enter initiates a search. If results are returned, the Quick Find text box becomes a drop-down list and all relevant results appear like this example:
If you enter a group of letters for which there is no corresponding last name, the drop-down list disappears like this example:
3. When a list of probable matches appear in the drop-down list, cursor down the list to the name you're looking for and press Enter. 4. The Personal Information Form for the selected person appears in the Personal Information pane.
Finding a Person 113 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Wildcard Symbols Several types of wildcard symbols are supported in Enrollment Manager. They are shown in the table below:
Wildcard Description Example character
% Any string of characters. If you are filtering for specific The percentage sign (%) license plates, this value: indicates that the value %XYZ% entered in the Value field is finds all people with license only part of the value plates that contain XYZ in them, needed. such as 12XYZK, XYZ123, 2XYZ78Y.
_ Any single character. If you are filtering for a first (underscore) name, this value: _ean finds all four-letter names that end with ean such as Dean, Sean, and Jean.
[ ] Any single character within If you are looking for a last (square the specified range ([a-f]) or name, this value: brackets) set ([abcdef]). [C-P]arsen Square brackets indicate a finds persons with last names range or set of possible ending with arsen and beginning letters. with any single character between C and P, for example Carsen, Larsen, and Karsen.
[^] Any single character not If you are looking for a last (caret) within the specified range name, this value: ([^a-f]) or set ([^abcdef]). de[^l]% The caret indicates a value finds all persons with last names that excludes the specified beginning with de where the letters. next letter is not l. Acceptable names might be Degualle, Demille, or Dequino.
114 Finding a Person MAN007-0211
Multiple People Selection
Velocity 3.1 supports the selection of multiple people and enables the qualified operator to perform a number of tasks on those selected. These features are particularly useful for Velocity systems containing large numbers of employees, expediting the printing and changing of credentials as well as the editing of personal information. To select more than one person: 1. If needed, From the Person Group pane, click the Person Group you want to be displayed in the Person Tree pane. 2. From the Person Tree pane, do one of these: • hold down the Ctrl key and click each person in the list in you want to select. • click the first person in the list you want to select then hold down the Shift key and click the last person in the sequence you want to select. All person in between the first and last selections are selected as well. 3. With the selected people highlighted, right click anywhere within the highlighted space. A screen like this example appears:
Three options appear in the drop-down list:
Edit Persons This option enables the qualified operator to edit field values for more than one person at a time. The multiple person edit screen appears.
Display This option enables the qualified operator to display Credentials... credentials for more than one person at a time. You can then apply credential tasks to multiple credentials, if required.
Delete from This option enables the qualified operator to delete system more than one person from the system.
Displaying Credentials for Multiple Persons This feature enables the qualified operator to display two or more credentials for multiple persons. Once displayed, these credentials can be manipulated using credentials tasks.
Multiple People Selection 115 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To display multiple credentials: 1. Select multiple people from the People Tree pane. 2. Right click within the highlighted area. 3. Select Display Credentials... The Credentials - Multiple People form appears like the example below:
This screen includes information on each credential associated with the selected persons, include credential ID, Person ID, and other relevant credential values. 4. Select one or more credentials you want to view: • Click to highlight a single credential • Hold down the Ctrl key while you click each line you want to include in this credential task • Click the first line then hold down the Shift key and click the last line you want to include. All lines in between are selected. 5. Right click in the highlighted area. A list of options appears in the drop-down list like this example:
6. Select one of these tasks as required. For more on this, refer to “Credential Tasks” on page 169. 7. When you're finished, click Close to return to the Enrollment Manager.
116 Multiple People Selection MAN007-0211
Modifying an Existing Person
To modify the credential or personal information for an existing person: 1. From the People Tree pane, click to select the person whose profile you want to change. The appropriate Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information pane with all of the current values displayed.
Hint If you can't see the person, you can search for him/her using the Finding Person feature. See “Finding a Person,” starting on page 106.
2. Change information to the existing fields as required. 3. If you need to change the person's current credential or create a new credential for this person, use one of these procedures:
To change: Do this:
the current credential Double click the credential you want to change in the Credentials pane.
add a new credential Click the Add New Credential from Template using a credential option in the Credentials pane. template The Select Credential Template dialog box appears. Select the template you want to use and click OK.
an existing, Click the Assign Existing button on the form. unassigned credential
The Credential properties dialog box appears (see page 147). 4. Fill out or change the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum you must: • if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN • if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code • assign a valid door group or function group 5. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. 6. Double click the photograph frame to import or capture a new photograph. The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a photograph, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133. 7. To capture or import a new signature, double click the signature frame, , located below the photo frame. The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on capturing or importing a signature, refer to “Image Preview” on page 133. 8. If you are creating a new badge for this person, click the Preview Badge button to view the way the final badge will look. In order for this feature to work, you must have assigned a Badge Template on the Credential dialog box. 9. Click the Print Badge button to create a new badge for this person. In order for this feature to work, you must have a badge printer connected to and configured for this Velocity workstation.
Modifying an Existing Person 117 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
If you need to change the fields appearing on the form, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. Modifying Existing Credentials for a Person To modify a currently-assigned credential: 1. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person whose credential you want to modify. 2. From the Credentials pane, double click the currently assigned credential, or right click the credential then select Properties... from the pop-up option list. The current credential appears below the Add New Credential selections, preceded by this symbol, . The Credential dialog box looks like this example.
3. Modify the fields on the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum you must: • assign a valid PIN, if you specify a keypad (code) IDF • assign a valid MATCH code, if you specify a card IDF • assign a valid door group or function group 4. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. Deleting Persons You can delete one or more people from Enrollment Manager using these methods.
Method 1 To delete one person from the system: 1. In the People Tree pane, right click on the person you want to delete from the system. An option appears. 2. Select Delete from system. You are prompted with a message asking you to confirm you selection. 3. Click Yes.
118 Modifying an Existing Person MAN007-0211
The person and all their currently assigned credentials will be removed from the system.
Method 2 To delete more than one person from the system: 1. In the People Tree pane, select multiple people. 2. Right click on the highlighted area. An option appears. 3. Select Delete from system. You are prompted with a message asking you to confirm you selection. 4. Click Yes. All persons and their currently assigned credentials will be removed from the system.
Modifying an Existing Person 119 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Groups
Using Velocity 3.1, you can now group people enrolled within Enrollment Manager into logical units called person groups. Person groups (partitioned groups) enables people to be placed in different role-controlled views. These views determine which persons a specific operator can see in Enrollment Manager based on the operator’s role.
Hint This feature is first and foremost a powerful partitioning tool that enables system configurators to define roles that enable operators to view only specific person groups.
For example, a mixed use building provides headquarters for two companies. Security for Company A does not want to oversee employees for Company B nor does Company B want to view employees for Company A. In order to keep these views separate, the system configurator sets up one or more person groups for Company A and one or more for Company B. When the configurator defines roles for the various operators that will be overseeing security for the two companies, he/she checks only those person groups relevant to that specific company. Thus, when an operator is hired for Company B, he is assigned a role that excludes from view all person groups previously defined for Company A while checking off each person group for Company B. As a result, when this operator opens Enrollment Manager, he can see all required person groups for his company but none of the person groups for Company A. For more on this, refer to “Partitioning” on page 287. To create a person group: 1. At the main Enrollment Manager screen, click the icon to reveal the Person Group pane like this example:
This pane provides a tree of person groups by workstations. All currently defined person groups appear below the workstation. By default, the all-inclusive Person Group, Everyone, appears in the tree. 2. In the Person Group pane, right click on the workstation icon. An option list appears. 3. Select Add Person Group.
120 Person Groups MAN007-0211
A dialog box like this appears:
4. In the text box, enter a new person group name and click OK. The new person group appears in the Person Group pane. Once you have created a person group, you can move existing people to this new group or use one of these right click options:
Add Person Enroll a new person in this group. For more on this, refer to “Adding People to Person Groups” on page 121.
Add Person from Enroll a new person in this group using a person template. Template For more on this, refer to “Adding People to Person Groups” on page 121. This option can only work if the person template has this person group checked on the groups tab.
Edit Persons Edit the record of an existing person in this group. For more on this, refer to “Editing Multiple Persons” on page 98. This edits all persons in the selected person group.
Add Subfolder Add a subfolder to this group. For more on this, refer to “Person Group Subfolders” on page 90.
Rename Bring up a text box and enter a new name for the selected group.
Delete Delete the selected group. Confirm by clicking Yes.
Search Group Search for members within this group. For more on this, refer to “Finding a Person” on page 106.
Execute Saved Use a Search Filter (see page 112) to find members of this Filter on Group... group. When you select this option, the Person Filters dialog box appears (page 112). Select the person filter you need then click Execute.
You can also add members to a group through the Groups tab of the Personal Information Form. Adding People to Person Groups There are three methods for adding people to an existing person group:
Method 1 This method moves existing persons from another group to this group, by dragging and dropping.
Person Groups 121 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To drag and drop people from one group to another: 1. In the Person Group pane, click on the group from which you want to take people. The members of this group appear in the People Tree pane below. This is the source group. 2. From the People Tree pane, click to select one or more persons to add to the target person group. 3. With the left mouse key depressed, drag the selected people from the People Tree pane to the specified Person Group pane and drop them (release the left mouse key) into the target person group. 4. Do one of these: • If you select a person from the default Everyone group, a message like this appears:
Click Yes to move a copy of the selected person(s) into the new group. These persons still appear in the Everyone group. • If you select a person from a previously created person group, a prompt like this appears:
Click Move to move the selected person(s) from the source person group to the target person group. Click Copy to move a copy of the selected person(s) from the source person group to the target person group. The target group now includes the people you selected.
Method 2 This creates a new person for this group, using one of the right click options. To enroll a person in a person group: 1. In the Person Group pane, right click on the group to which you want to add a person. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Add Person. A new Personal Information Form appears in the personal information pane. 3. Supply values to these fields, as required, and click Apply. The new person appears in the Person Tree pane. 4. Assign one or more credentials to this person, as required. The new person is now enrolled in this person group.
122 Person Groups MAN007-0211
Method 3 This creates a new person from an existing person template for this group, using one of the right click options. To enroll a person in a person group from an existing person template: 1. In the Person Group pane, right click on the group to which you want to add a person. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Add Person from Template. The Select Person Template appears.
A list of currently defined person templates appears in this window. The person group must be included in the person template you want to add. 3. Click to highlight the person template that describes the new person. 4. Click OK. A new Personal Information Form appears in the personal information pane with the values relevant to the selected template already filled in. 5. Supply other values to these fields, as required, and click Apply. The new person appears in the Person Tree pane. 6. Assign one or more credentials to this person, as required. The new person is now enrolled in this person group. Batch Enroll Card Credentials This feature enables you to enroll a number of card credentials at the same time. ID numbers are generated sequentially: for example, if you are doing fifteen cards starting with ID number 6, the last card will be assigned ID number 21. Before you batch enroll cards, you must:
know the Facility or Site Code for the cards to be enrolled. To obtain the Facility Code, contact the card provider. create a credential template for IDF2 - Card. To batch enroll card credentials: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager screen appears. 2. From the menu bar, select File > Batch Enroll Credentials.
Person Groups 123 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Batch Enroll Card Credentials dialog box appears like this example:
3. In field 1, 'Number of cards to enroll,' type the number of cards you need to enroll. 4. In field 2, 'Credential Template,' select the credential template you require from the drop-down option list. Only those credential templates designated as using IDF 2 (Card) appear in this list. 5. In field 3, 'Type of batch enroll to perform,' specify whether you want to automatically enroll these cards or perform the enrollment manually. • If you click the Auto Enroll radio button (the default), perform these tasks: a. In the 'Select Card Format' combo box, select the format of the cards you are using to enroll this batch. Standard 26-Bit Wiegand is the default. b. At the 'Enter Starting Card Data Number', enter the Facility or Site Code Number followed by a dash (-) or comma (,) followed by the card stamp number on the first card to be enrolled. (Before starting the batch auto enroll, make sure the cards are numbered sequentially.) For example, 27-116225, where 27 is the Facility or Site Code Number, the dash is the separator, and 116225 is the number on the first card to be enrolled. c. Skip to Step 7. • If you click the Manual Enroll radio button, you must specify the card format and card number for each card in the batch. Proceed to Step 6. You can only perform manual enroll of cards if you have an enrollment station connected to this system. For more on connecting and configuring an enrollment station, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 6. Check the Station Status. If there is a diagonal red line across the front of the icon, it means that Velocity does not currently detect an enrollment station attached to the Velocity workstation. Click this icon to bring up the Enrollment station dialog box and configure the connection correctly. 7. Click the Start button. The batch process begins. If you specified Auto Enroll, Enrollment Manager automatically generates the requested number of credentials. The progress of the generation are displayed in the window to the right of the Start button.
124 Person Groups MAN007-0211
If you specified Manual Enroll, follow the instructions appearing in the Status window to the right of the Start button. Coordinate your card swipes through the enrollment station with Enrollment Manager's recording of each entry until the requested number of credentials have been completed. Once the enrollment process is completed, a message displays a confirmation like this: Successfully added Credential with User ID # and records processed. A message pops up confirming that the batch enrollment was complete. 8. Click OK. 9. When you're finished, click Close. You are returned to Enrollment Manager. The newly-created credentials appear in the Credentials pane under Unassigned Credentials.
Person Groups 125 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Capturing a Signature
This feature only works if you have attached a signature tablet to your Velocity server. For more information on installing and configuring your signature tablet, refer to the Velocity Quick Installation Guide or your manufacturer's installation guide. To capture a signature: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager main screen appears. 2. From the person tree pane, either select an existing person or enroll a new person. The appropriate Personal Information form appears in the Personal Information pane. 3. In the Personal Information pane, double click the signature box, . This is the box displayed just below the photo capture box. The Image Preview dialog box appears. 4. Click to select the Signature radio button. 5. Click Acquire. The Signature Capture dialog box appears like the following example:
The fields and buttons appearing on this screen are:
Pen Width Select the option you require from this pick list. The available options are: Fine — the pen width is fine. Medium — the pen width is slightly broader. Broad — the pen width is broad. Click this icon and the color dialog box appears. Select the color for the signature.
Click this icon and the color dialog box appears. Select the color you want for the signature background.
Clear Click this button to clear the signature and start over. Signature The signature appears in this window as it is entered on the Entry window attached signature pad.
If a signature is currently in the signature window, click Clear to remove it. 6. Use the attached signature tablet or pad to enter the correct signature. As the enrollee enters their signature, it appears in the Signature Capture window. 7. If required, modify the pen width, pen color, or background color.
126 Capturing a Signature MAN007-0211
By using these additional effects, you can make the signature look like the following example:
8. Click Close. The Image Preview dialog box reappears with the new signature displayed like this example:
9. If required, click the button to increase the size of the signature appearing in the Preview window. Click the button to decrease the size of the signature in the window. 10. Click Save. The main Enrollment Manager screen appears with the new signature displayed below the picture frame on the Personal Information Form.
Capturing a Signature 127 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Capturing a Photo
You can capture photos for either the General tab or the Additional Images tab. Both procedures are detailed on the following pages. To capture a photograph for the General tab: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager main screen appears. 2. Enroll a new person or select an existing person. The appropriate Personal Information form appears. 3. In the Personal Information pane, double click the photo box. The Image Preview dialog box appears. For more on this dialog box, see page 134. 4. Select the source for this photo. You have a choice of three image options:
Option Meaning Refer to:
Video Acquire the image from an attached “Video Capture” on camera system. page 129
Twain Acquire the image from an attached “TWAIN Capture” on TWAIN device. page 131
File Acquire the photo from a file (jpeg, bmp, “File Capture” on page etc.) 133
5. Click Acquire. Occasionally, you might have to click Acquire twice before it takes effect. The rest of the procedure depends on which source you choose. For more on this, refer to the topics starting on page 129. While you can install both video capture (for badge photography) and CCTV on the same Velocity server (even use the same FlashBus video capture card to connect both feeds), you cannot run both simultaneously. Run one process or the other. For example, if you are monitoring your site over CCTV using the Velocity CCTV Viewer, do not try to capture photos using the FlashBus video card connection. Conversely, if you are capturing photos, do not try to monitor CCTV at the same time using the CCTV Viewer. To capture a photograph for the Additional Images tab: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager main screen appears. 2. Enroll a new person or select an existing person. The appropriate Personal Information form appears. 3. From the Personal Information form, click the Additional Images tab. The Additional Images page appears. 4. From the ‘Image Placholders’ window, click to highlight the placeholder you require.
128 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
5. In the Current Image section, click the Update Image... button. The Image Preview screen appears. 6. Select the source for this photo. You have a choice of three sources: •Video •TWAIN •File 7. Click Acquire. Occasionally, you might have to click Acquire twice before it takes effect. The rest of the procedure depends on which source you choose. For more on this, refer to the following subsections. Video Capture If you selected Video as the source, follow this procedure: 1. Click Acquire. The Video dialog box appears. For more this, refer to “Video Dialog Box” on page 130. 2. Make changes as required to the settings. 3. When you've positioned the person as required, click Freeze. 4. Click Close. The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134. 5. Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within the red cropping box. If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red cropping box until the portrait is perfectly framed.
6. If needed, use the and buttons to increase or decrease the size of the captured picture. 7. Click Save. The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame.
Capturing a Photo 129 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Video Dialog Box An example of the Video dialog box is shown below:
This screen contains these settings:
Signal This determines the signal standard for this video capture device. The default is NTSC. This setting is previously configured during setup.
Input Type This determines the type of port used to connect the video capture device to the Velocity workstation. This setting is previously configured during setup.
Reset Click this button to return the Signal, Input Type, and to their original values.
Brightness Move the slidebars to brighten or darken the image. The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Contrast Move the slidebars to increase or decrease the contrast between the objects captured. The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Hue Move the slidebars to brighten or darken the image. The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Saturation Move the slidebars to increase or decrease the density of the individual colors. The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Sharpness Move the slidebars to change the color hues. The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Freeze Click this button to freeze the image.
Close Click this button to return to the Image Preview dialog box.
130 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
TWAIN Capture If you selected TWAIN as your source, follow this procedure: 1. Click Acquire. The Select Source dialog box appears like this selection.
2. Click and highlight the source you want then click Select. The TWAIN setup screen appears. For more on this, refer to “TWAIN Setup Dialog Box” on page 131. 3. Make changes as required. 4. Click Capture. The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134. 5. Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within the red box. If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red box until the portrait is perfectly framed.
6. If needed, use the zoom in/zoom out buttons to increase or decrease the size of the captured picture. 7. Click Save. The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame. TWAIN Setup Dialog Box An example of the TWAIN Setup dialog box is shown below:
Capturing a Photo 131 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The FlashBus TWAIN32 Setup dialog box includes these features:
Keep Aspect Check this box to maintain the aspect ratio for this picture. The width and height are maintained in the same ratio as the original photograph.
Scale Check this box to change the aspect ratio. Use the Width and Height slidebars to change the height and width of the photograph as required.
Remote Grab Check this box to activate the remote grab feature. This feature is currently not implemented.
Monochrome Check this box to convert color images into black and white images.
Grab Specifies the type of grab allowed by the capture program. Your choices are: Align Even - align even grabbed objects Align Odd - align odd grabbed objects Align Any - align all grabbed objects
Adjustments Move the slidebars to adjust the captured image: Brightness - brighten or darken the image Contrast - increase or decrease the contrast between the objects captured Saturation - increase or decrease the density of the individual colors Hue - change the color hues The best way to determine how these controls affect an image is to test them yourself.
Defaults Click this button to return all adjustment values to their original value.
Video Center the image by their X and Y coordinates. For example, increasing the X center moves the image to the right.
Full Size Click this button to make the image fill the window.
Flash This determines what type of flash this TWAIN device has. The default is None. Other options include: •Universal •Strobe • AutoSync Check with your TWAIN device to ascertain whether it has a flash attachment and, if so, what type it is.
Field Delay If the flash attachment requires the device to delay before capturing the image, use the slider to specify that delay in seconds.
132 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
Input Type This determines what type of input is used to connect this TWAIN device to the Velocity workstation. Options are: •RGE • Composite •SVideo •RS170 • Green Sync Check with your TWAIN device manual to make sure of the connection type.
Standard This determines the standard used by this TWAIN device to capture the photograph. There are two options: •NTSC •PAL Check with your TWAIN device manual for the correct setting.
Capture Click this button to capture the image and return to the Image Preview dialog box.
File Capture If you selected File as your source, follow this procedure: 1. Click Acquire. The Open a File dialog box appears. 2. Browse for the video file you need. 3. Select the file you need and click Open. The Image Preview dialog box reappears. See page 134. 4. Using the cursor keys, move the picture until the person's face is centered within the red box. If you need to fine tune this framing, use the mouse to drag the red box until the portrait is perfectly framed.
5. If needed, use the zoom in/zoom out buttons to increase or decrease the size of the captured picture. 6. Click Save. The photo you cropped appears in the photo frame. Image Preview The Image Preview dialog box enables you to:
Capturing a Photo 133 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
capture a video image using photo capture software, or find an existing image To capture a photograph using photo capture software: 1. At the Image Preview dialog box, select the image source you require. 2. Click Acquire. •If you specified Video or TWAIN, an image appears in the Preview window to the right. •If you specified File, the Open A File dialog box appears. Select the image you want to import to the badge. 3. With the image displayed in the Preview window, move the cropping box with your mouse and/or cursor keys. This enables you to frame the image exactly.
4. Click Save. The image is imported to the photograph window in the Personal Information pane like this example:
Image Preview Dialog Box The Image Preview dialog box looks like this example:
134 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
The Image Preview dialog box includes these buttons and fields:
Image Source
Video Click this radio button to indicate that Velocity is connected to a video system. When you click Acquire, the FlashBus photo capture dialog box appears. Take the picture.
TWAIN Click this radio button to indicate that Velocity is connected to a photo capture system or scanner using the TWAIN protocol. When you click Acquire, the TWAIN Setup dialog box appears like this example. Select the TWAIN device from which this picture will be taken. Velocity takes the image associated with this system and imports it.
File Click this radio button to indicate the image is available either on your hard disk or on a diskette. When you click Acquire, Velocity prompts you with the Open a File dialog box. Find the specified file and import it. The image can be in one of 21 accepted image formats including JPG, GIF, TIF, PCX, TGA, and WMF.
Signature Click this radio button to capture a signature. When you click Acquire, the Signature Capture screen appears.
Acquire... Click this button to either take a picture using the photo capture equipment or, if file is selected, search for an existing image using the Open a File dialog box. If you selected the Signature radio button, clicking this button takes you to the Signature Capture screen.
Save Click this button to save the image and send it to the badge.
Help Click this button to see this screen.
Close Click this button to ignore the image and return to the previous screen.
Preview This window displays the results of the image or signature acquisition. You can manipulate the size of the image by using the magnifying glass buttons to the right of this window. You can crop and frame the image using the cropping box.
Click this button to increase (zoom in) the image size. Each time you click this button it increases the image size by 20%. The percentage of magnification (relative to the original 100%) of the image is displayed above this button.
Click this button to decrease (zoom out) the image size. Each time you click this button it decreases the image size by 20%. The percentage of magnification (relative to the original 100%) of the image is displayed above this button.
Capturing a Photo 135 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Additional Images This page displays images added to the Personal Information form. This enables qualified operators to enroll persons and include more than one image identifying them. This image can show side views or additional front views of the employee as well as other identifying images. Before you can access images, you must first define the person placeholders in the User-Defined Fields option. Once you have created the required placeholders, do the following: 1. At the Personal Information pane, click on the Additional Images tab. The Additional Images page appears like this example:
2. From the 'Image Placeholders' window, click to select the first image you want. 3. Click the Update Image... button. The Image Preview dialog box appears. See page 134. 4. Capture the image as you would the photo on the General page. The image appears in the 'Current Image' frame like this example:
5. If needed, click in the 'Description' field and enter a title or description of the image you just captured. To remove the currently displayed image, simply click the Remove Image button. The image disappears.
136 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
E-mailing a Photo Security occasionally requires a suspicious employee to be tracked by members of the security staff or some outside agency. To expedite this, Enrollment Manager includes the ability to e-mail an image of the employee database to one or more individuals or organizations. To e-mail a photo: 1. From Enrollment Manager, bring up the employee in question. The designated person's personal information form appears with a picture of the person in question. 2. Right click on the image you want to send. A pop-up option list appears like this example:
3. Select Email Picture... A dialog box like this appears: 4. Select the size you want to send.
Make all pictures Click this radio button to make the image smaller. smaller
Keep the original Click this radio button to retain the original size. sizes
Show more Click this link and select one of the predetermined options... sizes from the available additional options.
When you're finished, you can click the Show fewer options... link to toggle to the smaller dialog box.
5. Once you've chosen the size of the image you want to send, click OK.
Capturing a Photo 137 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An email form appears like this example:
6. Fill out the form as required. 7. When you're finished, click Send. Saving a Photo to Another Source You can save photos captured within the Velocity security system and copy them to another source using this feature. To save a photo to another source: 1. From Enrollment Manager, bring up the employee in question. The designated person's personal information form appears with a picture of the person in question. 2. Right click on the image you want to save. A pop-up option list appears like this example:
3. Select Save Picture As... The Save As... dialog box appears. 4. Use the fields to navigate to the required destination drive and directory. If required, rename the image. 5. Click Save. The image is saved to the specified directory with the given name.
138 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
Scanning Enrollment Data Use the Scan button to populate the Personal Information Form with relevant information from either a scanner or a PIV reader. Before you can use this function, you must have a scanner or PIV reader configured for use with this Velocity computer. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrators Guide. You can use this procedure to:
Insert information from some other source, such as a business card or license, into pre-mapped UDF fields on the Personal Information Form. Add pictures to the Additional images tab of the Personal Information Form. Add a signature to the Personal Information Form. Import data from a smart PIV card via PIV reader or RUU-201 Verification Station to appropriate fields on the Personal Information Form. To import data from a scanner: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. 2. Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information on an existing person. The Personal Information Form for that person appears. 3. Click the Scan button. The Verify Scanner Data screen appears.
For more on this screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. With the 'Auto launch on paper detect' feature enabled, the ScanShell 800 can start scanning automatically when paper is detected in the paper tray. (This does not apply to the ScanShell 1000 that cannot auto-detect paper.) Once scanned, the Verify Scanner Data screen will appear with the results displayed. Go to Step 6. With all other devices, you must click the Scan button before scanning begins. 4. From the Document Type: pick list, select the type of card you want to scan. There are several possible options: •Business Card • License/ID (OCR) • License/ID (Bar Code) • Passport 5. If you select the License/ID (OCR) option, the License Settings section appears. Select the Region, Country, and State specific to the license or ID you are scanning.
Capturing a Photo 139 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
6. Click Scan Document to begin the scanning/reading process. 7. Review the gathered data to make sure it is properly sorted. If you have enabled 'Auto accept scanned data' for either the ScanShell 800 or 1000, Step 6 is bypassed. Results are automatically accepted. 8. When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept. The information populates the Personal Information Form. To import data from a PIV reader: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. 2. Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information on an existing person. The Personal Information Form for that person appears. 3. Click the Scan button. The Verify Scanner Data screen appears.
For more on this screen, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 4. Click the PIV Reader tab if it is not already selected. 5. From the Type: pick list, select the PIV card type you want to read. There are several possible options: • DESFire FIPS201 •FIPS201 Contactless •FIPS201 Contact • DoD (legacy) CAC 6. Click Read PIV Card to begin the scanning/reading process. 7. Review the gathered data in the Output Window. 8. When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept. To import data from an RUU-201 PIV Verification Station: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. 2. Enroll a new person or click a name in the People Tree Pane to display information on an existing person. The Personal Information Form for that person appears. 3. Click Scan. The Verify Scanner Data screen appears. 4. Click the RUU tab, if it is not already selected. Make sure the status field is green and displays 'Online'. There is only one option at present for this device: FIPS201 Contact.
140 Capturing a Photo MAN007-0211
5. Insert the PIV card whose information you want to scan into the RUU-201. 6. Click Connect to begin the scanning/reading process. The RUU-201 reads the relevant information on the inserted card and dumps that information into the Output window. 7. Review the gathered data in the Output window. 8. When you're satisfied with the results, click Accept. The information populates the Personal Information Form. Data is mapped from the relevant PIV fields to the selected UDF fields.
Capturing a Photo 141 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Previewing a Badge
While you can immediately print a badge from Enrollment Manager, it's often a good idea to preview it before you do. To preview a badge:
Method 1 1. Enroll the new person. 2. Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential. 3. Complete the credential and close it. 4. Do one of these: • In the credential pane, right click the credential whose badge template you want to print and select Badge > Preview... from the pop-up list, or • Select and highlight the credential you want to use then click the Preview Badge button below the Personal Information form. The Print Preview screen appears with the final badge layout incorporating all the field information as well as the photograph and signature (if supplied). If you have defined a double-sided badge for this credential, both dialog boxes appear (one on top of the other). For more on the Print Preview screen, refer to “Print Preview Screen” on page 142. 5. Click the Print button. If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly configured, the badge is printed.
Method 2 This option enables you to preview a badge without closing the credential dialog box. 1. Enroll the new person. 2. Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential. 3. Complete the credential. 4. On the general page of the credential dialog box, click the Print Preview button, . The Print Preview screen appears with the final badge layout incorporating all the field information as well as the photograph and signature (if supplied). If you have defined a double-sided badge for this credential, both dialog boxes appear (one on top of the other). 5. Click the Print button. If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly configured, the badge is printed. Print Preview Screen To access the Print Preview screen, do one of these procedures:
Right click the appropriate credential, select Badge > Preview... from the pop-up option list. Select and highlight the appropriate credential then click the Preview Badge button in the Personal Information pane.
142 Previewing a Badge MAN007-0211
A screen like the following example appears:
Use the Print Preview screen to:
inspect the badge before printing print the badge This screen includes these buttons:
Click this button to print the displayed badge.
Click to toggle between the front and back of the badge for this badge template. For more on double-sided badge printing, refer to “Double-Sided Badge Printing” on page 145.
Close Click this button to close the Print Preview screen and return to the User Configuration dialog box.
Previewing a Badge 143 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Printing a Badge
To print a badge:
Method 1 1. Enroll the new person. 2. Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential. 3. Complete and assign the credential you need. 4. Do one of these: • In the credential pane, right click the assigned credential and select Badge > Print... from the pop-up list, or • Select and highlight the credential you want to use then click the Print Badge button, , below the Personal Information form. If the Velocity workstation is connected to a Badge Printer and is correctly configured, the badge is printed. The Badge Print Status dialog box (page 144) appears indicating whether the badge printed successfully or not. It also indicates how many other badges were printed using this credential. 5. Click Close to continue. 6.
Method 2 This option enables you to print a badge without closing the credential dialog box. 1. Enroll the new person. 2. Assign a person to a new or unassigned credential. 3. Complete the credential. 4. On the general page of the credential dialog box, click the Print Badge button, . You can also print directly from the Print Preview screen. The Badge Print Status dialog box (page 144) appears indicating whether the badge printed successfully or not. 5. Click Close to continue. Badge Print Status The Badge Print Status displays the current status of a badge print.
This dialog box shows the credential ID that was printed, the type of badge template that was using, and to whom the badge was assigned.
144 Printing a Badge MAN007-0211
If you have selected multiple credentials to print, a dialog box like this example appears, indicating that multiple badges were printed:
Double-Sided Badge Printing Before you can print double-sided badges from Enrollment Manager, perform these two tasks:
Make sure your printer is capable of duplex printing. Many badge printers do allow double-sided printing; however, check your printer documentation to make sure. Make sure the badge template selected for this person’s credential is defined as double-sided. The ‘Size page for Double-sided printing’ box must be checked on the Page Size tab of the Page Setup dialog box in the Badge Designer before this will work. For more on this, refer the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Printing a Badge 145 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Credentials
A credential is a compilation of vital security information that can be applied to a particular card or code holder. The completed credential is a security profile unique to that person. A credential serves the purpose of a card, a code, or a code and card. You can assign more than one credential to an individual. Credential information can include these values:
Description Badge template IDF Card information (type, stamp number, data number, MATCH code) Activation and expiration dates Code length PIN Duress digit Door group Function category and function type Function group Day/Use/Absentee Limits 2-Person rule specifications Threat authority Tag, Alert, and Disable Passback override Global credential management Auto-delete credentials Special Needs Maximum print and issue counts Fingerprint information Of course, not all credentials possess all this information. Some credentials only define card holders while other credentials apply to code holders. A credential is unique. It can only be used by one person at a time. Once assigned, a credential cannot be shared with another person. Think of it as a physical card: when a person has that card, it cannot be shared by persons; each person has his/her own. When a person leaves a company, the credential is returned to security and is unassigned. Once unassigned, the credential can be reassigned to another person. This does not mean that an unassigned credential is disabled. Particularly in the case of PIN code-only credentials, an unassigned credential can still be used unless it is disabled. In order to simplify and speed up the task of creating and assigning a credential, Velocity includes the Credential Template feature. A credential template includes most of the values listed above, but without such unique qualifiers as a PIN, duress digit, or MATCH code that are added on a per-person basis. This enables you to assign a credential template to a person’s credential then customize that credential.
146 Credentials MAN007-0211
How to Define Credentials It's always a good idea to create as many credential templates as you think you'll need before enrolling persons. Before creating credential templates, you should first create badge templates, function groups, and doors groups. To define a credential for a person: 1. At the main menu, open Enrollment Manager. 2. From the Enrollment Manager screen, select the person to whom you want to assign the new credential or add a new person. 3. From the Personal Information form, click the Add New Credential button or double click the Add New Credential folder in the Credentials pane as shown in the following example:
The Credential dialog box appears. For more on this, refer to “Credential Properties Dialog Box” on page 147. 4. Fill out the dialog box property sheets as required. At a minimum, • if you specify a keypad (code) IDF, assign a valid PIN • if you specify a card IDF, assign a valid MATCH code • assign a valid door group or function group 5. When you're finished, click OK. You are returned to the Personal Information form. Credential Properties Dialog Box The Credential Properties dialog box consists of four pages:
General property sheet (see page 148) Function property sheet (see page 152) Limits property sheet (see page 153) Options property sheet (see page 156) Each page is discussed in the following subsections. The Credential Properties dialog box is similar to the Credential Template Properties dialog box. For more on credential templates, refer to “Credential Templates,” starting on page 230.
Credentials 147 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
General Property Sheet The General property sheet looks like this example:
The fields on this page are:
ID: This is a read-only field. Velocity generates an ID number for each credential created. When you first add a credential, the value (new) appears. This is replaced by a generated number when the credential is created by clicking OK.
Link to: Check this box to link this credential to the credential specified in the pick list. This means that if this credential template is changed, the credentials associated with this template also change. For more on this, refer to Credentials - “Credentials: Link to Template” on page 167. If this box is not checked, this credential is independent of any credential template.
Description Type a brief description of this credential.
Badge From the drop-down list, select the badge template you need. If Template you need a double-sided badge, make sure to select a badge template designed specifically for double-sided printing. Only those badge templates already defined are displayed in this combo box list. Badge templates are created using the Badge & Graphics Designer. For more on the Designer, refer to the chapter, “Badge & Graphic Designer,” starting on page 439. For more on printing double-sided badges, refer to “Double-Sided Badge Printing,” starting on page 145.
Click this button to preview an example of the badge selected in the 'Badge Template' combo box above. Use this operation to review a badge template before assigning it to a person.
148 Credentials MAN007-0211
IDF Select one of the available IDF options from this combo box. Options are: • 0 - Badge Only • 1 - Keypad • 2 - Card • 3 - Dual • 4 - Card + Dual • 5 - Keypad + Dual • 6 - Keypad + Card • 7 - Keypad/Card/Dual The default is 1 - Keypad. For more on this, refer to “ID Formats (IDF)” on page 164.
Card If you select any card option—including card, dual, or card + code—from the IDF field, this section is activated.
Type: Select from the drop-down list the type of card this is. Select from these options: •Std 26-Bit Wiegand • Std 27-Bit Wiegand •Std 28-Bit Wiegand •Std 29-Bit Wiegand • One-Field ABA •Special 1 - 36 •Passthru The default is Std 26-Bit Wiegand. For more on card types, refer to “Card Types” on page 236. Note: If you are using an enrollment station, you don’t have to specify the type. The enrollment station automatically detects the card type and supplies it in this field.
Stamp # This optional field is most often used for record-keeping. Enter the hot stamp number appearing on this card. This is the number that is already imprinted on this card (normally on the back).
Data Type the data appearing on this card. This number is often the same as the hot stamp number (though not on Hirsch cards). If this workstation is connected to an enrollment station, simply slide the new card through the enrollment reader; the number automatically appears in the 'MATCH' field.
Credentials 149 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
UDF... Click this button to concatenate currently selected UDF fields and populate the 'Data' and 'MATCH' fields with the result. The Concatenate UDFs screen appears. This is generally only used when the Passthru option is selected for the Card Type. Note: Only UDFs that are a numeric type are selectable for concatenation. This button is only active when you select an IDF that specifies a Card. If you select IDFs 0 (Badge Only) or 1 (Code Only), this button is not active.
MATCH Do one of the following: • Enter numbers in the 'Data' field and Velocity automatically generates a number for this field. • Type in the MATCH number from the cross-reference list provided by Hirsch for all cards (except PVC cards used for photo badging). • Enroll the new card through the attached enrollment station. This field is automatically populated. This is an 8 - 16 digit number. Note: If you enter a MATCH code that has already been used, the program will prompt you. If the system has been enabled for override, a message appears asking you whether you want to override and reuse the code. If you have the proper permission, you can override and reuse the code; however, you cannot override an existing code unless the original has been deleted. Enrollment This icon indicates whether the enrollment station is working Station Status properly or not. If the station is connected and working correctly, you will see a normal black and white icon with a green dot, . If Velocity does not detect an enrollment station, you see a black and white icon with a red dot, .
Activation/Expiration Date
Activate: The date and time when this credential becomes valid. At the date field, use the down arrow, , to the right of this combo box to display a calendar. Select the month and day on which this card/code is activated. You can click the and buttons to go from month to month. Use the up and down cursor keys to change the date. The current time is automatically supplied. To change this, click in the time fields and enter new values as required. Alternatively, in the combo box to the right, select from a list of common date ranges, such as 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc. This automatically enters a value in the preceding field. Modify the values to the left combo box as required.
150 Credentials MAN007-0211
Expire: The date and time when this credential is no longer valid. If the person possessing this credential attempts to use this credential after the expiration date, Velocity refuses the attempt. If you want to activate this feature and change the date that appears in this field: 1. Check the 'Expire' box to the left of the field. 2. To the right of the field, click the browse button, . The Set Expiration Date dialog box appears. Refer to “Credentials: Set Expiration Date” on page 166. 3. Specify the date you want to use, either a specific date or a UDF date. 4. Click OK.
On This field is activated when the 'Expire On' checkbox is selected. Expiration: Three options are available: • Disable - click this radio button to indicate that this card/code is disabled on expiration. The card/code is stored in the database and cannot be reused. • Delete from Controllers - click this radio button to indicate that this card/code is deleted from all controller memories. The card/code is stored in the database and cannot be reused. • Disable and Unassign - click this radio button to indicate that this card/code is disabled and unassigned at expiration. The card/code is stored in the database and can be reused by selecting the credential from unassigned, assigning the unassigned credential to a person, then reactivating it.
Code If you select any code option—including code, dual, or card and code—from the IDF field, this section is activated.
Length: Use the spin control buttons, , to specify how many digits long this code can be. The range is 3 - 15 digits. The default is 4 digits.
PIN Either type in a new PIN code in the field or click Auto to automatically generate a number. Note: If you enter a PIN that has already been used, the program will prompt you. If the system has been enabled for override, a message appears asking you whether you want to override and reuse this PIN. If you have the proper permission, you can override and reuse the PIN.
Auto Click this button to automatically generate a new PIN code.
Duress Digit: Use the spin control buttons to specify a duress digit for this credential. Available duress digits are 1 - 9. The default is 0 indicating that no duress digit is required for this code. For on this, refer to “Duress Digits” on page 165.
Credentials 151 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Function Property Sheet The Function property sheet looks like this example:
Use this property sheet to define one or more actions that should be performed when this code/card is presented.
Function Click this radio button to assign a function group to this credential. Group The function group combo box to the right of this radio button is activated. Select from the combo box list of existing function groups or select
Function(s) Click this radio button to assign one or more functions to this credential. The buttons to the right of the Function(s) windows are activated.
Function When you click the Function(s) radio button, this window is window activated. This window contains a list of all access or control functions defined for this credential. While more than one function can appear in these windows, two or more functions (whether access or control) cannot be listed for the same controller. Note: A credential can only define a single function per controller.
Add... Click this button to add a function to this credential. The Define Function dialog box appears. Select the function you require and it is displayed in either the Access or Control Function window.
Edit... Click this button after selecting a function from either the Access Function or Control Function window to edit the function. The Define Function dialog box appears. Modify the function as needed.
Delete Click this button after selecting a function from either the Access Function or Control Function window to remove that function from the window.
152 Credentials MAN007-0211
Limits Property Sheet The Limits property sheet looks like this example:
Use this property sheet to enable a variety of limits on this credential including global person (credential) management, day/use/absentee limits, and two-person rule. The options available on this screen are:
Apply Click this box to indicate that the credential management limits Credential specified here are shared amongst all controllers connected to Management the same XBox. Before this feature can be applied, you must first Globally check the 'Enable global credential management' box on the Controller Properties Setup page (see page 153) for each affected controller. For example, if a person using this credential exceeds the use limit at one door, that information is shared with all other controllers on the same XBox. This makes it impossible for the credential to be used at another door even if it is controlled by another controller. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Threat Use the spin control buttons to increase or decrease the threat Authority level for this credential. At the specified threat level, the credential is no longer honored and access is no longer allowed. The default, 0, indicates that no threat level has been set for this credential. For more on threat levels, refer to page 224.
Day/Use/Absentee Limits
No Limit Click this radio button to indicate that there are no limits for this credential. This is the default value for a credential.
Credentials 153 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Day Limiting Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a specified number of days. The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin control field is activated. Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the right. For more on this, refer to “Day Limiting” on page 173.
Use Limiting Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a specified number of uses. The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin control field is activated. Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the right. For more on this, refer to “Use Limiting” on page 173.
Absentee Click this radio button to specify that this credential expires after a Limiting specified number of recorded days absent (days this card and/or code were not used). The 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' spin control field is activated. Specify the limit in the 'Day/Use/Absentee Count' field to the right. For more on this, refer to “Display Credential Information” on page 172.
Day/Use/ Use the spin control buttons to increase or decrease the number Absentee of days, uses, or absences this credential is allowed before it Count expires. The units specified here depend on the limiting radio button: • if you select Day Limiting, the count is in days • if you select Use Limiting, the count is in uses • if you select Absentee Limiting, the count is in days absent The allowed range is 1 - 254 days, uses, or absences. The default value is 0, no limit.
Auto-Delete Click this box to indicate that when the limit is reached as defined Credential by the fields above, this credential is automatically deleted from the controller's memory. If you have checked the 'Apply Credential Management Globally' box, all instances of this credential on all attached controllers are deleted. Note: If this option is not checked, when the limit is exceeded, the credential is disabled. For more on this feature, see “Auto-Delete” on page 175.
154 Credentials MAN007-0211
2-Person Rule This section specifies how the 2-person rule is applied to this credential. Doors are enabled for 2-Person Rule using the Door General Properties page. Timers and time zone disable parameters are specified on the Controller Passback property sheet. For more on this, refer to “Two-Person Rule,” starting on page 108.
Normal Click this radio button to indicate that the normal 2-person rule applies to this credential. This person can access a 2-Person Rule-enabled door with any other person possessing a Normal, A/B Rule “A”, or A/B Rule “B” designation.
A/B Rule A Two-Person “A/B” Rule. If one person has an A/B Rule “A” specified in the limits for their credential, they need to find someone with an A/B Rule “B” or a 'Normal' designation in order to unlock a 2-Person Rule-enabled door. This is particularly useful for supervisor/trainee access privileges. For more on this, refer to “Rule Variations” on page 110.
A/B Rule B Two-Person “A/B” Rule. If one person has an A/B Rule 'B' selected in the limits for their credential, they need to find someone with an A/B Rule “A” or a 'Normal' designation in order to unlock a 2-person rule-enabled door. This is particularly useful for supervisor/trainee access privileges. For more on this, refer to “Rule Variations” on page 110.
Executive Two-Person Executive Override. This allows the holder of this Override credential to override the two-man rule. It only takes this credential to unlock the door even if the door normally requires two people. For more on this, refer to “Executive Passback Override” on page 173.
Credentials 155 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Options Property Sheet The Options property sheet looks like this example:
This page controls a variety of options influencing the way Velocity responds to a specific credential.
Actions
Tag Click this box to indicate the credential is tagged. For more on this, refer to “Tagging” on page 175.
Alert Click this box to indicate the credential causes an alert. For more on this, refer to “Alert” on page 174.
Disable Click this box to disable all actions while this credential is being used.
Passback
Executive Click this box to designate that this credential allows executive Override override. For more on this, refer to “Executive Passback Override” on page 173.
Special Needs
Special Click this box to designate that this credential allows an unlock Needs extension beyond the normal unlock interval for special needs, Access Time such as wheelchair access or partial delivery. Extension
156 Credentials MAN007-0211
Current Issue Enables an operator to document the current status of this Status credential. This is particularly helpful if the credential has been lost, destroyed, or stolen for some reason. Either enter an issue into this combo box or select one of the status options from the drop-down list. The default issue list options include: •Lost •Stolen • Destroyed This is an information field and does not disable the credential.
Print Control
Enable Print Check this box to enable print control. Print control is a feature Control that restricts the number of badges that can be printed using this credential. If this credential is not associated with a badge template, this section has no relevance.
Attempts: A read-only field indicating the number of attempts that were made to print the badge based on this credential. This count and the Confirmed count will be identical unless you check the Display print confirmation box below.
Confirmed: A read-only field indicating the number of badges based on this credential that were actually printed. This number cannot exceed the prescribed Max field. This count and the Attempts count will be identical unless you check the Display print confirmation box below.
Max: Enter the maximum number of badges that can be printed for this credential. Velocity will not allow either the Attempts or Confirmed counts to exceed the value entered here unless the operator printing the badge is assigned to a role that allows overriding of print control.
Display Print Check this box to enable confirmation when a badge based on Confirmation this credential attempts to print. This means that whenever an operator prints a badge based on this credential, Velocity prompts the operator to indicate whether the badge printed correctly. If the operator indicates that the badge did print properly, both the Attempts and Confirmed fields are incremented by one. If the operator indicates that the badge did not print properly, only the Attempts field is incremented. Issue Control
Enable Issue Check this box to enable issue control. Control
Credentials 157 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Count: A read-only field indicating the number of times this credential has been issued. This figure cannot exceed the Max count you enter.
Max: Enter the maximum number of times this credential can be issued. Velocity will not allow the Count field to exceed the value entered here.
Reissue Click this button to reissue this credential. Issue A list of issues appears in this table. The first issue indicates the Comment initial issue of the card. Subsequent entries indicate that the Table credential was reissued. Each issue is identified by its issue number, the reason for its issue, and the date of its issuance. To review or edit an entry in this table, double click on the entry and the Reissue Credential dialog box appears.
Define Function Dialog Box The Define Function dialog box looks like this example:
The combo boxes on this screen are:
Function From the pull-down option list, select the type of function you Category: need performed. These include: • Access • Relay •Alarm •Password •Special The combo boxes in the bottom half of the screen change depending on which category you select.
Function: Depending on which function category is selected in the 'Function Category' combo box, select from a list of available functions in this option list. For more on this, see “Functions” on page 243.
158 Credentials MAN007-0211
Door Group: If you select Access, Password, or Special (Alarm Cancel, Watch Log, and Time Log only) from the 'Function Category' combo box, this combo box appears. Select a door group from the available options. All currently-defined door groups appear in this list. To create a new door group for this purpose, select
Controller: If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo box, this combo box appears. Select the controller that the specified control zone affects.
Control Zone: If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo box, this combo box appears. Specify the control zone that specifies the relay(s) or input(s) and its behavior. Both Standard and Master control zones are included in this list. Before a control zone can be effective, you must first define it. For more on control zones, refer to “Control Zones” on page 111.
Add If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo box, this button appears. Click this button to add the currently displayed controller and control zone to the list in the window below.
Remove If you select Relay or Alarm from the 'Function Category' combo box, this button appears. Click this button to remove a selected function from the function list in the window below.
Credential Biometrics Properties Sheet When you click the Biometrics tab, a page like this appears:
Credentials 159 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The fields and buttons on this page include:
SC Readers From the drop down list, select the smart card reader that will be used to enroll (encode) the MIFARE or DESFire smart cards. These smart cards are used to store both the user information and biometrics after initial enrollment.
GUID Specifies the global unique identifier (GUID) for the card associated with this credential. The GUID is normally provided automatically when the card is read during enrollment; however, if no GUID appears here and you require a GUID for this credential, click the Generate button to create one.
Click this button to automatically populate the GUID field with a GUID number.
First Name This field displays the first name of the person associated with this credential.
Last Name This field displays the last name of the person associated with this credential.
Panel ID Enter the Panel ID for this card. This ID is a sub-identifier or subset of the Site ID and is used to match encoded user smart cards to any number of field readers. The Panel ID is loaded into Cogent readers (such as the Hirsch RUU-GEN and SmartGate) using the reader's configuration software. The Panel ID itself is assigned by an administrator or other qualified operator during that configuration process. The Panel ID is subsequently used to specify subgroups of readers and cards for a given area or panel within the site. A match of both Site ID and Panel ID is required before the encoded user smart card can work on a given Cogent biometric reader.
Site ID Enter the Site ID for this card. This ID is used to match a given encoded user smart card with any number of Cogent smart readers (such as the Hirsch RUU-GEN and SmartGate). The Site ID is programmed into the readers using the reader's configuration software. The Site ID itself is assigned by an administrator or other qualified operator during that configuration process. A match of Site ID value between the card and reader is required before the reader allows the card to be read. This feature is like the Facility Code used for access control credentials that tie the card to a given site. The Site ID identifies the overall site relationship of the biometric cards and readers. A match of both Site ID and Panel ID is required before the encoded user smart card can work on a given Cogent biometric reader.
160 Credentials MAN007-0211
PIN Enter the PIN for this card. This PIN need not be the same as the PIN entered on the General page.
Issued Specify the day and date on which this card was issued.
Expires Specify the day and date on which this card expires.
CSN This is a read-only field. The Card Stamp Number is hard coded on a CAC card and automatically populates this field when the card is read during enrollment.
Left Hand Click the appropriate box to indicate the finger on the left hand you want to scan. The box turns green. Click Enroll Template 1 button. For more on this, see “Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential” on page 162.
Click this button to start the finger scan on the selected finger.
Right Hand Click the appropriate box to indicate the finger on the right hand you want to scan. The box turns green. Click Enroll Template 2 button. For more on this, see “Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential” on page 162.
Click this button to start the finger scan on the selected finger.
Writing Fingerprint Data to a Credential With the advent of smart cards, it is now possible to write biometric information, specifically fingerprint data, to a card. The amount of fingerprint information you can write depends on the memory capacity of the card. In general, 1 MB cards allow you to write one finger print, whereas 2 MB and 4 MB cards enable you to write two fingerprints to a given card. To write a fingerprint to a card: 1. Connect a fingerprint reader (sensor) to the Velocity server or workstation via a USB connection. As a USB device, the fingerprint reader should self-configure and be automatically recognized by the operating system once it is plugged in. If the operating system has any problems recognizing the reader, consult your fingerprint reader installation guide for information. 2. Launch Velocity. 3. Open the Enrollment Manager. The Enrollment Manager main page appears. 4. Double click the name of the person whose fingerprints you want to attach to their credential. 5. From the credential pane, either click an existing credential or click Add New Credential to create a new credential. The Credential Properties screen appears. If you are creating a new credential, fill out the appropriate information for the first four pages as you would normally do. 6. Click on the Biometrics tab. The Biometrics page appears.
Credentials 161 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
7. From the 'SC Readers' pick list, select the fingerprint reader you want to use to scan the fingerprints. Only fingerprint readers previously attached to and configured for this Velocity computer appear in this list. 8. Fill out the required fields, including these: •Panel ID •Site ID •PIN 9. In the Left Hand section, click to select the finger whose print you want to take. The selected box turns green. 10. Click the button. A screen like this appears:
11. Follow the instructions above the window. Normally, these instructions follow this order: • Place finger on sensor... • Remove finger from sensor... Generally it takes two passes before the sensor can fully capture a fingerprint. As the scanning is completed, the finger print appears in the window. Make sure you are scanning the finger you specified. If you have trouble reading a fingerprint, rub the finger you are using next to your nose or some other part of your face where there is some oil, then place your finger on the sensor again.
162 Credentials MAN007-0211
The Finger Enrollment dialog box disappears and the Biometric page reappears like this example:
12. To enroll a right hand fingerprint, repeat Steps 9 - 10 using the Right Hand section and click the button. 13. Once you have captured the fingerprint(s) you require, place the card to which you want to write the biometric credential on an attached card reader/writer. 14. Click Write. The fingerprint and associated credential data is written to the selected card. When the card reader has finished writing data to the selected card, a message like this appears: 15. Click OK. 16. Click OK again to return to the Enrollment Manager main screen. ID Formats (IDF) Hirsch has created seven different ID formats (IDFs) each of which qualifies the person for a different access level and, depending on the door encountered (Card only, Code only, or Dual Technology), requires a different series of steps to enter or exit. Each IDF is defined in the following table, indicating how each IDF would respond to a specific door configuration:
Dual Reader Dual Reader ID Format ScramblePad Card Reader (Normal (Card + Code (IDF) Only Only Operation) only)
IDF 1: Keypad Enter PIN Enter PIN Enter PIN N/A Only
IDF 2: Card Present card Present card N/A Present card Only
IDF 3: Dual Present card, Present card, N/A N/A enter PIN enter PIN
IDF 4: Card + Present card, Present card N/A Present card Dual enter PIN
IDF 5: Keypad Present card, Enter PIN Enter PIN N/A + Dual enter PIN or code only
Credentials 163 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Dual Reader Dual Reader ID Format ScramblePad Card Reader (Normal (Card + Code (IDF) Only Only Operation) only)
IDF 6: Keypad Present card or Present card or Enter PIN Present card + Card enter PIN enter PIN
IDF 7: Present card, Present card or Enter PIN Present card Keypad/Card/D enter PIN enter PIN ual At a dual-technology reader—a device possessing both a card reader and a keypad—qualified individuals with both keypad-only and card-only access can be served in addition to people with Dual Code (Card + Code) access. People using dual codes must swipe their cards through a reader then enter their PIN at the keypad before access can be given. During times of high traffic volume, Hirsch has created a Card or Code Only Time Zone (CCOTZ) feature. This means that at certain dual readers for specific times of the day, the controller will allow either Code Only or Card Only access to those persons enrolled for that feature. To use this feature, a person must be enrolled as either Card Only or Code Only and Dual Access; then during a predefined time zone (CCOTZ) the qualified person can use just the one code or card to enter even though at other times, both card and code are required to enter. At the same time, even while in CCOTZ mode, persons enrolled as Dual, Card Only, or Code Only, will still have access using their normal access methods. In Velocity, all IDFs generate only one record. Velocity can support very large user numbers. Duress Digits If a qualified person is being forced to open a door against his/her will, the person can indicate this coercion by entering an extra ‘duress’ digit. By entering this digit, the controller permits access while issuing a silent alarm, immediately alerting the Velocity operator to the situation. In order to use a duress digit, the controller must first be enabled for this feature and a duress digit must be specified. Only use this feature if an operator will be monitoring the system. Duress digits are entered at the keypad immediately after the qualified person’s PIN code. For example, a person at a ScramblePad might enter this code: START 184059 # where 18405 is the person’s normal PIN number and 9 is the duress digit. Setting Up Duress Digits To set up duress digits: 1. In the system tree pane, reveal the controller and right click. 2. Select Properties. 3. Select the Setup tab. 4. Under ‘Options’, check the ‘Enable Duress Alarm Mode’ box. 5. Select OK to save.
164 Credentials MAN007-0211
6. Open the Enrollment Manager. 7. Double click Add New Credential. 8. In the ‘Code’ section, select a Duress Digit. 9. Save the credential. Using Duress Digits With Code Extension Digits If you have enabled a person for a duress digit as well as qualified them for a function group, the duress digit comes after the user code while the function group extension digits come after the asterisk. For example, if a person with the PIN 111 is defined for a duress digit of 9, this person would enter a duress code like this example: 1119 However, if the person wants to express a duress digit while also specifying function group controls (1 in this case), he/she would enter the duress digit, the asterisk, then the extension digit like this: 1119*1 For information on using extension digits, refer to “Defining Code Extensions” on page 272. Credentials: Set Expiration Date The Set Expiration Date dialog box looks like this example:
The Set Expiration Date dialog box includes these fields:
Expire on Click to select this radio button if you want this credential to Date: expire on a specific date at a specific time. The date and time field to the right is activated. This radio button cannot be deselected unless a UDF date type field is available.
At the date field, use the down arrow, , to the right of this combo box to display a calendar. Select the month and day on which this card/code is activated. You can use the arrow keys to go side to side or up and down for values. The current time is automatically supplied. To change this, click in the time fields and enter new values as required. Alternatively, in the combo box to the right, select from a list of common date ranges, such as 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, and so on. This automatically enters a value in the preceding field. You can then modify the values in the left combo box as required.
Credentials 165 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Expire on UDF Click to select this radio button if you want this credential to Data: expire on a date specified by a value in a UDF field. The time when the expiration takes place is always the end of the last minute before midnight (11:59 PM) on the date designated by the UDF. For example, if you have defined a UDF for ‘Anniversary’, this indicates that anyone given this credential will have it expire on the last second of 11:59 PM on the employee's anniversary. This field is only activated if one or more UDFs with a type 'Date' are defined in Enrollment Manager.
At the pick list field, use the down arrow, , to display a list of all currently-defined UDFs with a type ‘Date’. Select the UDF with the type 'Date' you want to serve as the expiration date.
Click OK when you're finished to return to the Credential Properties General page. The expiration date you specified now appears in the 'Expire' field. Credentials: Link to Template When the 'Link to:' field is checked and a pre-existing Credential Template is selected on either the Credential Templates Option Properties page or the Credential Option Properties page, certain fields on an individual credential can be changed when the credential template to which it is linked changes. An example of this field in its context appears below.
If the 'Link to:' box is checked, all fields associated with the specified Linked Template will be disabled (read-only) on the Credential Properties Option sheet. Unchecking the 'Link to:' box from Linked Template option activates these read-only fields allowing qualified operators to override the template settings. When the OK button is pressed, a dialog asking for confirmation of the override is displayed. This enables a qualified operator to change values of associated credential retroactively just by changing the credential template to which these credentials are linked. Only certain fields on the Credential Properties sheet are affected by the 'Link to:' feature. These are:
Activate/Expiration Date fields on the General tab Access and Control function sections on the Function tab
166 Credentials MAN007-0211
Day/Use/Absentee Limits section on the Limits tab Print / Issue Control sections on the Options tab All other fields and sections are user-specific and cannot be changed by changing the underlying credential template. For example, say you want to change the expiration date for all credentials associated with a specific template. The old way required you to go through each credential separately and make the change to the affected expiration fields. Using the 'Link to:' feature, however, you can change the expiration date in the linked credential template and the new expiration date ripples down through all linked credentials. If the 'Link to:' checkbox is cleared, a confirmation message box appears, asking you to confirm the clearing of the box. If you confirm the change, the credential is unlinked from the template and the credential fields may be edited; however there is no further connection to the template the credential was linked to. If you change the name of the credential template in the 'Link to:' pick list, a message appears asking you to confirm this selection. If you confirm the change of template, the credential fields associated with the old template are changed to reflect the new values from the new template. If a qualified operator edits a template that has existing credentials linked to it then presses OK, a confirmation dialog appears listing all credentials linked to the template. If you confirm this change, all linked credentials are changed according to the new values in the template. Credentials: Concatenating UDFs You have several possibilities for entering data in the Credential 'Data' and 'MATCH' fields:
You can enter specific numbers taken from the blank card You can create and enter a number of your own You can generate numbers automatically composed of UDFs Steps for using this third approach are discussed here. To concatenate a value for both the 'Data' and 'MATCH' fields: 1. Make sure you have one or more UDFs already defined through the User Defined Setup feature. Each UDF must be one of these qualifying types: Number, Auto-unique, Unique, or Auto-sequential. 2. Create a new or edit an existing credential or credential template. 3. At the General page of the Credential Properties sheet, select an IDF that includes a card. The UDF... button is activated. 4. Click the UDF... button.
Credentials 167 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Concatenate UDFs dialog box appears. All currently defined UDFs appear in the window.
5. Check each UDF you want to use to concatenate a value. 6. Using the Move Up and Move Down buttons, list the available UDFs as you require. This determines the order in which the values are hashed to make the relevant Data and MATCH values. 7. Click OK. From now on, each person assigned this credential will have the values entered for the specified UDFs combined to generate a unique 'Data' and 'MATCH' field value. The 'Data' field value is preceded by
The fields on this dialog box include:
Date A read-only field that indicates the current date.
Issue # A read-only field indicating the issue number. This increments by one each time a new issue is entered.
Reason Select from the available options in the drop-down list. These include: •Lost •Stolen • Destroyed
Comment Enter commentary on reasons for the reissue.
168 Credentials MAN007-0211
Click OK when you're finished. The new reissue appears in the issue table as shown in the example below:
Credential Tasks Use the Credential pane in the Enrollment Manager to perform several tasks on one or more specified credentials. To perform credential tasks: 1. From the people tree pane, select the person(s) on whose credential(s) you want to perform a task. To select multiple persons, either use the Shift + click combination to select a contiguous group, or Ctrl + click to pick multiple people. If you have only selected one person, that person's Personal Information form appears with all associated credentials displayed in the credentials pane. Go to Step 5. If you have selected multiple people, proceed to Step 2. 2. If you have selected multiple people, right click on the highlighted group. An option list appears. 3. Select Display Credentials... The Credentials – Multiple People window appears like this example:
4. Select one or more credentials. 5. Do one of these: • If this is a single person, right click a credential displayed in the Credential pane. • If this is multiple credentials, right click the selected credentials in the Credentials – Multiple People window.
Credentials 169 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
A drop-down option list appears like this example.
6. Select one of the options from this list:
Badge Select this option to display several sub-options that apply to the display and modification of the badge. Three options are available: Preview... to display the Badge Preview dialog box. Print to print the current badge associated with this credential. Edit... to start Badge Designer and display the currently assigned Badge Template for this credential. If more than one credential is selected, this option is inactive.
Tag Select this option to tag the specified credential. A check mark appears before the option. It can be deactivated at any time by re-selecting the checked option. For more on this, refer to “Tagging” on page 175.
Alert Select this option to alert the specified credential. A check mark appears before the option. It can be deactivated at any time by re-selecting the checked option. For more on this, refer to “Alert” on page 174.
Disable Select this option to disable the specified credential. The credential is temporarily disabled and a check mark appears before the option. It can be reactivated at any time by re-selecting the checked option.
Forgive Select this option to forgive any passback violation for this Passback credential. The event appears in the Event Viewer. This option is particularly useful in an emergency, when a passback violation must be forgiven in order to get people out of a passback area as quickly as possible. For more on this, refer to “Forgiving Passback” on page 174.
170 Credentials MAN007-0211
Override Select this option to override any code tamper alarm Code Tamper associated with this credential. The event appears in the Event Viewer. This allows a credential that has been disabled because of code tamper to be reused after an operator confirms that an authorized user made a mistake.
Reset Limit Select this option to reset the limit count for this credential to Count the default value. The event appears in the Event Viewer. This essentially awards an extension to the credential holder.
Force Select this option to force an immediate download of this Download credential's information to the relevant controllers. For more on this, refer to “Downloading Credentials” on page 104 or “Downloading Multiple Credentials” on page 105.
Unassign Select this option to unassign this credential from the current person. The credential disappears from the Credential pane and is added to the Unassigned Credentials queue in the Enrollment Manager's Credential Tree pane. For more on this, see “Unassigning Credentials” on page 104.
Delete Select this option to delete the credential from the Velocity database. A prompt appears asking you to confirm your choice. Click Yes and the credential is permanently removed from the database.
Properties... Select this option to display the Credential Properties dialog box for this credential. See “Credential Properties Dialog Box” on page 147. If more than one credential is selected, this option is inactive Display Credential Information Credential information can be displayed manually, through the Display Credential option in either Alarm Viewer or Event Viewer, or automatically through the Show Credential Information options in Graphics. Auto display credentials can also be enabled for all doors through the Auto Display Credentials option under the Door General Properties sheet. The credential information window pops up whenever a person enters or exits a designated door. When a door is enabled for this feature, the Credential window pops up automatically, displaying information relevant information on the person holding the credential. To display a photo of the person at the door, a qualified operator must first assign a badge template that includes a photograph placeholder in either general door properties or general preferences. This window can appear whenever Velocity issues either an Access Grant or Access Denied within the following modules:
Alarm Viewer Event Viewer Graphics
Credentials 171 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
There is one pop-up window allowed per door on a drawing board in Graphics. If more than one credential window is displayed on a graphic drawing board at the same time (for multiple doors), the windows will arrange themselves so as to be visible at the same time. The credential pop-up only shows the last action performed on the door. You can restrict the use of this feature by enabling or disabling the 'Default Display Credential' permission on the Graphics Role page. Absentee Limiting Absentee Limiting, also called Absentee Rule, sets the maximum number of consecutive days a person may be absent – and therefore not use their ID to enter a secure area or perform a control function – before the credential(s) used by that person is disabled or deleted from the database. A person can possess more than one credential each of which may specify a different absentee limit. For example, if Rachel Smith is only allowed six absences from work when her badge (credential) is issued and Velocity detects that she has been absent seven times in a row, her credential is disabled and she can no longer use that card to gain admittance to the specified area (door group). If Rachel Smith uses her badge before the absentee limit is reached, the count is reset. Absentee Limiting is enabled and the number of absences are specified through the Limits property sheet on either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template dialog box. Use Limiting Use limiting, also referred to as use count, sets a maximum number of uses an authorized credential can perform in order to enter a secure area or perform a control function. Velocity allows up to a maximum of 255 uses. Once the use count expires the person is disabled or optionally deleted. For example, Mr. Brown is a temporary employee who has been assigned a credential that gives him access to the research lab. Since Mr. Brown's contract calls for him to finish his job within thirty days, his credential entitles him to only sixty accesses (one entry and one exit per day) before the credential is invalidated. (If Mr. Brown is a smoker, ratchet up the use count.) After thirty working days (assuming he doesn't miss any days due to injury or illness), Mr. Brown's card no longer allows him to enter the lab. Day Limiting Day limiting sets a maximum number of days an authorized credential can access an assigned area before access privileges are withdrawn. Up to a maximum of 255 days can be allowed. Once the day limit expires the credential is disabled or optionally deleted.
172 Credentials MAN007-0211
For example, Mr. Brown is a temporary employee who has been assigned a credential that gives him access to the research lab. Since Mr. Brown's contract calls for him to finish his job within thirty days, his credential entitles him to only thirty days before the credential is invalidated. After thirty calendar days, Mr. Brown's card no longer allows him to enter the lab. Day Limiting covers the same territory as Temporary Days. Executive Passback Override When a person is granted executive passback override privileges it means passback limitations don't apply to this credential or person. No passback violation messages will be issued and an access-grant always works. For example, John has two-way access to his office and to the Lobby main door. But if he tailgates behind someone into the lobby, he can't get into his office. If an operator awards him (or anyone else) with the Executive Override option, his tail-gating or any other passback infringements are automatically forgiven; access is granted. Executive override of passback is accomplished through the Options property sheet of either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template dialog box. Forgiving Passback There are times when it is necessary to forgive passback, such as when an emergency requires that everyone leave the building immediately. If passback is enabled for an area or a credential, Velocity normally records this emergency access as a validation and may not let the person back into the area once the emergency is over. To avoid this situation, the operator can forgive passback, either for an individual credential, as shown below, or for an entire area, as explained in Forgive Users. To forgive passback for a person: 1. Open Enrollment Manager. 2. Select the person whose passback you want to forgive. 3. From the Credential pane, right click on the credential with the passback enabled. 4. Select Forgive from the pop-up option list. Forgiving Users There are emergencies, such as fire or earthquake, when you must effect a rapid evacuation of a facility no matter what access privileges the persons inside hold. To perform a rapid evacuation, Velocity provides the Forgive Users features. This instructs controllers to overlook all current passback and occupancy restrictions in the interests of a speedy exit from the endangered area. This function can be accomplished in two ways:
By a qualified operator from a Velocity workstation By a qualified operator or person from a specific reader/keypad To forgive all persons from a Velocity workstation: 1. From the System Tree pane, expand the DIGI*TRAC Configuration folder until the effected controller appears. 2. Right click the controller. A list of options appears. 3. Select Download > Forgive Users from the list.
Credentials 173 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The instructions are immediately downloaded to the specific controller. No access is denied to evacuating personnel, no matter the current state of their credentials. To forgive all persons from a specific reader/keypad: 1. From the Enrollment Manager, create a credential or credential template that includes the Special Function Indexed Command - Forgive All Users. 2. Assign this credential or credential template to a qualified person. 3. After an emergency, one of the people possessing this special credential enters a code or card at the reader guarding the entrance/exit to the evacuated area (passback zone). All violations recorded during the evacuation from this passback zone are forgiven. Alert When Alert is enabled, a special audio alert sounds at the keypad where a person enters a code/card that is specified as an alerted credential. This audio alert can also occur when the code triggers a control zone that is alerted. Alert is disabled (unchecked) as the default state. Use Alerts for messaging in order to notify a person or group of people that some special condition exists as they use their code. For example, a message is waiting for them or an unscheduled meeting is taking place. The alert is a series of four “beeps” and a flashing LED on the ScramblePad where the transaction takes place. Alerts only sound at the keypad where the code is entered. Tagging When you enable tagging, it automatically sends a special Tag Alarm to the Alarm Viewer each time the person with this credential uses the code/card, regardless of whether access was granted or denied. This alarm can also be issued when the card/code triggers a tagged control zone. When tagging is checked it is enabled. When tagging is unchecked it is disabled. Disabled is the default. Tagging can be enabled for controllers, credentials, control zones, master control zones, door groups, and master door groups. Auto-Delete Use this feature to automatically delete a credential from the database whenever it reaches one of these user limits:
use limit absentee limit day limit This keeps the maximum amount of memory available for adding new people; however, this can also prevent a person from being identified when he/she attempts access after they have been disabled by reaching a pre-defined user limit. Normally, a credential is disabled. The auto-delete credential setting is selected by checking the Auto-Delete Credential check box on the Limits property sheet of either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template dialog box.
174 Credentials MAN007-0211
A similar feature is Expire on: which enables the operator to specify a day and time when the credential expires. At that time, this feature allows the operator to disable the credential, unassign the credential, or delete it from the relevant controller. The feature is available through the General page on either the Credential dialog box or the Credential Template dialog box.
Credentials 175 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
176 Credentials MAN007-0211 Report Manager
Use the Report Manager to generate reports on Velocity's activity. The Report Manager comes with more than sixty standard reports for instant generation of reports dealing with every aspect of your facility's security. Report Manager also includes sophisticated sorting and filtering tools that enable you to customize reports to your specific requirements. The Report Manager currently supports reports for these topics:
Customization Reports (3 reports) DIGI*TRAC Configurations (19 reports) History Logs (13 reports) Person Information (27 reports) Velocity Configuration (24 reports) You can create additional report groups and reports as required. Most report types a customer might desire are available as standard. However, for those installations that require customized reports, Report Manager also imports reports created using Crystal Reports, the industry-standard report formatter and generator. You cannot open Report Manager until you have selected a report printer in Preferences. If you attempt to do this, an error message will appear.
177 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The following flowchart below may help you understand how to use Report Manager.
The subjects covered in this chapter include:
Topic Refer to:
Opening Report Manager page 179
Report Manager Main Screen page 180
Generating a Report page 183
Customizing an Existing Report page 190
178 MAN007-0211
Opening Report Manager
Before you can open any reports or use the Report Manager, you must first select one of the printers attached to this system as the report printer on the Printers page of Preferences. If you try to open Report Manager without this selection, you get an error message and Report Manager won't open. To open Report Manager: 1. Open Velocity. The Velocity screen appears. 2. Do one of the following: • Click the Reports icon on the Icon bar, . • From the Components window, double click the Report Manager module. • From the Velocity option bar, select Console > Report Manager. The main Reports Manager screen appears like the following example:
For details on the Report Manager main screen, refer to the next topic, “Report Manager Main Screen” on page 180.
Opening Report Manager 179 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Report Manager Main Screen
The main Report Manager screen looks like this example:
The screen contains a number of parts each of which is explained below.
Menu tool bar This includes three options and associated sub-options. For more on this, refer to “Report Manager: Menu Bar” on page 181.
Icon tool bar This bar gives you access to the basic Report Manager functions. For more on this, refer to “Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar” on page 182.
Use Report Check this box to use the default criteria and sorting settings for Default each page. The program automatically generates a report based Criteria and on the default ordering and criteria. Sorting To customize an existing report by creating new criteria and sorting, leave this box unchecked. The fields below the box are activated. You cannot customize reports unless this box is unchecked.
Criteria page This page enables you to select all the database fields or select one or more fields on which to report. For more on this, refer to “Criteria Page” on page 193.
Sorting page Click the Sorting tab to display this page. This page enables you to sort criteria by columns. For more on this, refer to “Sorting Page” on page 195.
Selected This pane displays all criteria selected (added) by the Criteria Criteria List and Sorting pages. You can change the criteria for either pane selecting or sorting the information you need right in this pane. For more on this, refer to “Selected Criteria List Pane” on page 196.
180 Report Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
Report Tree This pane displays all currently available reports. Simply select a pane report from the list and then either print it or use the Criteria and Sorting pages to customize it, if required. An expanded version of this pane is shown in the following example:
You can also add a new report folder to this tree, add a new report, and import externally created reports to populate the report group. Report Manager: Menu Bar The Report Manager menu bar includes these options:
File
Print Preview Bring up the Print Preview Screen for the currently selected report. This option is also available through the icon tool bar.
Print (Ctrl + P) Print the currently displayed report to a predetermined printer. This option is also available through the icon tool bar.
Exit Exit Report Manager.
Edit
Reports The suboptions are: Delete – Delete the currently selected report group. Rename – Rename the currently selected report group. New Report Definition File... – Create a new report definition file. Edit Report Definition File... – Edit an existing report definition file. Import Report and Report Definition File – Import an existing report and its associated definition file. Export Report and Report Definition File – Export an existing report and its associated definition file to a backup location.
Refresh Refresh data for the currently displayed report. All values are immediately updated.
Report Manager Main Screen 181 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Preferences... Access the Report Manager preferences page. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
Help
Help Topics Consult the online help for Report Manager.
Version Find the version number of this module. Report Manager: Icon Tool Bar The Report Manager icon bar includes these functions:
Print the report.
Preview the report before printing.
Add a report group.
Add a new report.
Import a report and report definition file.
Export a report and report definition file.
Add a new report definition file.
Edit an existing report definition file.
Delete report.
182 Report Manager Main Screen MAN007-0211
Creating a Report
This section describes how to create and print a report. Before you can open any reports or use the Report Manager, you must first assign a printer as the report printer on the Printers page of Preferences. If you attempt to do it without this assignment, you get an error message. To create and print a report: 1. Open Report Manager. The Report Manager main screen appears. 2. From the Report Tree pane, select one of the existing reports. The criteria for that report are loaded into the Criteria page. 3. Select one of these options: • To specify a report with the full complement of criteria defined by the default report, check the 'Use Report Default Criteria and Sorting' box. • To customize your report further—including or excluding components and fields as well as defining precise criteria for this report—leave the 'Use Report Default Criteria and Sorting' unchecked then customize the report. 4. When you're finished, do one of these: • Click the Preview button, . The Preview screen appears as described on page 198. •Select File > Preview from the menu bar to review the finished report before printing it. The Preview screen appears as described on page 198. • Double click the report in the report tree. 5. Do one of these: • From the Print Preview screen, click the Print button, . • From the main Report Manager menu bar, select File > Print. The report is printed. Add a New Report To add a new report: 1. Import the file you want to use from another source—such as Crystal Reports or Report Manager export. 2. From the report tree pane, right click the Report Group into which you want the new report placed. An option list pops up. 3. Select Add > Report...
Creating a Report 183 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Add Report dialog box appears like this example:
By default, the dialog box selects the \Reports subdirectory. 4. If required, select another directory. Most of the time, you will want to store all reports in the default directory. 5. At the 'File name' combo box, either enter a new name or specify an existing name. 6. Click Open. The new file is added to the report tree in Report Manager. Once this is done, you can customize the report as required. List of Existing Reports Velocity currently supports these reports:
Customization Reports Components All Components settings currently recognized by Velocity as Customization specified in Customization Manager.
Events All event settings—such as alarms, RTNs, events, and Configuration software—currently recognized by Velocity. This includes not only DIGI*TRAC hardware events but also integrated device events, such as DVR and CCTV events.
Point All point customizations performed by qualified operators Customizations using Customization Manager.
DIGI*TRAC Configuration Controller Master All settings for all master control zones by controller. Control Zone
Controller All settings associated with controller passback zone Passback Zone occupancy settings. Occupancy
Controller All settings for all standard control zones by controller. Standard Control Zone
Controllers Brief summary of all controllers on this system.
184 Creating a Report MAN007-0211
Controllers with All attributes defined for each controller in the system, Detail including ID, name, description, address, model number, general setups, and miscellaneous setup parameters such as alarm relay timer settings. Basically anything entered in the Controllers configuration dialog box is reflected on this page.
Doors Brief summary of doors associated with each controller on this system.
Doors with Detail Complete description of all settings for each door in system.
Expansion Inputs Brief summary of inputs defined for or recognized by the system.
Expansion Inputs Complete description of all settings for each expansion input with Detail in the system.
Expansion Relays Brief summary of all expansion relays defined for or recognized by the system.
Expansion Relays Complete description of all settings for each expansion relay with Detail in the system.
Inputs Brief summary of all inputs defined for or recognized by this system including the module type and all other settings defined by the Input Configuration dialog box.
Inputs with Detail Complete description of all settings for each input in the system.
Network Layout Description of each site defined for this system, cross-referenced by server and port. This includes most of the information specified in the System Tree pane.
Printers Brief summary of each printer recognized by the system.
Readers Brief summary of each reader defined for or recognized by this system including all settings defined by the Reader Configuration dialog box.
Readers with Complete description of all settings for each reader in the Detail system.
Relays Brief summary of each relay defined for or recognized by this system including settings defined by the Relay Configuration dialog box.
Relays with Detail Complete description of all settings for each relay in the system.
History Logs Acknowledged All acknowledged and cleared alarms cross-referenced by the Cleared Alarms by operator who acknowledged or cleared them. Operator
Creating a Report 185 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Active Alarms by All unacknowledged/uncleared alarms cross-referenced by Date date.
Active Alarms by All unacknowledged/uncleared alarms cross-referenced by Date with date with comments. Comments
Alarm Log by Date Complete log of all alarms, both acknowledge and unacknowledged, cross-referenced by date
Alarm Log by Date Complete log of all alarms, both acknowledge and with Comments unacknowledged, cross-referenced by date with any comments entered by the operator for individual alarms
All Events Log by Complete list of all events ordered by category (e.g. event Category type).
All Events Log by Complete list of all events logged by the system, ordered by Date date.
All Events Log by Complete list of all events logged by the system, ordered by Date date. Note: It has been reported that after restoring a 2003 server database on a SQL 2008 server, the All Events Log by Date report will not open. To fix this, simply delete or rename the Velocity LDF files from the Microsoft SQL Server/MSSQL/data subdirectory. The appropriate LDF files will be regenerated and the report should open without difficulty. External Events List of all external events logged by Velocity. Log
Internal Events Log List of all internal events logged by Velocity.
Operator Log List of all events recorded by operators, sorted operator.
Transaction Log List of all transactions recorded by the system.
Transaction Log by List of all transactions recorded by the system and sorted by Transaction Type transaction type.
Person Information Active Credentials List of all active credentials including the first three with User-Defined user-defined fields. Fields 1-2-3
Credential Current Lists the current issue status for all credentials registered by Issue Status the Enrollment Manager for this system including credential number, last access date, net address, and so on. The card and code numbers are not included here.
Credential Current Lists the current issues status for all credentials with UDF 1, 2, Issue Status (with or 3 registered by the Enrollment Manager for this system. UDF 1-2-3)
186 Creating a Report MAN007-0211
Credential Reissue Lists the reissue history for each existing credential. History
Credential Status Lists the current status for each existing credential.
Credential Status Lists the current status for all credentials registered by the with Codes and Enrollment Manager for this system including Code and Card Cards numbers.
Dossier Style by List of all persons registered by Enrollment Manager including Person their photograph and signature (where available), cross-referenced by person.
Expired And List of all persons whose credentials have expired or are To-Be-Expired about to expire, cross-referenced by Name, Credential ID, Person Access Function, Function Group, Activation Date, Expiration Date and Door Group.
Expired List of all credentials whose expiration dates have passed Credentials without update or renewal. This does not include the code or card number.
Expired List of all credentials whose expiration dates have passed Credentials with without update or renewal including the code or card Codes and Cards number.
Expired Person Summary of all accesses granted to each person whose Access Summary credential has expired.
Inactive and List of all credentials that are now either inactive or disabled. Disabled Credentials
Last Access by List of the last access granted for each person, sorted by Person person.
Lost Cards List of all credentials that are recorded as lost. This does not include the code or card number.
Lost Cards with List of all credentials that are recorded as lost with code or Codes and Cards card number.
Lost Cards with List of all credentials that are recorded as lost with their User-Defined associated user-defined field values for UDFs 1 - 3. Fields 1-2-3
Person Access and List of credentials sorted by person and function groups Function Group assigned to each credential. Summary
Person Access and List of credentials sorted by person and function groups Function Group assigned to each credential. This includes the code and card Summary with numbers for each credential. Codes and Cards
Creating a Report 187 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Person Access by List of all accesses granted or denied cross-referenced by Door door.
Person Access Summary of all accesses either granted or denied for each Summary credential cross-referenced by persons.
Person Access Summary of all accesses either granted or denied for each Summary with credential cross-referenced by persons. This includes the Codes and Cards code and card numbers for each relevant credential.
Person Function Summary of the function groups to which each credential is Group Summary assigned cross-referenced by the people possessing the credential.
Person Function Summary of the function groups to which each credential is Group Summary assigned cross-referenced by the people possessing the with Codes and credential. This includes the code and card numbers for each Cards relevant credential.
Person Summary Brief summary of every person defined by the system. with UDF 1-2-3
Person Summary Brief summary of every person defined by the system with Codes and including their code and card numbers. Cards
Who is Inside List of all people currently identified as inside one or more Where defined passback zones.
Velocity Configuration Badge Templates List of all currently defined badge templates.
Command Sets List of command sets defined for this system with ID, name, command type, affected devices, and command string entered. All information entered in the Command Sets dialog box is shown here.
Comports List of COM ports currently defined for and connected to this Velocity system. This includes controllers, printers, switchers, cameras, and photo/signature capture devices.
Credential List all credential templates currently defined for this system. Templates
Door Groups List of all defined door groups with basic settings.
Door Groups with List of all defined door groups with a list of the persons Persons assigned to them.
Function Group List of all extensions defined for each Function Group, Extensions cross-referenced by the Function Group.
Function Groups List of functions groups defined for this system with Persons cross-referenced by the persons assigned to each group.
188 Creating a Report MAN007-0211
Functions with List of functions cross-referenced by the persons authorized Persons to use them. Functions are defined by the 'Function' field under the function page of the credential dialog box.
Holiday Schedules All holiday schedules as defined by the Holiday dialog box.
Holidays All holidays defined by the Holiday dialog box.
Linked Credentials A list of all credentials that currently linked to their credential templates.
Master Door List of all master door groups defined for this system Groups including all door groups included in this master group.
Master Door List of all master door groups defined for this system Groups with including all persons associated with each door group Persons included in this master group.
Operators List of all operators defined for the system by the Operator Properties dialog box.
Person Groups List of all currently defined person groups.
Person Templates List of all currently defined person templates.
Roles with List of all currently defined roles with the operators Operators (members) to which they are assigned.
Roles with List of all currently defined roles with an exhaustive list of Permissions permissions defined for each.
Time Zones - List of all Grand Master Time Zones as defined by the Time Grand Master Zone matrix. Time Zones
Time Zones - List of all Master Time Zones as defined by the Time Zone Master Time matrix. Zones
Time Zones - List of all Standard Time Zones as defined by the Time Zone Standard Time matrix. Zones
Time Zones - List of all standard time zones currently in use as defined by Standard Time the Time Zone matrix. Zones in Use
Creating a Report 189 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Customizing an Existing Report
You have the choice of either generating the pre-defined reports that come with Velocity or customizing the reports by eliminating certain criteria from the final list or sorting the existing criteria in any manner you need. To customize an existing report: 1. Open Report Manager. The Report Manager main screen appears. 2. From the Report Tree pane, select one of the existing reports. The available data fields for that report are loaded into the 'Field' combo box on the Criteria page. For example, if you selected Readers from the System Tree pane, the 'Field' combo box identifies four possible options: •Reader Name •Controller Name •Index •Address The options displayed in the 'Function' combo box vary according to the options selected in the 'Field' combo box. 3. From the 'Field' combo box, select one of the available options. Depending on the report type and option you selected in the 'Field' combo box, several different combo and text boxes can appear. 4. Click and select appropriate values in the one or more fields that now appear in the 'Function' area. Additional fields and boxes appear depending on the field and arguments specified. 5. In the 'is' field, select either is or is not. 6. In the next field, select one of the available arguments, including equal to, less than, greater than, starting with, or like. If you specify the 'greater than' or 'less than' argument, an additional field 'or equal to' check box appears. Check this box to indicate that the argument includes an equal to clause, such as 'greater than or equal to'. 7. In the variable window, do one of these: • If you specify the 'equal to' argument, the variable window expands to become a pick list from which you select one or more values. Select one or more options from this list. If this report supports a range of values, you can click the beginning value then hold down the Shift key and click the last value in the range. To select non-contiguous values, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking. • If you specify the 'starting with' or 'like' argument, enter the value you want the report to start with or be like. • If you specify 'greater than' or 'less than', enter the value this criterion will be greater than or less than. If it is also equal to, check the previous box. For more on the criteria page, refer to the “Criteria Page” on page 193. 8. When you're finished with this specific criterion, click the Add button. The criterion is displayed in the Selected Criteria List pane.
190 Customizing an Existing Report MAN007-0211
9. Repeat steps 3 - 8 to add more criteria to this report. An example of a typical customization process is shown below:
If you have selected one of the UDF reports, like the Person Summary (with UDF 1-2-3) or the Active Credentials With User Defined Fields 1-2-3, an additional section appears below the variable fields called Select which user defined fields to appear on the user defined columns, like this example:
10. If the 'Select which user defined fields...' section appears, from the three available drop-down lists, select up to three user-defined fields you want to appear as columns in the customized report. 11. If you need to add sorting elements to your report specifications, click the Sorting tab and the Sorting Page appears. 12. From the 'Field' combo box, select the item (field) by which you want to sort. The values appearing on the combo box list depend on the type of report you have selected. 13. From the 'Direction' combo box, select either Ascending or Descending. This indicates in which direction the selected field is used to sort: from least to greatest value or vice versa. For example, if you select 'Input Index' as the sorting point and indicate it should be used as an Ascending sorting feature, then the Report Manager sorts the report according to the Input Index, starting from the smallest value and proceeding down the list to the highest value. 14. Click Add and the Sort Field function is added to the Selected Criteria List. 15. If there are any other sorting criteria you need to add, repeat steps 11 - 13.
Customizing an Existing Report 191 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
An example of the sorting customization process is shown below:
16. Go to the Selected Criteria List pane and click any line (criterion) you need to edit. • To nest the line as an expression, click in the specific line's open parenthesis column. A combo box appears. Select the number of parentheses you need for this expression. To close the nested expression, click in the closed parenthesis column of the specific line and another combo box appears. Select the number of closed parentheses you need to satisfy this expression. • To add an AND argument to include or an OR argument to exclude this part of the expression, click in the AND/OR column of this line and a combo box appears. Select either AND or OR. To remove a line, select it and press Delete. 17. Continue to edit lines to create boolean expressions as required. A simple example of this process is shown below:
18. When you're finished, click the Preview button, , or select File > Print Preview from the menu bar to review the finished report before printing it. 19. If you need to modify the column header names appearing on this report, modify the Report Definition File; otherwise, skip this step and continue to the next. For more on the Report Definition File, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 20. To save the custom report, refer to “Saving Custom Reports” on page 197. 21. To print the report, click the Print button, , or select File > Print from the menu bar to print the report.
192 Customizing an Existing Report MAN007-0211
Criteria Page The Criteria page is one of two pages displayed at top right on the Report Manager. Select the page by clicking the Criteria tab. The page looks like this example:
This page contains these fields:
Use Report Uncheck this box to customize the criteria and sorting for this Default report. When checked, the default settings for this report are Criteria and accepted. Sorting The default for this box is checked.
Field Click this combo box and select from the drop-down list the fields you want to include in this report. You can only select one field at a time. The fields that appear in this pick list depend on the report you have selected in the report tree pane. For example, fields included in the Standard Time Zone report are different from those displayed for the Network Layout report. When you select a field, the Function combo boxes are activated.
Function When you select a field in the Field combo box, the Function combo box is activated. Depending on the field specified, this section can display a number of different fields and combo boxes. Several are listed below:
Click this combo box and select either is or is not from the drop-down option box. These are the two allowed arguments for the field to the right. The default argument is is.
Customizing an Existing Report 193 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this combo box to select one of the operators from the drop-down option list to complete this argument. These operators include: • like – the value selected from the Variable window is similar to the values for this parameter you wanted reported from the Velocity database. • equal to – the value selected from the Variable window is identical to the values for this parameter you want reported from the Velocity database. If this value is selected, the variable window expands to include a pick list of all possible values. • less than – the value selected from the Variable window is less than the values for this parameter you wanted reported from the Velocity database. If this option is selected, the additional 'or equal to' field appears. • greater than – the value selected from the Variable window is greater than values for this parameter you wanted reported from the Velocity database. If this value is specified then an additional 'or equal to' field appears. • starting with – start with the value selected from the Variable window and proceed forward using the Velocity database. The default argument is like. Variable Once you have selected an option in the 'Field' combo box and window the required options in the 'Function' fields, one or more windows or combo boxes appear below the argument combo box. This can be a simple text box like this:
into which values are entered, or more extensive pick lists like this example:
You are expected to either enter a value in this field or pick one or more elements from the available pick list. Once you have supplied this criteria, click Add to display the final criterion in the Criteria List window. For example, if you selected Server ID from the Field combo box for Network Layout, all of the currently defined server IDs would appear in this window.
Add Click this button to add the full argument to the list of report items needed for this customized report. The new argument appears in the Selected Criteria List window.
194 Customizing an Existing Report MAN007-0211
For example, say you only wanted to see a report on Server ID1. You would select Network Layout from the Report Tree pane, then select 'Server ID' from the Field combo box. All the currently-defined server IDs would appear. Select '1' from the window and specify in the Function combo boxes 'is' and 'equal to.' Then click the Add button and the criterion appears in the Selected Criteria List. You can make a criterion that is still more complex using the arguments in the ‘Selected Criteria List’ window. Sorting Page When you click the Sorting tab on the Report Manager screen, the sorting page appears like this example:
This page contains these fields:
Field Click this combo box and select from the drop-down list one or more of those fields you want to sort for in this report. You can only select one field at a time. When you select a field, the possible values for that field appear in the variable window. Fields change according to which report is selected; for example, fields included in the Standard Time Zone report are different from those displayed for the Network Layout report. If you select a criterion in this combo box, the Function combo boxes are activated. When the All field is deselected, this field is activated.
Direction Click this combo box and select either Ascending or Descending from the drop-down option box. Ascending is the default. If you select Ascending, all items detected in the Velocity database for the selected field will appear in the report listed from earliest/smallest/least significant to latest/largest/most significant. If you select Descending, all items detected in the Velocity database for the selected field will appear in the report listed from latest/largest/most significant to earliest/smallest/least significant.
Add Click this button to add the sort specification to the list of report items needed for this customized report. The new sort specification appears in the Selected Criteria List window.
For example, say you only wanted to sort all port type items in the Velocity database from 1 through the end of its range for a Network Layout report. To do this: 1. Click the Sorting tab to access the Sort page. 2. Click the 'Field' combo box and select Port Type. 3. Click the 'Direction' field and select Ascending. 4. Click the Add button. The criterion appears in the Selected Criteria List as a Sort Field selection.
Customizing an Existing Report 195 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Selected Criteria List Pane Use the Selected Criteria List window to customize a query still more using parentheses to nest arguments and the AND/OR expression to include or exclude arguments clauses.
The pane possesses these fields and buttons:
( Select a specific line then click under the open parenthesis column. A drop-down option list appears. Select the option you want to insert one or more parentheses into the selected criteria. The parenthesis function enables the building of nested arguments. The default is blank.
Criteria The entries built through the Criteria and Sorting pages. To add parentheses or an AND/OR argument to the criterion, click and highlight the entry.
) Select a specific line then click under the closed parenthesis column. A drop-down option list appears as shown below.
Select the option you want to insert one or more parentheses into the selected criteria. The parenthesis function enables the building of nested arguments. The default is blank.
AND/OR Select a specific line then click under this column. A drop-down option list appears as shown below.
If needed, select an AND or OR argument to the selected criterion; otherwise, leave blank.
You can customize your query as you like using this pane. The software does not make assumptions for the user anymore. Meaning they have to know what they are doing or it won't fly. Primarily, they have to know where and when to add Open and Closed Parenthesis, and know where and when to add the appropriate AND/OR modifier. Read the expression in the window like a book: left to right, top to bottom. The criteria arguments come first followed by the sorting arguments. In the example above, you can see that the query only returns Inputs that are named 'Input 01' OR 'Input 02'. This query will then sort the list by the Input Index in ascending order.
196 Customizing an Existing Report MAN007-0211
The parenthesis are added to show you they can be there. But the reality is, for this simple query, you don't need them. Report generation will run either way. The parenthesis function is to allow the building of complicated queries. Saving Custom Reports To save a custom report for future use: 1. Customize the report as required. 2. Click to preview the custom report. The Preview screen appears. 3. At the Preview screen, click the Export icon, . The Export dialog box appears.
For more on exporting reports, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 4. From the 'Format' combo box, select Crystal Reports (RPT). 5. From the 'Destination' combo box, select the destination for this file. Normally this is Disk File. 6. Click OK. The Choose Export File dialog box appears. 7. Navigate to the directory where you want this file to be stored. In most cases, you will specify the Program Files\Hirsch Electronics\Velocity\Reports directory. 8. In the 'File name' field, enter a name for this file, such as New Report.rpt. 9. Click Save. You are returned to the Preview screen. Two files are created: the data file, RPT, and the report definition file, tmp. You can use these two files to import the custom report into Crystal Report. If you need to re-import this custom report back into Velocity, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 10. Do one of these: • If you need to print this report, do so now using Step 20 in Customize an Existing Report then exit the Preview screen. The main Report Manager screen reappears. • Exit the Preview screen. The main Report Manager screen reappears.
Customizing an Existing Report 197 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Previewing a Report
To preview a report: 1. From the Report Tree pane, click to select the report you want to preview. 2. Do one of these: • From the icon bar, click the preview icon, . • From the menu bar, select File > Preview. • From the Report Tree pane, double click the report you want to preview. The Preview Screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Report Preview Screen” on page 198. 3. Review the report and, if required, print it directly from the preview screen or export it. Report Preview Screen The Report Manager Preview screen looks like the following example:
The columns that appear on a preview screen depend on the type of report you generate. The previous example provides columns of data relevant to controller settings.
198 Previewing a Report MAN007-0211
Another type of report, such as Active Alarms by Date present radically different columns and data, as in the following example:
The Preview screen has these tool bar controls:
Click: To:
Exit the current report preview and return to the Report Manager.
Print the displayed report.
Display the Export dialog box and save this screen to file. For more on this, refer to “Saving Custom Reports” on page 197.
Refresh the current screen. This incorporates any new information about the components that have been added to the database since Report Manager generated the preview screen.
Specify the size of the page displayed on the screen. Select from the available options. The default is 100% but you can select another setting to increase or decrease the size of the page you see.
Go to the first page of this report.
Go to the previous page of this report.
Go to the next page of this report.
Go to the last page of this report.
Halt report generation. This effectively stops the generating process.
Bring up the Search dialog box and search the currently displayed report for the entered text string.
The report preview screen includes a footer that indicates the page number for this page, if this is a multi-page report, as well as the total number of pages. Additionally, you can view and manipulate information on the Report Screen through various right click options. For more on these, refer to the “Preview Screen Features” starting on page 200.
Previewing a Report 199 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Preview Screen Features The preview screen provides several features that can help you in locating data. One method for locating a specific piece of information in the Velocity SQL database, is to mouse over the data in the Report Preview screen. The exact location of the information appears in a yellow pop-up like the following example:
Another method for ascertain information as well as copying information to another program, is right clicking on the data in the Report Preview screen. A list of options like this example appears:
Depending on which data you select one of these options appears:
Field: Indicates the field within the Velocity SQL database where this piece xxx of information resides.
Copy Select this option to copy this information to the Windows buffer from where you can paste it into any other program, such as Word.
200 Previewing a Report MAN007-0211
Freeze Select this option to create a page partition marker like this example: Pane
You can scroll information that exists below this point but not above it. This is useful as a way to page-mark information you think is important for closer scrutiny.
Unfreeze Select this option to remove an existing page markers. Pane
Previewing a Report 201 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Printing Reports
To print a report: 1. From the Report Tree pane, click to select the report you want to print. 2. Do one of these: • From the icon bar, click the print icon, . • From the menu bar, select File > Print. • From the keyboard, press Ctrl + P. The report is printed to the printer specified on the Velocity Preferences printers page. You can hide the Velocity logo and put the name of your company at the top of the page through the Report Manager Preferences page.
202 Printing Reports MAN007-0211 Access & Control Functions
Operators normally have the authority to perform many functions affecting security input and output devices. This chapter describes those functions and tells you how to do them. Functions are tasks Velocity can do to connected security devices. Velocity divides functions into five main categories: Access Functions
Momentarily Access Relocking a Door Unlocking a Door Extended Unlock Alarm Functions
Momentary Mask Mask Unmask Cancel Entry Delay Start Exit Timer Mask/Cancel Entry Delay Unmask/Start Exit Timer Pre-arm Status Conditional Unmask Partial Unmask Control Functions
Masking Doors Masking Inputs Triggering Doors and Relays Force On Doors Force On Relays Release a Door from a Force On State Release a Relay from a Force On State Force Off a Door Force Off a Relay Force Off Release for a Door Force Off Release for a Relay Lock Down a Door Lock Down a Relay Lock Down Release for a Door Lock Down Release for a Relay Lock Open for a Door Lock Open for a Relay
203 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Lock Open Release for a Door Lock Open Release for a Relay Password Functions
System Executive Supervisor Operators Service Special Functions
Alarm Cancel Watch Log Time Log Deadman Timer Indexed Commands Set Threat Level These functions are explained more thoroughly in the following sections.
Task See:
Access Functions page 206 Momentary Access to a Door (Grant Access) page 206
Unlock a Door page 207
Relock a Door page 207
Extended Access page 207
Alarm Functions page 208 Trigger a Door or Relay page 213
Momentarily Mask a Door page 210
Momentarily Mask an Input page 210
Mask a Door page 210
Mask an Input page 211
Unmask a Door page 211
Unmask an Input page 211
Control Functions page 212 Lock Open a Door page 214
Lock Open a Relay page 214
Lock Open Release a Door page 214
Lock Open Release a Relay page 215
204 MAN007-0211
Task See:
Lock Down a Relay page 215
Lock Down a Door page 216
Lock Down Release a Door page 216
Lock Down Release a Relay page 216
Force On a Door page 217
Force On a Relay page 217
Release a Door from a Force On State page 217
Release a Relay from a Force On State page 218
Force Off a Door page 218
Force Off a Relay page 218
Release a Door from a Force Off State page 219
Release a Relay from a Force Off State page 219
Password Functions page 220
Special Functions page 221
Indexed Commands page 224
205 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Access Functions
Access functions (also called Door functions) apply to only one component: the door. These functions include:
Function Description Comment Momentary Actuates the door timer Momentary and Trigger are the only two Access for a period of time functions that are timed: going on then specified by the door turning off according to a timer set to a timer. predefined interval. All other functions are either On or Off. This is the lowest priority level of relay actuation. For more on this, go to page 206.
Extended Unlock the door for an The interval during which the door is Access extended period of time. unlocked is designated by the Extended Access Timers in Door Properties. For more on this, go to page 207.
Unlock Actuates the relay and This affects only the door/relay at which leaves it on until it is it is issued. This is the next lowest level relocked. of relay actuation; only momentary is lower. For more on this, go to page 207.
Relock Relock a relay that has This is the necessary twin to unlock. It previously been must be used to negate the unlock unlocked. function and return the door to its normal resting state. This affects only the door/relay at which it is issued. For more on this, go to page 207.
Access Functions: Momentary Access Use this feature to mask an alarm and momentarily open (pop) the bundled door. The door will only remain open for a specified number of seconds before it automatically relocks. This feature is particularly useful when the operator needs to give a visitor or employee access to a door even if they don’t have valid card or code access. To momentarily access a door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics map window, right click the door icon representing the door you want to momentarily open. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Access > Momentary Access from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to open. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Access > Momentary Access from the option list.
206 Access Functions MAN007-0211
Access Functions: Unlock a Door Using this access function actuates the relay associated with this door and leaves it on until it is relocked. This affects only the bundled door at which it is issued. This is the next lowest level of relay actuation; only momentary is lower. To unlock doors: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Access > Unlock from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to unlock. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Access > Unlock from the option list. The door is unlocked. Access Functions: Relock a Door Relocking reverses the effect of unlocking and returns the specified bundled door to its normal (default) operation. To relock doors: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Access > Relock from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to relock. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Access > Relock from the option list. The door is relocked. Access Functions: Extended Access Extended Access—also called the Special Needs Extended Unlock (SNUX) or Extended Unlock—prolongs the interval when the door is unlocked. This is used for wheelchairs, deliverymen, or other requesters who generally take more time to enter or exit a door than an average individual. Before you can use Extended Access, you must: 1. Set the door in increments of minutes on the Door General Properties page. 2. Define a new credential. 3. From the Credential Properties Function tab, click Add to add a new function. 4. From the Define Function dialog box, specify Access at the Function Category field then pick Extended from the Function field. 5. On the Options tab, check the Special Needs Access Time Extension box. For instructions on using extended access, see “Examples: Extended Access” on page 944 in the Velocity Administrators Guide.
Access Functions 207 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Functions
Alarm functions describe a group of operations Velocity uses to control the behavior of specified alarms and the line modules associated with them. These functions include:
Momentary Momentary Mask momentarily turns off the reporting of all Mask alarms from any of the line module inputs for the specified door or input. The door will only remain masked for a specified number of seconds before it is automatically unmasked. The time allowed before alarms are unmasked is determined by the door inputs' Door Mode timer setting. Masking does not prevent the reporting of line trouble, such as shorts or open line conditions. For more on this, go to page 210.
Mask Mask turns off the reporting of all alarms from any of the line module inputs for the specified door or input. Masking does not prevent the reporting of line trouble, such as shorts or open line conditions. For more on this, go to page 210.
Unmask Unmask restores the alarm reporting from all inputs defined for the specified door or input. Assign Unmask to a door group with a time zone of 65 (Always) to prevent time restrictions on the unmasking of masked line module inputs. For more on this, go to page 211.
Cancel Entry Cancel Entry Timer is used to cancel the entry delay timer and Delay prevent the reporting of an alarm. Use an entry delay timer to control access to secure areas where the ScramblePad is located within the area. The setting for the entry delay timer is defined at the Entry Delay Time field on the Door Input Setup Property Sheet.
Start Exit Start Exit Timer enables personnel within a secure area to exit Timer that area without tripping an alarm. However, it stipulates that the unqualified exit from an area can only proceed for a limited time. The amount of time allowed is set at the Exit Delay Time field on the Door Input Setup Property Sheet.
Mask/Cancel This function cancels any entry delay value (as specified on the Entry Delay Door Input Setup Property Sheet) and masks all interior line modules for general building occupancy. It can also mask inputs for occupancy of a specific area while other areas remain unmasked.
208 Alarm Functions MAN007-0211
Unmask/Start This function combines the start exit timer function with the Exit Timer unmask function and is often used to re-secure either an entire building or a specified area. The start exit timer is set by the Exit Delay Time field on the Door Input Setup Property Sheet
Pre-arm Pre-Arm Status, also known as ‘Test If Secure’ or ‘Check Secure,’ Status tests all available inputs within the specified door group and reports whether they are inactive (secure) or active (unsecured). If all inputs are secure, the ScramblePad where this inquiry is made flashes its green LED once for an access grant and twice for a control. If there are unsecured inputs detected, the ScramblePad flashes its red LED and beeps—one flash for each active input. This function is associated with a credential normally assigned to an operator or guard who enters the credential at a reader or ScramblePad in order to enquire about the status of the area controlled by the device.
Conditional Also known as ‘Unmask If Secure,’ this function unmasks/arms Unmask all inputs in the specified door group, but only if all inputs have been previously detected as secure.
Partial Also known as ‘Force Arm’ or ‘Arm Around,’ this function Unmask unmasks all inputs in the specified door group that were previously detected as secure. All unsecured inputs are left unarmed. Normally, of course, a system can only be unmasked if every input within the prescribed area is currently secure. Otherwise, any attempt to unmask the area would result in an alarm if one or more of the inputs within the area is currently unsecured. The Partial Unmask condition enables the Velocity to 'ignore' an unsecured input and mask all the currently secured inputs it detects within the area. For example, if the boss leaves the safe in his office open, this condition unmasks whatever inputs are already secure in the vicinity of the safe, such as the door leading into the office and a motion detector above the safe. In this way, even if the safe is not closed, the office door can be unmasked and will notify the system if anyone attempts to enter the office or approach the safe without permission. When this condition is used, the ScramblePad where this credential is presented flashes: • green LED if all inputs are detected secure • red and green LEDs if some inputs are secure and others are not
Alarm functions are configured using the function pages of either credential dialog box or the credential template dialog box.
Alarm Functions 209 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Alarm Functions: Momentary Door Masking This function masks a bundled door for a specified number of seconds before rearming (unmasking) it. To momentarily mask doors: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Control > Momentary Mask from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled Door you want to mask momentarily. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Control > Momentary Mask from the option list. Alarm Functions: Momentary Input Masking This function masks a point for a specified number of seconds before rearming (unmasking) it. To momentarily mask an input point: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Momentary Mask from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the input file you want to mask momentarily. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Momentary Mask from the option list. Alarm Functions: Masking Doors Masking input points on a bundled door suppresses the reporting of any alarm points associated with the door. This is useful when the operator needs to turn off or ignore an alarm point, such as during building repair or for unalarmed entrance to an area that is normally alarmed. The opposite command is unmasking doors. To mask a door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Control > Mask from the option list. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled Door you want to mask. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Control > Mask from the option list.
210 Alarm Functions MAN007-0211
Alarm Functions: Masking Inputs Masking a set of points suppresses the reporting of an alarm point. This is useful when the operator needs to turn off or ignore an alarm point, such as during building repair or for unalarmed entrance to an area that is normally alarmed. The opposite command is unmasking inputs. To mask an input: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Mask from the option list. System Tree 1. Right click the input you want to mask. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Mask from the option list. Alarm Functions: Unmasking Doors Unmasking (arming) a bundled door enables Velocity to report conditions that may occur at the door. The opposite is masking a door. To unmask doors: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the Door icon of the door you want to unmask. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Control > Unmask from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to unmask. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Access > Unmask from the option list. The door remains unmasked until you mask it again. Alarm Functions: Unmasking Inputs Unmasking an input enables Velocity to report conditions that may occur at the alarm point. If a point has corresponding output points then unmasking the alarm point will automatically enable or disable the output points. The opposite is Masking an input. To unmask an input: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Input icon. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Function > Unmask from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the input file you want to unmask. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Function > Unmask from the option list. The input remains unmasked until you mask it again.
Alarm Functions 211 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Control Functions
Control functions (also referred to as Output or Relay functions) affect the working of devices such as doors and door locks not associated with doors, as well as elevator relays and all other devices that can be turned on or off. In Velocity there are a large number of control functions:
Function Description Comment
Trigger Actuates the control timer for Trigger is a timed control every output specified by the function, like the Momentary control zone. Once the timer access function: going on then times out, the relays/outputs are turning off according to a control returned to their default resting timer set to a predefined interval. states. All other functions are either On or Off. A trigger can also be used to trigger multiple actions in a Master Control Zone. For more on this, go to page 213.
Force ON Every relay/output in the control This function can affect both zone is actuated. The relay onboard and expansion relays. continues to be actuated until For more on this, go to page released. 217.
Force ON Returns all relays that were This function can affect both Release actuated by the Force ON onboard and expansion relays. condition to their default resting For more on this, go to page state. 217.
Force OFF Disables all relays associated This control is particularly useful with this control zone. for x-ray rooms or laboratories where no access is granted during an examination or experiment. For more on this, go to page 218.
Force OFF Returns all relays that were For more on this, go to page Release forced off by the Force OFF 219. control to their default resting state.
Lock Disables all relays/outputs This is particularly useful for Down associated with this control zone. those facilities where absolutely no one is allowed within an area for a specified time. For more on this, go to page 215.
212 Control Functions MAN007-0211
Function Description Comment
Lock This undoes the Lock Down For more on this, go to page Down command and returns all 216. Release relay/outputs associated with this control zone to the next highest condition currently in effect.
Lock Actuates all relays associated For more on this, go to page Open with this control zone. 214.
Lock This undoes the Lock Open For more on this, go to page Open condition and returns all 214. Release relays/outputs associated with this control zone to the next highest condition currently in effect. Control Functions: Triggering Doors and Relays Use this function to actuate a door relay or general-purpose relay for a specified period of time. Triggering is a timed function: going on then turning off according to a timer set to a pre-defined interval.
For door triggering, the timer is set using the 'Door Mode Timer' field on the Relay Setup page of the Door Properties. For relay triggering, the timer is set using the 'Control Mode Time' field on the General page of the Relay Properties dialog box. This also applies to expansion relays. To trigger a relay or door momentarily: Graphics Map If this is a door: 1. From the Graphics map window, right click the door icon representing the door you want to momentarily trigger. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Trigger from the pop-up menu. If this is a relay: 1. From the Graphics map window, right click the relay icon representing the relay you want to trigger momentarily. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Trigger from the pop-up menu. System Tree To trigger a door: 1. Right click the bundled door you want to trigger. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Trigger from the option list. To momentarily actuate a relay: 1. Right click the relay folder you want to trigger. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Trigger from the option list.
Control Functions 213 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Control Functions: Lock Open for a Door Locking open a specified door actuates the selected relays/outputs associated with this bundled door. This is particularly useful for facilities where everyone is allowed to enter or exit an area for a specified time, such as during an emergency. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. The door continues to be actuated until released by the Lock Open Release function. To lock open a bundled door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Open from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to lock open. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Open from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Open for a Relay Locking open a relay (output) actuates the selected relay/output. This is particularly useful for facilities where everyone is allowed to enter or exit an area for a specified time, such as during an emergency. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. The relay continues to be actuated until released by the Lock Open Release function. To lock open a relay: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the Relay icon on the graphics map you want to lock open. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Open from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to lock open. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Open from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Door Lock Open Release reverses the Lock Open command and returns the selected relays/outputs associated with this bundled door to the next highest condition currently in effect.
214 Control Functions MAN007-0211
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. To release a bundled door from the lock open state: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Open Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to release from the lock open state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Open Release from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Open Release for a Relay Lock Open Release reverses the Lock Open command and returns the selected relay/output to the next highest condition currently in effect. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. To release a relay from the lock open state: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Open Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to release from the lock open state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Open Release from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Down a Relay Locking down a relay disables the selected relay/output. This is particularly useful for those facilities where absolutely no one is allowed within an area for a specified time. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. The relay continues to be disabled until released by the Lock Down Release function. To lock down a relay: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Down from the pop-up menu.
Control Functions 215 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to lock down. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Down from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Down a Door Locking down a bundled door disables the selected relays (outputs) associated with that door. This is particularly useful for those facilities where absolutely no one is allowed within an area for a specified time. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. The door continues to be disabled until released by the Lock Down Release function. To lock down a bundled door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Down from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to lock down. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Down from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Door Lock Down Release reverses the Lock Down command and returns the relays/outputs associated with this bundled door to the next highest condition currently in effect. The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. To release a bundled door from the lock down state: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Down Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to release from the lock down state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Lock Down Release from the option list. Control Functions: Lock Down Release for a Relay Lock Down Release reverses the Lock Down command and returns the selected relay/output to the next highest condition currently in effect.
216 Control Functions MAN007-0211
The Lock functions—Lock Down, Lock Down Release, Lock Open, Lock Open Release—have the highest priority and will override the lower-priority Trigger and Force control codes as well as the lowest-priority Momentary, Unlock, and Relock access codes. To release a relay from the lock down state: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Down Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to release from the lock down state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Lock Down Release from the option list. Control Functions: Force On Doors Forcing on a bundled door actuates the relays associated with that door. The relay(s) continue to be actuated until released by the Force On Release function. To force on a bundled door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force On from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to force on. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force On from the option list. Control Functions: Force On Relays Forcing on an output actuates a specified relay. The relay continues to be actuated until released by the Force On Release function. To force on an output: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Force On from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to force on. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Force On from the option list. Control Functions: Force On Release for a Door Force on release returns the bundled door that was actuated by the Force On condition to its default resting state. To release a force on condition for a bundled door:
Control Functions 217 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force On Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to release from the force on state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force On Release from the option list. Control Functions: Force On Release for a Relay Force on release returns all relays that were actuated by the Force On condition to their default resting state. To release a force on condition on an output: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Output icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Force On Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to release from the force on state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Force On Release from the option list. Control Functions: Force Off a Door Forcing off a bundled door disables the relays associated with the door. This control is particularly useful for x-ray rooms or laboratories where no access is granted during an examination or experiment. The door continues to be de-actuated until released by the Force Off Release function. To force off a bundled door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force Off from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to force off. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force Off from the option list. Control Functions: Force Off a Relay Forcing off an relay (output) disables the selected relay. This control is particularly useful for x-ray rooms or laboratories where no access is granted during an examination or experiment. The relay continues to be de-actuated until released by the Force Off Release function. To force off a relay:
218 Control Functions MAN007-0211
Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Force Off from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the relay you want to force off. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Force Off from the option list. Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Door Force off release returns all relays associated with a specific bundled door that was forced off by the Force Off control to their default resting states. To release a force off condition on a bundled door: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Door icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force Off Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the bundled door you want to release from the force off state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Control > Force Off Release from the option list. Control Functions: Force Off Release for a Relay Force off release returns all relays that were forced off by the Force Off control to their default resting state. To release a force off condition on a relay: Graphics Map 1. From the Graphics Map, right click the appropriate Relay icon on the graphics map. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Functions > Force Off Release from the pop-up menu. System Tree 1. Right click the output you want to release from the force off state. A pop-up option list appears. 2. Select Functions > Force Off Release from the option list.
Control Functions 219 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Password Functions
Password functions control ScramblePad access to programming mode. Passwords provide five levels of programming command restriction. Starting from Level 5 and going down to Level 1, each password level provides increasing types of DIGI*TRAC commands as specified by the person's credential. Since access to programming and password manipulation is an operator activity, the credentials that control this function are usually assigned only to operator's who must use specific DIGI*TRAC commands at specific keypads.
Hint Password Level functions are almost never used in Velocity since they involve programming at the keypad, a procedure which Velocity is designed to circumvent. For the most part, you can safely ignore these functions.
Any number of persons can be assigned to any password level. Each authorized person is logged onto the system when programming mode is entered. Only one operator can be logged on at a time. The five password levels are:
Priority Password Level Restrictions
1 System Password All Commands
2 Executive Password All Commands Except Passwords
3 Supervisor Password All Commands Except Setups
4 Operator Password All Except Setups & Add or Print Users With Codes
5 Service Password All Setups & Print Status, No User Commands
The Password function is selected through the 'Function Category' combo box on the Credential Function page. The 'Function' combo box on the same page selects the priority level this credential supports.
220 Password Functions MAN007-0211
Special Functions
Special functions enable Velocity to provide sophisticated control of such features as alarm cancel, the watch and time logs, the deadman timer, threat levels, and indexed commands. These include:
Special Description Comments Functions
Alarm Cancel all alarms within the specified This function must be Cancel zone. When you select this function, selected in order to use the 'Door Group' combo box appears. the DIGI*TRAC Select the door group to which this Annunciator. function applies.
Watch Log Logs code entry for tracking guards on This doesn’t grant access, their appointed rounds. When you only records the guard’s select this function, the 'Door Group' progress. combo box appears. Select the door group to which this function applies.
Time Log Logs code entry for recording the This doesn’t grant arrival and departure times of time log access; it only records code holders. When you select this arrival and departure for function, the 'Door Group' combo box time card purposes. appears. Select the door group to which this function applies.
Special Functions 221 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Special Description Comments Functions
Deadman Starts a deadman timer at code/card This condition allows the Timer entry. If the timer expires before the system to track the safety employee’s next code/card entry, an and security of a user alarm is recorded. while a specific task is When you select this function, three being performed. combo boxes appear: Controller, Deadman timers are Control Zone, and Time as shown common in many here: industrial applications such as railroads, refineries, and other dangerous or hazardous locations. In order to define the timer, you must have two user codes: one to start the timer the other to stop the timer. 1. In the 'Controller' combo box, select the controller to which this timer applies. 2. In the 'Control Zone' combo box, either select an existing control zone or create a new control zone
222 Special Functions MAN007-0211
Special Description Comments Functions
Indexed Specifies several subfunctions. Combo If you select one of the Command box fields and windows appear like Manual Holidays, this this example: forces the location where this credential was used to accept a holiday immediately. If you select one of the Unholidays, this forces a location where this credential was used to deselect a prevailing holiday. Select the subfunction you need. If you select Forgive All These options include: Users, conditions for all • Manual Holidays 1 - 4 users within a specific • Unholidays 1 - 4 area (defined by the location where this •Forgive All Users credential was used) are • Clear Code Tamper suspended, enabling • Count Users This Side rapid entry or exit. • Count Users Other Side If you select Clear Code Tamper, this cancels all For more on this, refer to the code tamper alarms subsections starting on page 224. registered within an area defined by the location where this credential was used. If you select Count Users This Side or Count Users Other Side, this causes Velocity to count the number of users currently inside/outside the area defined by the reader/keypad where this credential was used.
Special Functions 223 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Special Description Comments Functions
Set Threat Sets a security (threat) level at the The range of available Level reader/keypad where this credential threat levels are 0 (no was used. Combo Box fields and threat/all threat alarms windows appear like this example: cancelled) to 99 (greatest threat).
When you select this function, the 'Set Threat Level' field appears. Choose the threat level required. Select the controllers where this threat level applies. Use the << button to move a highlighted controller from the All Controllers window to the Selected Controller window. Indexed Command: Clear Code Tamper Use this subcommand to clear all code tamper conditions at specific sites. To invoke a clear code tamper: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Clear Code Tamper. 7. From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose readers/keypads can accept this command. 8. Click the button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers' window to the 'Selected Controller' window. 9. Click OK. Indexed Command: Count Users Other Side Use this subcommand to count all users currently outside a specific site as defined by the reader/keypad where this credential is used.
224 Special Functions MAN007-0211
This command enables a guard to use a special code or card to display on the ScramblePad display the current count of users on the other side of the area defined by the reader. Before you can use this feature, you must first have had the Velocity administrator configure the specific reader for both ‘Allow User count display’ and ‘Accept control codes options’ under the ScramblePad Options tab as well as define the Passback Zone this reader accesses under the Logic tab and enable passback on the Passback tab for the controller connected to this reader. To use this command: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Count Users Other Side. 7. From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers where this feature can apply. 8. Use the button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers' window to the 'Selected Controller' window. 9. Click OK. Indexed Command: Count Users This Side Use this subcommand to count and display on the ScramblePad reader display all users currently inside a specific area as defined by the reader/keypad where this credential is used. This command enables a guard to use a special code or card to display on the ScramblePad display the current count of users on this side of the area defined by the reader. Before you can use this feature, you must first have had the Velocity administrator configure the specific reader for both ‘Allow User count display’ and ‘Accept control codes options’ under the ScramblePad Options tab as well as define the Passback Zone this reader accesses under the Logic tab and enable passback on the Passback tab for the controller connected to this reader. To use this command: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Count Users This Side.
Special Functions 225 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
7. At the 'New Controllers' window, select one or more controllers where this feature can apply. 8. Use the button to move a highlighted controller from the All Controllers window to the Selected Controller window. 9. Click OK. Indexed Command: Forgive All Users Use this subcommand to forgive all conditions for users at specific readers/keypads. To invoke the Forgive All Users command: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select Forgive All Users. 7. From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose readers/keypads can accept this command. 8. Click the button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers' window to the 'Selected Controller' window. 9. Click OK. Indexed Command: Manual Holiday Tables Use this subcommand to force a holiday schedule (table) at a specific site. To use this command: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select the Manual Holiday Table being forced. There are four holidays available; however, a holiday is only relevant if it has already been defined. 7. From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose readers/keypads can accept this command. 8. Use the button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers' window to the 'Selected Controller' window. 9. Click OK.
226 Special Functions MAN007-0211
Indexed Command: Manual Unholiday Tables Use this subcommand to deselect a prevailing holiday schedule (table) at a specific site. There are four Manual Unholiday Tables to choose from. To use this command: 1. Create or choose a credential or credential template. 2. Click the Function tab. 3. Click the Add... button. The Define Function screen appears. 4. At the 'Function Category' combo box, select Special. 5. At the 'Function' combo box, select Indexed Commands. The 'Indexed Command' combo box appears together with the 'Selected Controllers' and 'All Controllers' windows. 6. At the 'Indexed Command' combo box, select the holiday table you need to deselect. There are four holiday schedules available for deselection. 7. From the 'All Controllers' window, select one or more controllers whose readers/keypads can accept this command. 8. Use the button to move a highlighted controller from the 'All Controllers' window to the 'Selected Controller' window. 9. Click OK. Function Priority Levels Functions involve increasing levels of priority and are illustrated below:
Time Zone functions appear at this priority level. For more on this, refer to “Time Zone Control of Relays” on page
Special Functions 227 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
As shown above, control functions always override Access functions, represented by the Momentary Unlock, Unlock, Relock and Extended Lock functions. Since access functions involve opening or closing a single door at the keypad/reader, this level of function can be defined based on a single door or a door group. Higher levels of control divide themselves into those control functions which are considered mid-level and those that are considered high-level. Mid-level control function—such as triggering or forcing relays—require you to define control zones since they can involve more than a single relay at the current keypad/door. These higher-level functions enable the user to control a large number of relays and other outputs from a local keypad or card reader. While Force and Lock functions are similar, Lock functions are placed at a higher priority than Force functions and will override Force commands. This means that you can construct sophisticated scenarios in which relays are locked open or down even while they are currently forced on or off. In this way, layers of authority can control relays, providing overrides and default conditions in the event of emergencies or failures. In this control stack, each time a high-priority function is withdrawn it can expose an underlying function still in effect. For example, all relays in a control zone are forced on until the administrator enters a Lock Down, which immediately disables all the relays; once the administrator has left the area, the Lock Down is released and the relays are returned to a Force On condition. The guard can then open and go through the door. Once the Force On condition is released by a mid-level guard supervisor, a single door within the controlled area can be entered by a qualified guard, who could not have opened the door during the Lock Down. Lock functions can also override time zones. For example, all relays in a control zone are forced on until the administrator enters a Lock Down, which immediately disables all the relays; once the administrator has left the area, the Lock Down is released and the relays are returned to a Force On condition. The guard can then open and go through the door. Once the Force On condition is released by a mid-level guard supervisor, a single door within the controlled area can be entered by a qualified guard, who could not have opened the door during the Lock Down. Lock functions can also override time zones. Time Zone Control of Relays People often think of time zone functions as control functions. In the preceding chart, Time Zone functions would go above Force functions but below Lock functions. When time zones control relays, they are generally defined as being in one of three states:
Relay State Description
Actuate Relays are actuated during a time zone, going on at the start time of the zone and off at the end time of the zone.
Disable Relays are disabled during a time zone, becoming disabled at the start of the zone and ending the disable condition at the end of the time zone. During the time a relay is disabled, all access and mid-level control functions, including RQE, are disabled.
228 Special Functions MAN007-0211
Relay State Description
Clear Clears the current relay states for access and mid-level control functions at the end of a given time zone. The clear relay state does not affect relays controlled by a code of higher priority than a time zone, such as Lock Down and Lock Open. This automatically reverses a code- or card-activated relay from either access and mid-level control without manually resetting the relay. This feature is most generally used in combination with a manual Unlock by code or card to ensure an automatic Relock by time zone.
Special Functions 229 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
230 Special Functions MAN007-0211 CCTV Viewer
This chapter describes how to use Velocity 3.1 CCTV Viewer. As an operator, you can use the built-in Velocity CCTV Viewer to perform any function of which the camera is capable. This can include:
Pan Tilt Zoom Focus Brighten/Darken The CCTV feature is also capable of memorizing and using presets as well as switch between cameras. The CCTV Viewer is only available if this system possesses a CCTV subsystem and an administrator has configured Velocity for CCTV.
231 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
CCTV Viewer
The CCTV Viewer is accessed through either of these procedures:
From a Graphics map, right click the appropriate camera icon and select View... from the pop-up option list. From System Tree window, right click on the appropriate camera icon and select View... from the pop-up option list. The CCTV Viewer like the following example appears:
The first image you view after bringing up Velocity may be slightly distorted. Click to another image then click back and the problem is resolved. Use this screen to control the movement and actions of the camera. This viewer contains the following controls:
From the Menu Bar:
File Two choices are available: Open Picture...—click this option and the Open dialog box appears. Select from the available snapshots (captured using the Grab option) to display in the screen. This is a good way to review footage. Close Picture—click this option to close the Viewer.
Command
Presets Select from one of two options: • Go to Preset...—The Go to Preset dialog box appears. Select the preset number you need from the drop-down combo box list or enter a new number in the text field and press OK. This selects a pre-defined camera and position from the available preset options. The preset is determined by the Preset property sheet on the Camera Properties page. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. • Set as Preset...—The Set as Preset dialog box appears. Select a preset number from the drop-down combo box list or enter a new number in the text field and press OK. This sets the current camera and position based as a preset number. The preset is determined by the Preset property sheet on the Camera Properties page. For more on this, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide.
232 CCTV Viewer MAN007-0211
Tour Initiate a series of shots that take you to every camera in the system. The shots are preset by the switcher. Select from one of two options: • Start Tour...—The Start Tour dialog box appears. Enter the tour number in the text field and press Enter. The switcher begins sending video based on the pre-defined tour. Only switchers that support tours can be activated by this option. • End Tour Mode—End the tour.
Call Camera Selecting this menu item displays the Call Camera to Monitor to Monitor... dialog like this:
Enter the camera and monitor numbers in their respective fields, then click OK. The specified camera output is displayed on the selected monitor number. If you map the monitor to the Viewer, is the same as if you selected the 'Select Camera…' field. The Viewer displays the new camera in the current monitor.
Grab Select to take a snapshot of the currently displayed view. This snapshot is stored as a JPG file in a designated specified file. The default folder is \Photos. You can then review the picture using File > Open Picture.
View Select this option to change the size of the Viewer. There are three options: • Small—3" x 3.75" (the default size) • Medium—4.25" x 5.5" • Large—5.5" x 7.5" This menu option also includes the toggle option Status. When selected, the status bar appears at the bottom of the CCTV Viewer. The default is selected.
CCTV Viewer 233 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
From the Tool Bar: (these functions are dependent on the capabilities of the switcher)
Pan-Tilt: Click this button to pan or tilt.
Zoom: Click this button to zoom in or out.
Focus: Click this button to focus on the currently displayed image.
Iris: Click this button to iris the image.
Auto Pan: Click this button to initiate an automatic pan of the area within the selected camera's view.
CCTV Camera Configuration: Click this button to display the CCTV Camera Configuration dialog box.
Lock the Viewer so that no one can access another picture untell the operator has unlocked it. The default is unlocked. Click to toggle locked/unlocked. This feature is only functional when enabled on the CCTV Preferences page.
From the Keyboard:
Insert Focus in.
Delete Focus out.
Home Zoom in.
End Zoom out.
234 CCTV Viewer MAN007-0211
CCTV Viewer Functions
Use the CCTV Viewer to perform the following functions. Only one of the following functions can be active at a time. Also, these functions only work if the camera and attached switcher support the function. For example, if you are trying to pan/tilt a fixed camera, the command is ignored and an error message appears. The Zoom and Focus functions also support keyboard shortcuts, as noted. Pan-Tilt 1. Click the Pan/Tilt icon on the Viewer tool bar, . 2. Left click on the image in the CCTV Viewer. 3. Drag the mouse in any vertical, horizontal, or diagonal direction. The farther you drag, the faster the Pan-Tilt happens. 4. Let go to stop. This works even if dragged outside the viewer.
Zoom Mode 1. Click the Zoom icon on the Viewer tool bar, . 2. Perform one of the following: • Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to zoom in. • Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to zoom out.
Hint Keyboard Shortcuts: Press the Home key to Zoom In Press the End key to Zoom Out.
Focus Mode 1. Click the Focus icon on the Viewer tool bar, . 2. Perform one of the following: • Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to focus near. • Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to focus far.
Hint Keyboard Shortcuts: Press the Insert key to Focus In Press the Delete key to Focus Out.
Iris Mode 1. Click the Iris icon on the Viewer tool bar, . 2. Perform one of the following: • Left click and hold on the image in the Viewer to open up the iris • Right click and hold on the image in the Viewer to close down iris. Auto Pan Click the Toggle Auto Pan button, , on the Viewer tool bar.
CCTV Viewer Functions 235 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this button once and the selected camera begins to pan automatically. Click the button again and the camera stops panning. The automatic pan characteristics for a specified camera are determined by the switcher and the camera.
236 CCTV Viewer Functions MAN007-0211 DVR/NVR Operation
As more companies migrate to digital video cameras for their surveillance, they are replacing traditional forms of data capture, particularly VCRs using analog video tape, with DVRs (digital video recorders) or NVRs (network video recorders) that store images on hard disks. For the security professional, DVRs/NVRs offer the advantages of:
Simultaneous video capture from one or more cameras at a central location Video storage in a space-saving, easily transferable file formats Longer storage life for videos Instant review and indexing of captured video Easier editing of captured video Perfect duplication of video for distribution or legal presentation Network accessibility So, for example, a guard can review a suspicious incident by keying in the exact time and date without having to review hours of tape. A felonious act caught on video can then be sent instantaneously via internet to the proper authorities. Since the video is digital, copying it does not degrade the image. Because all DVRs/NVRs also incorporate Ethernet connections, video is easily transferable across LANs or the internet. This means, for example, that an operator in New York or Los Angeles can almost instantly access and review video from a DVR/NVR located in Paris or Dhakar. Velocity now incorporates several interfaces for using DVRs/NVRs including Live Video and Video Explorer. These interfaces enable qualified operators to view, review, edit, duplicate, and export video stored by one or more DVRs/NVRs. DVRs currently supported are American Dynamics, Pelco, Bosch, and Integral. NVR currently supported is American Dynamics VideoEdge. In addition, Mate pattern recognition software, Behavior Watch, is supported on American Dynamics DVRs. Many other types of DVRs/NVRs (including the Axis DVR) can complement Velocity surveillance, but they all use their own interfaces and programs. The Velocity DVR/NVR suite also includes two management tools that help you search out video events:
All Video Events (see page 265) Event History Viewer (see page 268)
237 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Operating the DVR
Velocity operators can use a networked DVR/NVR to perform many tasks, either through the DVR/NVR or through one of the cameras attached to the DVR. Both of these approaches are discussed below. Addressing the DVR/NVR and Attached Cameras Using this technique, you can operate any of the cameras attached to the DVR. To operate your DVR: 1. From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the DVR/NVR folder appears. 2. Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs. 3. Right click on the DVR/NVR you want to operate. Available functions appear in the pop-up list. 4. Select from these available options:
View Cameras Connect to the selected DVR/NVR and monitor a live feed from all cameras presently connected to this DVR.
Generate/Stop Generate or stop an alarm from Velocity to DVR/NVR Host Alarm unit.
Get Alarm List Get the recorded alarm list from the American Dynamics From DVR DVR/NVR unit. Note: This option only applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs. Integral DVRs do not store video on your local hard drive. For a similar Integral feature, refer to the Get Motion Events List.
Search & Search for and retrieve recorded video from the Retrieve designated DVR/NVR to your local hard drive for later Recorded Video play, analysis, and formatting. Normally, you retrieve one or more video segments from the DVR/NVR then play the video (Play Local Video). Note: This option only applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs. Integral DVRs do not store video on your local hard drive. For more on this, refer to “Search & Retrieve Recorded Video” on page 245.
Play Local Video Play back video recorded on this computer and export it, if required, in a number of formats. Note: This only applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs. For a similar though not identical Integral feature, refer to Get Motion Events List. For more on this, refer to “Play & Export Local Video” on page 246.
238 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Get Motion Get the recorded motion events list from the Integral Events List DVR/NVR unit. Note: This option only applies to Integral DVRs. For more on this, refer to “Get Motion Events List” on page 256.
Time Synchronize DVR/NVR unit time clock with Velocity. For Synchronization more on this, refer to “Time Synchronization” on page 258.
Diagnostics These are programmer functions and should not be used by operators.
Delete Remove this DVR/NVR from the Velocity. Select this option and a message appears. Click OK and the selected DVR/NVR is deleted.
Rename Rename this DVR. Select this option and the DVR/NVR name is highlighted with a cursor at the first position. Enter a new name.
Properties Display and/or set up the properties of the currently-selected DVR. Addressing a DVR/NVR Camera Directly You can address only one of the DVR-attached cameras and operate that specific camera. To operate a specific DVR-attached camera: 1. From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the DVR/NVR folder appears. 2. Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs. 3. Click to highlight the DVR/NVR connected to the camera you want to operate. All currently attached cameras appear in the Components pane. 4. In the Components pane, right click on the camera you want to operate. Available options appear in the pop-up list. Select from these available options:
View Camera Connect to the selected camera and monitor a live feed from it.
Generate/Stop Generate or stop an alarm from Velocity host to this Host Alarm camera. For more on this, refer to page 252.
Camera Control Control the currently-selected camera. For more on this, refer to “Camera Control” on page 260. Note: This applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only.
Get Alarm List Get the recorded alarm list from the selected camera. For From DVR more on this, refer to “Get Alarm List” on page 253.
Operating the DVR 239 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Properties Display and/or set up the properties of the currently-selected camera. Viewing DVR/NVR Video From Attached Cameras There are several different ways to view video from cameras connected to a DVR/NVR through Velocity. You can review live video feed using these techniques:
DVR/NVR cameras (American Dynamics only) Live View (American Dynamics only) Video Explorer (any supported DVR) Recorded video can be reviewed by retrieving the video from the DVR/NVR and playing it. Viewing Camera Video You can view live feeds from one of the cameras connected to an existing DVR/NVR using the View Camera option. To view video from a specified camera: 1. From the system tree pane, expand Interfaces Configuration until DVR/NVR folder is expanded. 2. Click to highlight the DVR/NVR whose camera you want to view. All the available cameras appear in the Components pane. 3. In the Components pane, right click the camera you want to view. A pop-up list appears. 4. Select View Camera. A Live Video screen appears displaying the live video feed from the specified camera. 5. Use this screen as required. 6. When you're finished, click either or Velocity Administration to return to the main Velocity menu. Live View When you use Live View, it enables you to access and view all of the live feeds currently coming to a specific DVR/NVR from its attached cameras. In order to see camera video coming from multiple DVRs/NVRs, you must use the Video Explorer. To access Live View: 1. Expand the DVR/NVR folder in the System Tree to reveal the DVR/NVR you want to view. 2. Right click the required DVR. A pop-up list appears. 3. Select View Cameras. The Live Video window pops up.
240 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
4. Click any pane on the screen to enlarge that video to full screen like this example:
You can also access this screen as a right click option from a specific camera. For more on this, refer to “Viewing Camera Video” on page 240. If you select a camera that has PTZ capabilities, the Dome icon, , or Camera Control console automatically appears. 5. Manipulate this screen as described in Live View Screen. If this camera has PTZ capabilities, use the Camera Control console to move the camera as required. 6. To return to the Velocity Administration window, click the Velocity Administration button. 7. When you're finished, click to close the window. You are returned to the main Administration screen. You can also access Live View from an individual camera. For more on this, refer to “Viewing Camera Video” on page 240. Live Video Screen The Live Video screen supports live video feed for a single camera or multiple cameras. It looks like this American Dynamics Home example:
Operating the DVR 241 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
This screen includes these options:
Menu Tool Bar This tool bar includes these options: File — Close option. Console — Includes these options: • Administration - Return to the Velocity Administration window. This can also be accomplished by clicking the Velocity Administration button. • Generate / Stop Host Alarm - This displays two suboptions: Generate Host Alarm — generate a host alarm at this camera. The Velocity host registers this alarm. Override/Stop Host Alarm — stops a host alarm generated by the specified camera. • Get Alarm List from DVR/NVR - Generates a list of alarms generated by the currently selected camera. • Search & Retrieve Recorded Video - Enables a qualified operator to find and retrieve video recorded by the DVR/NVR for the selected camera. • Play Local Video - Play video retrieved from the specified camera. • Camera Control - Display the camera PTZ camera control console. • Properties - Display the DVR/NVR properties sheet (see the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide). Settings — Includes the Display Size suboptions: small, medium, large. Help — Includes Help Topics and Version which provides the DVR/NVR version number.
Magnifier/ Click the minus button to decrease the size of the video Demagnifier displayed in the currently selected frame. Click the plus button to magnify the video displayed in the currently selected frame.
Camera\View If you selected View Cameras from the DVR, all currently Selector active cameras are represented by active buttons. Click an active button to display an active view. You can also drag a camera button from the button to the screen.
Velocity Click this button to return to the main Velocity Administration Administration module view.
242 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Select Pane This area includes four options: Selector • One camera frame, • Four camera frames, •Nine camera frames, • Sixteen camera frames, Once the frames are available you can drag and drop camera views into these frames as required.
Camera Sequence Click the Sequence button to display each camera in turn on Selector the screen. The 'Delay (Seconds)' text box designates the delay time between camera switches.
Camera Name These overlays are determined by the DVR/NVR fields programming and can be either hidden or displayed according to the DVR/NVR administrator's preferences.
This icon appears only if the designated camera is equipped for Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) use. Click this icon and the PTZ controls appear. For more on this, refer to PTZ Camera Controls. Video Explorer Video Explorer provides a quick view of up to sixteen preset cameras on one screen. These cameras can be a mix of cameras from one or more DVR/NVR units. The Video Explorer cannot display CCTV camera views. To display digital CCTV camera views, use the camera frame placement in the Graphics. To open and use Video Explorer:
From the icon tool bar, click the Video Explorer icon, . From the menu tool bar, select Console > Video Explorer. The Video Explorer appears like the following example:
Icon Toolbar Video Group Selector
Menu Toolbar
Camera View Selector
System Tree pane
Operating the DVR 243 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The sections of this screen are explained below:
Menu Tool Bar This tool bar includes two options, File and Help. The File option includes several suboptions: New... — Select this option to create a new view group. This can also be achieved by clicking the icon in the icon tool bar. Save — Save the current view group configuration. This can also be achieved by clicking the icon in the icon tool bar. Save As — Save the current view group configuration as another name. Exit — Exit Video Explorer and return to the main Velocity screen.
Camera Views Specifies the number of frames displayed in the main Selector window. This area includes four options:
Once the frames are available you can drag and drop camera views as required.
Icon Tool Bar Note: Provides four functions including: — Create a new blank screen. — Save the currently displayed screen. — Delete the currently displayed view from the screen. — Bring up the Search Recorded Video screen for the currently selected video frame.
View Groups After a view group has been saved, select an existing Selector view group from the combo box. For information on creating and modifying view groups, refer to View Groups starting on page 259.
System Tree pane This pane displays a system tree view of attached DVRs/NVRs and cameras. Drag camera objects from this pane into the view window and drop them in the required frame.
244 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Search & Retrieve Recorded Video Before you can review video stored on the DVR, you should retrieve it and copy it to your local hard disk. Because the DVR/NVR saves all video in a digital format, duplication to your local hard drive does not affect the quality of the video. These instructions apply to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only. Integral DVRs do not store video on your local hard drive. To retrieve recorded video: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose video you want to retrieve. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Search & Retrieve Recorded Video. The Search Recorded Video screen appears like this example:
3. Indicate the beginning and end time for your search in the 'Start Time:' and 'End Time:' fields. Click the button to the right of the date field to display a calendar from which you can select the starting and ending dates for this search. Click the spin buttons to the right of the time fields to specify the exact starting and ending time. You can also enter the dates and times with your keyboard, if you prefer. 4. Check the camera(s) from which you want to retrieve video. Click the All button to check all the camera boxes. Check the None button to remove check marks from the boxes. 5. Click the Get Video button. The program removes the required video segments from the camera files stored on the DVR. Those video segments are then copied to your local hard disk. A list of all video segments copied to your hard disk appear in the lower left pane. As the editing and duplication process continues, the status of it appears on the status line at the bottom of the screen.
Operating the DVR 245 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Once all selected video is copied to your hard drive, the message 'All Video Downloaded' appears on the screen. All segments transferred are displayed in the lower left pane like this example:
6. If needed, you can review a segment in this way: a. From the lower left pane, click to highlight the segment you want to review. The first frame of the segment appears in the lower right pane. b. Double click the segment you want to review in full and the Play Video screen appears with the selected segment displayed. c. Review the segment as required using the navigation tools on the screen. d. When you're finished, close the screen. You are returned to the Search Recorded Video screen. 7. Click Close to exit the Search Recorded Video screen. To review and export retrieved video, refer to “Play & Export Local Video” on page 246. Play & Export Local Video Once you have retrieved the video you need from the designated DVR, use this feature to play back the video now stored on this computer's hard disk. Using this option you can also export the video you need to different formats. To play local video: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose recorded video you want to play. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Play Local Video. The Play Local Video screen appears. The location of the current video path is displayed in the top field. You can change this directory, if needed, using the button to search for the correct directory. 3. From the file list window, click to highlight any row in the list. Each item in this list is a video segment stored by the DVR/NVR and indexed by many attributes including start time, duration, camera, and file name.
246 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
The lower preview pane will show the first frame of that file like this example:
4. Click the Play button to play the segment. The Play Video window appears and plays the selected recorded video. This window remains open during this process. For more on this window, refer to “Play Video Window” on page 247. 5. Use the video navigation tools at the bottom of this screen to move through the video segment. You can also use the slide button to perform rough positioning. 6. If you need to review more than one segment, repeat steps 3 - 4. 7. When you're finished, click Close. Play Video Window For American Dynamics, the Play Video window looks like this example:
Operating the DVR 247 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
For Integral, the Play Video window looks like this example:
This window includes the following features. Menu Tool Bar
File Includes these options: Play — includes two suboptions: • From Date Time -- When you select this option, the Play from Date and Time dialog box appears. Enter the date and time from which you want the current video to start playing and click OK. • From Image Number -- When you select this option, the Image Number dialog box appears. Enter the image number you need and click OK. The selected video plays from the specified image number. Open — Open another video file. Exit — Exit this video file and return to the previous screen. Console Select another Velocity module from the available list. These are the same Console selections available for the Live Video screen (page 241).
Settings Player Size — Choose from three options that control the size of the video frame appearing on your monitor: Small, Medium, and Large.
248 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Export Includes these options: File — Select this option to export the entire video segment to AVI format. The Export Video dialog box appears. For more on this, refer to “Export DVR/NVR Video” on page 252. Image Number — Select this option to export that portion of the video specified by an image number range. For more on this, refer to “Export DVR/NVR Video” on page 252. Date Time — Select this option to export that portion of the video specified by a date and time range. For more on this, refer to “Export DVR/NVR Video” on page 252. Location Indicators
For American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs, use the left slider to forward or rewind the video. For either American Dynamics or Integral DVRs, the right slider only shows the progress of the video as it plays. You cannot use the volume control slider on this screen; volume is controlled by the PC. Control Buttons & Speed Slider
This component only applies to the American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs.
Play the video.
Stop/Pause the video.
Increase or decrease the speed of play. Slide to the right to increase the play speed. Slide to the left to slow the play speed.
Return to first frame of the video.
Go to last frame of the video.
Click to fill entire monitor screen. Press Esc to return to normal mode.
Click to bring up the Image Tools screen. For more on this, refer to “Image Tools” on page 250.
Start & End Time Fields
To crop the video file to a definite time range, enter the start and end dates and times. When you click the Play button, only that time range is played.
Operating the DVR 249 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Navigation Buttons
Play Play the video segment.
Stop Stop playing the video segment.
Prev Frame Show the previous frame of the video segment. The video must be stopped before this function works.
Next Frame Show the next frame of the video segment. The video must be stopped before this function works.
First Frame Show the first frame of the video segment. The video must be stopped before this function works.
Last Frame Show the last frame of the video segment. The video must be stopped before this function works.
Clear Clear the currently displayed screen. The video must be stopped Display before this function works.
Image Print, save, zoom, color and perform other actions on the current Tools frame. This option also exports video frames as JPG files. For more on this, refer to “Image Tools” on page 250. This only applies to the American Dynamics DVR.
Image Tools When you click the Image Tools button in the Play Video window, the Image Tools window appears like the following example:
This screen enables a qualified operator or administrator to enhance an image captured by a DVR/NVR camera. It does not allow the operator to edit the screen in any way that would compromise the image.
250 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
This screen includes the following buttons and fields:
Zoom 1:1
Zoom In Select this radio button then click in the frame. The mouse icon turns to a magnifying glass. Click within the frame and the picture zooms in, using the current mouse cursor as the zoom center.
Zoom Out Select this radio button then click in the frame. The picture zooms out.
Move Select this radio button then click and drag within the picture frame. The picture center moves if you are currently zoomed in. This is the method for moving a close-up from one area of interest to another.
Enhance/ Check one or both of these boxes to enhance and/or sharpen the Sharpen captured video frame. Uncheck the box to return the picture to its original clarity.
1:1 Click this button and the picture returns to its original viewing size. Tools
Bright/ Click this button and a Brightness and Contrast slider appears at the Contrast bottom of this screen. Use these sliders to increase or decrease the brightness and/or contrast of the displayed image. When you’re satisfied, click OK. The image is adjusted. Click Cancel to ignore any changes and return to the unadjusted image.
Color/Light Click this button and Hue/Saturation/Lightness sliders appear at the bottom of the screen. Use these sliders to enhance the color or light of the image. When you’re satisfied, click OK. The image is adjusted. Click Cancel to ignore any changes and return to the unadjusted image.
Apply Click this button to apply the enhancements.
Undo Click this button to remove the enhancements and return to the original image.
Brightness Check this box to display a brightness chart in the image frame. This can Chart aid in enhancing the brightness of the image. Buttons
Full Screen Click this button to increase the size of the image to full screen size.
Load Click this button to open another image you have already saved.
Save Click this button to display the Save dialog box. Name the image and place it in the appropriate directory. It is saved as a JPG file.
Print Click this button to print the image to the specified printer.
Restore Click this button to restore the image to its original, unenhanced form.
Close Close the Image Tools screen.
Operating the DVR 251 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Export DVR/NVR Video One of the most important benefits of using a DVR/NVR to record your video output is the ability to export the video to another source. This enables the qualified operator to transfer video to:
Expert sites Law Enforcement Agents Lawyers Company officials In an increasingly litigious world, incontestable visual evidence is worth a great deal. To export video: 1. Retrieve the video you need from the DVR. 2. Play the video locally until you have isolated the relevant video segment. 3. From the Play Video screen's menu tool bar, select Export. 4. Select the method by which you want to crop the video: •Entire File • Edit by Image Number • Edit by Date and Time The export dialog box appears. 5. At the 'Export To:' text box, enter the path and file name you want for this exported file. If necessary, use the button to find the path and file name you want. 6. At the Export File Format section, indicate the type of file format you require for this export: • AVI—Industry standard video format for audio visual files. This is the default selection. • IMG—Proprietary American Dynamics video format. 7. At the Text Overlay section, indicate whether you need to show text in one of the screen's four corners. The default is None. 8. If you selected either Image Number or Date Time, indicate the section of the currently-displayed video file you want to be exported. • If you specified Image Number, indicate the beginning and ending image number of the required segment. • If you specified Date Time, indicate the starting and ending dates and times of the required segment. If you selected File, ignore this step. Go to Step 9. 9. Click Export. The status indicator above the button shows the progress of the export. 10. When the export is completed, click Done to return to the previous screen. Generate and Stop Host Alarm Qualified operators may need to generate an alarm if they view an infraction on their video. This 'bookmarks' the video event and enables the operator or another authority to return later to that exact spot and retrieve the video. This procedure applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only.
252 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
To generate a host alarm: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR where you want to generate a host alarm. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Generate/Stop Host Alarm > Generate Host Alarm. The Generate Alarm dialog box appears. 3. Select the camera where you want to generate the host alarm, the alarm rate, and the alarm duration. Click OK. The Generate Alarm Configuration message appears. 4. Click OK. Once an alarm is issued at the camera, it continues for the duration indicated in the 'Alarm Duration' text box. To stop an alarm at the designated camera before it is set to expire: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR where you want to stop the alarm. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Generate/Stop Host Alarm > Override/Stop Host Alarm. The Override or Stop Host Alarm dialog box appears. 3. Select the camera whose alarm you need to override. 4. Do one of these: • Click Override Alarm to override the present alarm. This enables the operator to continue the current alarm process until the Stop button is clicked. • Click Stop to stop the alarm. This stops the current alarm in process. You are returned to the Velocity main menu. Get Alarm List Use this feature to display and review a list of all video stored by the DVR/NVR that is associated with alarmed states detected at their attached cameras. This procedure applies to American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs only. To get an alarm list: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose alarm list you want to get. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Get Alarm List from DVR.
Operating the DVR 253 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
The Get Alarm List window appears like the following example:
This screen includes these features:
Start Time: Enter a date and time representing the beginning of the period for which you want to display alarms.
End Time: Enter a date and time representing the end of the period for which you want to display alarms.
Get Alarms Click to execute the command.
Close Click to close this window. Cameras Check up to 16 check boxes indicating the cameras from which you want alarm lists retrieved.
None Click this button to uncheck all camera boxes.
All Click this button to check all camera boxes. Pre-Alarm A text box that shows the pre-alarm duration in seconds Length required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Total Alarms A text box showing the total number of alarms in the list below.
Post-Alarm A text box that shows the post-alarm duration in seconds Length required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Maximum A text box that shows the total number of seconds required to Length retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Alarm List Once you click the Get Alarms button, this window lists all window alarms for the time duration and cameras specified. Each alarm is listed by index, camera, duration, start time, frame, and alarm type. To review video from one of these alarms, double click the alarm.
Status Line Indicates the current status of the Alarm List search including result data.
254 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
3. At the 'Start Time' fields, indicate the start date and time. 4. At the 'End Time' fields, indicate the end date and time. 5. In the 'Cameras' section, check the cameras for which you want to retrieve alarm information. 6. Click the Get Alarms button. The Alarm List window displays a list of all appropriate alarms. 7. In the Alarm List window, double click the alarm you want to review. The Play Video window appears and plays that particular alarm video after it downloads the data from the DVR/NVR unit. 8. Play and review the local video as required. While you are in this window, you can right click the window’s frame to display a pop-up option list like this example:
Right Click options
The options included in this list enable the qualified operator to: • Access properties for the currently selected DVR/NVR (the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide) • Return to the Velocity Administration screen • Generate/Stop a Host Alarm (page 252) • Get an Alarm List from the DVR/NVR (page 253) • Search & Retrieve Recorded Video (page 245) • Play Local Video (page 246) • Camera Control (page 260) These are many of the same options displayed in the Console option list for the Live Video screen (page 241). These tasks can be run concurrently: the present video continues to play while you perform another task. In this way, you can search, retrieve, and play several videos at the same time. 9. When you're finished, select either File > Exit from the Play Video menu tool bar or click in the upper right corner to close the Play Video window. 10. Either select another alarm video to play or close the Alarm List window by clicking the Close button.
Operating the DVR 255 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Get Motion Events List Use this feature to display and review a list of all motion events stored by the DVR/NVR that is associated with alarmed states detected at their attached cameras. This procedure applies to Integral DVRs only. To get an alarm list: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR whose motion event list you want to get. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Get Motion Events List. The Get Motion Events List window appears like this example:
Hint Unlike the American Dynamics DVR, the Integral DVR cannot retrieve manually generated alarms and auto-detected motion events at the same time. Get Motion Event List only retrieves auto-detected motion events.
This window includes these features:
Start Time: Enter a date and time representing the beginning of the period for which you want to display alarms.
End Time: Enter a date and time representing the end of the period for which you want to display alarms.
Get Alarms Click to execute the command.
Close Click to close this screen. Cameras Check up to 16 check boxes indicating the cameras from which you want alarm lists retrieved.
None Click this button to uncheck all camera boxes.
All Click this button to check all camera boxes. Pre-Alarm A text box that shows the pre-alarm duration in seconds Length required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
256 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Total Alarms A text box showing the total number of alarms in the list below.
Post-Alarm A text box that shows the post-alarm duration in seconds Length required to retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Maximum A text box that shows the total number of seconds required to Length retrieve the recorded alarm video.
Alarm List Once you click the Get Alarms button, this window lists all window alarms for the time duration and cameras specified. Each alarm is listed by index, camera, duration, start time, frame, and alarm type. To review video from one of these alarms, double click the alarm.
Status Line Indicates the current status of the Alarm List search including result data.
3. At the 'Start Time' fields, indicate the start date and time. 4. At the 'End Time' fields, indicate the end date and time. 5. In the 'Cameras' section, check the cameras for which you want to retrieve alarm information. 6. Click the Get Alarms button. The Motion Event List window displays a list of all appropriate alarms. 7. In the Motion Event List window, double click the alarm you want to review. The Play Video window appears and plays that particular alarm video after it downloads the data from the DVR/NVR unit. 8. Play and review the local video as required. While you are in this window, you can right click the window’s frame to display a pop-up option list like this example:
Right Click options
The options included in this list enable the qualified operator to: • Return to the Velocity Administration screen • Generate/Stop a Host Alarm (page 252) • Get an Alarm List from the DVR/NVR (page 253) • Search & Retrieve Recorded Video (page 245)
Operating the DVR 257 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• Play Local Video (page 246) • Camera Control (page 260) • Access properties for the currently selected DVR/NVR (the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide) These tasks can be run concurrently: the present video continues to play while you perform another task. In this way, you can search, retrieve, and play several videos at the same time. 9. When you're finished, select either File > Exit from the Play Video menu tool bar or click in the upper right corner to close the Play Video window. 10. Either select another alarm video to play or close the Alarm List window by clicking the Close button. Time Synchronization Use this feature to manually synchronize the Velocity host system clock with the DVR/NVR unit. The default, as specified by the DVR/NVR Properties sheet, requires synchronizing every 24 hours. To manually synchronize a DVR/NVR with this host system clock: 1. From the expanded DVR/NVR folder, right click on the DVR/NVR you want to synchronize. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Select Time Synchronization. The Time Synchronization dialog box appears. 3. Click Yes. Drag & Drop Camera Views The Velocity DVR/NVR module enables a qualified operator to drag and drop camera views in one of two ways:
From a Live View screen (page 258) From a Video Explorer screen (page 259) Each is explained below. Drag & Drop with Live View To drag and drop video in Live View: 1. Expand the Interfaces Configuration folder in the System Tree pane until the individual DVRs/NVRs appear. 2. Click to select the DVR/NVR you want. All available cameras appear in the Components pane. 3. Access the Live Video screen in one of two ways: • From the System Tree pane, right click the DVR/NVR and select View Camera. • From the Components pane, right click on the designated camera and select View Camera. The Live Video screen appears. 4. From the Camera\View Selector, select a camera view button.
258 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Initially, the default camera view for this button appears on the screen. For example, if you selected button 4, camera 4 for the specified DVR/NVR appears. If you selected an individual camera in Step 3, then this camera's video automatically appears. 5. From the Select Pane selector, select the number of frames you want displayed. 6. Click the Velocity Administration button to bring the Administration module into view. Arrange the two windows on the screen so that both the Live Video screen and the Administration window are showing. 7. Drag one or more cameras from the Administration module to an available frame on the Live Video screen. The video feed represented by this camera now appears in the frame. Using this approach, you can drag camera views from different DVRs/NVRs, if needed. You can also drag a camera button to an available camera view to populate the screen with views from the same DVR. When this is done, clicking the selected camera view number now displays all the selected cameras in the designated frames as in this example:
Button 2 is selected
Notice that in this example selecting button 2 displays four specified views. Drag & Drop with Video Explorer To drag and drop video in Video Explorer: 1. Open Video Explorer. 2. Select an existing view group or create a new view group. 3. From the Video Explorer's system tree pane, drag a camera object to an available frame. The video generated by this camera appears in this frame. If a different camera view already exists in this frame, the new video takes its place. DVR/NVR View Groups A View Group is a programmed arrangement of frames in Video Explorer presenting up to sixteen different camera views.
Operating the DVR 259 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To create a view group: 1. Open the Video Explorer. 2. At the menu tool bar, select File > New... or press Ctrl + N. You are prompted to confirm the creation of a new view group. 3. Click OK. The Enter new view group name dialog box appears. 4. Enter the name of the new view group then click OK. The new view group name appears in the View Group combo box at the top of the screen. 5. From the Camera Views Selector, specify the number of frames you want to include in this view group. Select one, four, nine, or sixteen frames. 6. From the System Tree pane on the left, expand the tree to display all of the cameras associated with DVRs/NVRs you have defined for this system. 7. Drag a camera from the System Tree pane to an available frame in the view window. The video output associated with the camera is displayed in the frame. 8. Repeat Steps 4-7 for each camera you want placed in an available frame. 9. Press Ctrl + S or from the menu tool bar, select File > Save to save the current view group settings. The new view group appears in the View Group combo box. To edit an existing view group to create a new view group: 1. From the View Groups combo box, select an existing view group. Video Explorer populates the view window with those frames and camera views previously defined. 2. Modify this existing group as required by: • substituting existing video for other views • increasing / decreasing the number of frames and populating them as required 3. Once you have modified this view group as you require, from the menu tool bar, select File > Save As. The Enter new view group menu dialog box appears. 4. Enter the name of this new view group and click OK. A new view group appears in the View Group combo box. Camera Control If this Velocity system is configured for use with a American Dynamics DVR, you can control the movement of the cameras attached to the DVR/NVR through Velocity. Only those cameras that support movement, such as pan, tilt, zoom, and focus, are affected by this feature. To control DVR- or NVR-attached cameras: 1. From the System Tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the DVR/NVR folder appears. 2. Expand the DVR/NVR folder to reveal all currently-configured DVRs/NVRs.
260 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
3. Click to highlight the DVR/NVR connected to the camera you want to operate. All currently attached cameras appear in the Components pane. 4. In the Components pane, right click on the camera you want to operate. Available options appear in the pop-up list. 5. Select Camera Control. The Camera Control console appears. The American Dynamics Camera Control console looks like this example:
The fields and buttons on this console are:
Camera Control Selection
Radio Select the camera control protocol you want enabled for this buttons camera. Select one of these radio buttons: • Intellex • Local Control (default) Begin Click this button to start the session. By default, this button is Session already selected.
End Session Click this button to end a protocol and go to another option.
Camera Controls
Operating the DVR 261 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click the appropriate buttons to move the designated camera in the manner you require. Possible controls include: —Pan to upper left limit —Pan up —Pan to upper right limit —Pan left —Focus in or out —Pan right —Pan to lower left limit —Pan down —Pan to lower right limit
Focus – focus on the nearest object in the view. – focus on the farthest object in the view.
Track — track to the left from the current location — track to the right from the current location
Zoom — zoom out to widest angle — zoom in on the tightest angle
Iris — open camera iris to largest radius — close camera iris to smallest allowed radius — set camera iris to adapt automatically
Speed Adjust the speed dial to increase or decrease the speed with which the camera performs its PTZ operations (page 263).
Show Check this box to show the camera control PTZ readout (page Camera 263) on the screen. Uncheck this box to hide the readout from Control the live view screen.
Camera Use this pick list window to select another camera for control. Only those cameras that allow camera control appear in this list.
Patterns (This section is only active for American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs)
Pattern pick Select one of the patterns options from the drop-down list. list There are three patterns available.
Run Click this button to perform the pattern specified in the ‘Pattern’ pick list.
Repeat Click this button to repeat the run the number of times Pattern specified in the text box to the right.
262 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
Quick Views (This section is only active for American Dynamics DVRs/NVRs)
Quick View Select one of the available options from the drop-down list. pick list There are 99 views available. For creating quick views, refer to Camera Quick Views.
Go To Click this button to show the view specified in the ‘Quick View’ pick list.
The Set and End buttons are administrative functions. For information on these, refer to the Velocity 3.1 Administrator’s Guide. 6. Control the camera using the buttons and fields on this console. The selected camera can only respond to those controls that it supports. All other commands are ignored. 7. When you're finished, click the button in the upper right corner to exit this screen and return to the main Velocity screen. Cameras can also be controlled using the PTZ camera control icon as described in DVR/NVR - PTZ Camera Controls. This icon can be shown/hidden through the console. If you view a camera that is configured for PTZ effects, the camera control console appears automatically. PTZ Camera Controls If a camera attached to a DVR/NVR is configured for Pan-Tilt-Zoom control, an icon like this appears in the lower right corner of the screen. Click this icon and an bank of controls like this example appears:
The controls shown here are:
+ = Focus In – = Focus Out
+ = Zoom In – = Zoom Out
Click on a specific position and the camera pans to that location. There are eight pan locations available.
+ = Tilt Up – = Tilt Down
Rotate a full circle.
Click this icon and a pick list appears. Select one of the presets already programmed into this camera from the DVR/NVR and the camera executes the motion. Select another preset from the pick list or click to return to the camera controls.
Operating the DVR 263 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this icon and the camera controls disappear. The initial PTZ icon appears.
Click this icon and a pick list appears. Select one of the existing tours already programmed into this camera from the DVR/NVR and the camera performs the tour. Select another tour from the pick list or click to return to the camera controls.
264 Operating the DVR MAN007-0211
All Video Events
This feature displays all specified video events recorded by Velocity-connected DVRs/NVRs. This is a list of all video captured by the DVR/NVR during a specified time period. To open and use the All Video Events screen: 1. From the system tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the DVR/NVR folder appears. 2. Click to highlight the DVR/NVR folder. The All Video Events option appears in the components pane. 3. In the components pane, double click the All Video Events option, . The All Video Events screen appears like this example:
This screen includes these options, fields, and windows:
Menu Bar This bar includes two options: • File – This has one option, Close. • Help – This enables you to view Velocity help.
Start Time Designates the beginning of the interval after which you want recorded video displayed in the Recorded Video window. Click the button to display a calendar. Locate the start date. You can also enter the date directly. Use the spin control buttons to increment or decrement the start time. You can also enter the time directly.
All Video Events 265 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
End Time Designates the end of the interval before which you want recorded video displayed in the Recorded Video window. Click the button to display a calendar. Locate the end date. You can also enter the date directly. Use the spin control buttons to increment or decrement the end time. You can also enter the time directly.
History Check this box to display the entire list of all video currently stored in all cameras of all DVRs/NVRs. The number of video events recorded by the DVR/NVR for the specified period are displayed in parenthesis.
Search Click this button to search for all video meeting the criteria you have specified. The results of the search are displayed in the Recorded Video window.
DVR/NVR Unit Select the DVR/NVR unit whose video events you want to search. All DVR/NVR units currently defined for this system appear in this list. The default is All.
Camera Select the DVR/NVR camera from the specified DVR/NVR unit whose video events you want to search. All DVR/NVR cameras currently defined for this DVR/NVR appear in this list. The default is All.
Events From... If events appear in the Recorded Video window, you can To enter a starting and ending index number (shown in the Index column) to filter the video you see.
Recorded Video All events meeting the search criteria specified above window appear in this window. To select an item to play, double click it.
4. Do one of these: •Check the History box on the right to display the entire list of all video currently stored in all cameras of all DVRs/NVRs. This can result in a very long (and unhelpful) list. Skip to Step 8. • Use the fields on the left to narrow your search as described in Steps 5 - 7. 5. Using the 'Start Time:' and 'End Time:' fields, specify the date and time range during which you want the program to search. • Click the button to display a calendar. Locate the start and end dates. You can also enter the date directly. • Use the spin control buttons to increment or decrement the start and end times. You can also enter the time directly. 6. At the 'DVR/NVR Unit' pick list, select the DVR/NVR unit whose video events you want to search. The default is All. 7. At the 'Camera' pick list, select the camera from the specified DVR/NVR unit whose video events you want to search. 8. Click Search.
266 All Video Events MAN007-0211
The video events for the specified range appear in the bottom window. 9. To retrieve a recorded video, double click one of the video event selections in the window. The Search & Retrieve Recorded Video screen appears. 10. Retrieve the video then play it on the Play Local Video screen. For more on this, refer to “Search & Retrieve Recorded Video” on page 245 and “Play & Export Local Video” on page 246.
All Video Events 267 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Event History Viewer
The Event History Viewer enables a qualified Velocity operator to track and report events that are specific to the DVR/NVR subsystem. To open the Event History Viewer: 1. From the system tree pane, expand the Interfaces Configuration folder until the DVR/NVR folder appears. 2. Click to highlight the DVR/NVR folder. The Event Viewer option appears in the components pane. 3. In the components pane, double click the Event Viewer option, . The Event History Viewer appears like this example:
The Event History Viewer looks and feels like the Velocity Report Manager. In fact, it shares many features with the Report Manager except that it is dedicated to history logs. These logs include:
Active Alarms by Date Active Alarms by Date with Comments Alarm Log by Date Alarm Log by Date with Comments All Events Log by Category All Events Log by Date For more on how to generate a DVR/NVR report, refer to “Generating History Logs” on page 268. Generating History Logs To generate a history log: 1. In the Event Viewer history log tree pane, expand the History Logs folder to reveal one of the available logs. 2. Click to highlight the log you want to generate. 3. Select one of these options: • To generate a log with the default criteria as defined by the default report, leave the 'Use Event Viewer Default Criteria and Sorting' box checked.
268 Event History Viewer MAN007-0211
• To customize your log—including or excluding components and fields as well as defining precise criteria for this report—uncheck 'Use Report Default Criteria and Sorting' then customize the report. For more on this, refer to “Customizing DVR/NVR Logs” on page 269. 4. When you're finished, click the Search Events button. The events corresponding to the criteria specified appear in the lower window.
Once you have generated the event list you need, you can use this list to:
Play video Copy video to the clipboard Send results to the printer Procure properties For more on this, refer to “Event List Functions” on page 271. Customizing DVR/NVR Logs If you uncheck the 'Use Event Viewer Default Criteria and Sorting' box, use the steps below to customize the list of events that eventually appear in the lower pane: 1. From the 'Field' combo box, select the field you want to serve as a filter. The available data fields correspond to the history log you selected. 2. In the 'Function' combo boxes, click and select appropriate values in the one or more fields that now appear. Additional fields and boxes appear depending on the field and arguments specified: • In the first pick list, select either is or is not. • In the second pick list, select one of the available arguments: equal to, less than, greater than, between, starting with, or like. Only some of these options apply to a specific field value.
Event History Viewer 269 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• An additional checkbox, or equal to, appears on the same line if you select either less than or greater than. Check this box to indicate that the argument includes an equal to clause, such as 'greater than or equal to'. • A text box appears if you select like, starting with, less than or greater than. Enter a value that places your qualifiers in the correct context. • If you specify the starting with or like argument, enter the value you want the report to start with or be like. • If you specify greater than or less than, enter the value this criterion will be greater than or less than. If it is also equal to, check the previous box. • If you specify the equal to argument, the variable window expands to become a pick list from which you select one or more values. Select one or more options from this list. If this report supports a range of values, you can click the beginning value then hold down the Shift key and click the last value in the range. To select non-contiguous values, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking. For more on the criteria page, refer to the Report Manager “Criteria Page” on page 1015. 3. When you're finished with this specific criterion, click the Add button. The criterion is displayed in the middle pane. 4. Repeat Steps 1 - 3 to add more criteria to this report. 5. If you need to add sorting elements to your report specifications, click the Sorting tab. The Sorting page appears. 6. From the 'Field' combo box, select the item (field) by which you want to sort. The values appearing on the combo box list depend on the type of report you have selected. 7. From the 'Direction' combo box, select either Ascending or Descending. This indicates in which direction the selected field is used to sort: from least to greatest value or vice versa. For example, if you select 'Input Index' as the sorting point and indicate it should be used as an Ascending sorting feature, then the Report Manager sorts the report according to the Input Index, starting from the smallest value and proceeding down the list to the highest value. 8. Click Add and the Sort Field function is added to the middle pane. 9. If there are any other sorting criteria you need to add, repeat steps 6 - 8. 10. Go to the lower pane and click any line (criterion) you need to edit. Do this: • To nest the line as an expression, click in the specific line's open parenthesis column. A combo box appears. Select the number of parentheses you need for this expression. To close the nested expression, click in the closed parenthesis column of the specific line and another combo box appears. Select the number of closed parentheses you need to satisfy this expression. • To add an AND argument to include or an OR argument to exclude this part of the expression, click in the AND/OR column of this line and a combo box appears. Select either AND or OR. • To remove a line, select it and press Delete. 11. Continue to edit lines to create boolean expressions as required. 12. When you're finished, click the Criteria tab and then click the Search Events button. The required events appear in the lower pane.
270 Event History Viewer MAN007-0211
Event List Functions Once you have generated a DVR/NVR history event list, you manipulate that list in a number of ways. 1. Generate an event list as detailed in “Generating History Logs” on page 268. A list of events appears in the lower pane. This list is determined by the criteria you selected in the Event History Viewer. 2. From the lower pane of the Event History Viewer, right click on an event. A pop-up list appears. 3. Select one of these items: • Play Video—Play the associated video for this event. The Search & Retrieve Recorded Video screen appears as shown in “Search & Retrieve Recorded Video” on page 245. Retrieve the video then play it on the Play Local Video screen as shown in “Play Video Window” on page 247. • Copy to Clipboard—Copy the contents of the selected event to the clipboard for pasting to another source. • Properties...—Show the properties of the selected event.
Event History Viewer 271 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
272 Event History Viewer MAN007-0211 Who’s Inside
When an emergency occurs in an area or building, you need to know immediately who is inside the area. To enable this feature and define each area—passback zone —you need to oversee, use the following technique:
Designate each passback zone you need. Enable all defined passback zones for each controller overseeing those zones. Once you have defined the required passback zones and enabled them for the relevant controllers, you can immediately generate a report showing who is inside using this technique. You do not need to define passback zones in order to use this feature; it only gives you a better sense of exactly where they are within the security system. If passback zones are not defined, then credentials are still displayed here. All credentials used at a defined reader are listed here within Everyone and Zone 00 - Unknown, with information on the reader that recorded the last credential use, the time it was recorded, and other relevant information.
273 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
How To Use Who’s Inside
To use Who’s Inside: 1. Open Who's Inside in one of these ways: • With the Configuration folder highlighted in the System Tree pane, double click the option in the Components pane. • From the menu bar, select Console > Who's Inside. • From the icon bar, click the Who's Inside icon, . The Who's Inside screen appears. For more on this, refer to “Who's Inside Screen” on page 275. 2. Review the current situation as required. Identify all those people still located inside the affected area. Determine how many of the people Velocity shows as being inside the affected zone are actually at the mustering station. 3. Customize the screen view using the following icons:
Click this To: icon:
Toggle between hiding all zones that are currently empty and showing all zones. When you hide empty zones, you simplify the screen, making it easier to see and manage.
Refresh this screen. All controllers are queried as to their current status and the most recent status of each zone is returned.
Display an HTML rendition of this information for printing or E-mailing.
4. Reassign those people who were inside the affected area and are now at the mustering station. For more on this, refer to “Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone” on page 278. 5. Forgive user credentials as required. If you need to temporarily halt polling on a busy screen, click the red button on the Who’s Inside icon bar. You can restart polling by clicking the green button. For more on this, refer to “Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials” on page 277. 6. Identify credential properties as required in this way: a. Right click on one or more people in the right pane. b. Select Display Credential. The badge template for the specified credential appears. For more on this feature, refer to “Display Credential Information” on page 890. 7. When you're finished, exit the screen.
Alternative Method: An alternative method is available using the Diagnostic window. This method has none of the flexibility of the Who's Inside module, but can be useful as a diagnostic tool. 1. Open the Diagnostics window. 2. In the 'Controller' combo box, select the controller connected to the affected zone.
274 How To Use Who’s Inside MAN007-0211
3. Turn the Diagnostic Stream ON. The message 'Diagnostic stream is ON' appears in the upper window. 4. In the 'DIGI*TRAC Commands' field, type this command: 34*9*0*[capacity] where [capacity] = the number of people allowed inside. Then press Enter. 5. Click the ellipsis button to the right, , to execute this command. The message “Sending Host issued DigiTrac commands: 34*9*0*999” appears in the upper window. The results of this command are displayed in the lower window. 6. Generate and print a report based on this information. A report can also be generated in the Report Manager using the Person Information folder’s Who is Inside Where report. For more on generating reports, refer to “Creating a Report” on page 1003. For more on the Diagnostic Window, refer to “Diagnostic Window,” starting on page 703. Who's Inside Screen The Who's Inside screen looks like this example:
It includes the following icons:
Click this icon to hide all zones in the Zone Tree pane that have no people inside. This simplifies the screen.
Click this icon to refresh the screen. Current controller information is uploaded to Velocity. This keeps this screen absolutely current -- a necessity during emergencies.
How To Use Who’s Inside 275 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Click this icon to generate an HTML page showing the latest Who's Inside information. This page is displayed on the default web browser (e.g. MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla). The web page looks like this example:
You can print (Ctrl + P) or E-mail this page (File > Send > Page by E-mail...) as required. This icon is both a status indicator and a button. As a status indicator, green indicates that the Who's Inside feature is spooling and refreshing normally; when the indicator turns red, it indicates that the feature is not refreshing, in most cases because the icon was clicked to pause this function. Click the green button to stop polling by the Who's Inside engine. (The red button appears.) This halts the screen refresh which enables the operator to focus on investigations of specific lines and problems. This is particular useful when the screen is very busy and lines keep jumping around in the window as new information flows in and the screen is refreshed. Once the operator has finished investigating one or more incidents, he can click the red button to resume refresh and polling. (The green button reappears.)
Zone This left pane displays a list of all 65 available passback zones (Zone 00 Tree – Unknown and Zone 1 – Inside through Zone 63 – Inside), whether pane these zones have been set up for the system or not. The Everyone zone lists everyone currently recorded within the system. Click to highlight a particular zone in this pane and all those persons who are currently inside that zone appear in the right pane. The columns in this pane include the zone name and the present person count.
276 How To Use Who’s Inside MAN007-0211
right This pane displays a list of all persons who are inside a selected zone. pane The columns in this pane include: Name – Name of the person assigned the credential. ID – Number assigned to this credential. Zone – The passback zone where this credential was last used. If no passback zones are defined, then all credentials are shown as Zone 00 - Unknown. Function – The IDF option assigned to this credential on the general page of the credential properties. Last Access Time – The date and time when this credential was last used to request access at a defined reader. Last Accessed Reader – The last reader, by door and reader number, where this credential requested access. Last Transaction Type – The result of the access attempt at the specified reader: Granted or Denied.
This screen also supports the following right-click functions:
If you click on: And select this option: This occurs:
A zone in the left Forgive All Credentials in Zone All credentials displayed in the right pane pane are forgiven, even those that the system did not grant access to. For more on this, refer to Who's Inside - Forgiving Credentials.
One or more Forgive Selected Credentials All credentials associated with the persons in the right selected people are forgiven, even those pane that the system did not grant access to. For more on this, refer to Who's Inside - Forgiving Credentials.
One or more Display Credential The default display credential (as defined persons in the right by Preferences) is displayed for the pane selected people.
Who's Inside: Forgiving Credentials During an emergency, people leave affected areas any way they can. Most of the time, all doors are automatically unlocked, enabling people to leave as quickly as possible. In other facilities, such as high-security installations, doors cannot be unlocked and people must exit as quickly and expeditiously as allowed. Frequently, a few rules are broken in the process, including passback violations such as tailgating. Occasionally, Velocity may invalidate those credentials used for such a purpose. Under such circumstances, it is up to the qualified operator to forgive these credentials, in effect 'resetting' or overriding them, so that users don't have to go through the reissue process. There are two ways to forgive credentials from within Who's Inside.
How To Use Who’s Inside 277 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
To forgive selected credentials: 1. In the Who's Inside left pane, click to select the affected zone. The persons who were inside this zone when the alarm went off appear in the right pane. 2. In the right pane, click one or more of the persons whose credentials you want to forgive. 3. Right click on the highlighted persons. A list of options pops up. 4. Select Forgive Selected Credentials. The selected persons' credentials are forgiven. To forgive every credential inside the affected: 1. In the Who's Inside left pane, right click the affected zone. A list of options pops up. 2. Select Forgive all credentials in Zone. All persons' credentials inside this zone are forgiven. Who's Inside: Reassigning Credentials to Another Zone Using Who's Inside, a qualified operator can manually move a credentialed person from an affected zone to a safe zone. This is particularly useful for mustering a large group of people from one area to another. During an emergency, most readers and doors are opened automatically, allowing free movement from the affected area into a safe area. Once users exit a problem area, they normally muster in an area where they can be identified and accounted for by an operator. Since users normally do not have to use a credential to exit an area during an emergency, Velocity will continue to show them as present in the zone until they are manually removed from it. This process tells the program that the user has successfully left the affected area. To move a person to another zone: 1. From the left Who's Inside pane, click to select the affected zone. All persons inside this zone appear in the right pane. 2. Identify all those persons at the mustering station who are identified in the right pane as being inside the affected zone. 3. From the right pane, click to select those persons who have been identified at the mustering station. 4. Drag those persons to the left pane and drop them into the zone identified as the mustering station. A message appears like this:
5. Click Yes to confirm your move. Velocity now identifies the new position for the persons identified.
278 How To Use Who’s Inside MAN007-0211 Velocity Learning Center
The Velocity Learning Center enables the operator to access these Velocity-specific documents and tutorials:
Velocity Online Help Release Notes Defects Fixed in the Release Known Issues Tutorials Velocity Quick Installation Guide (Adobe Acrobat required) Velocity Administrator's Guide (Adobe Acrobat required) Velocity Operator's Guide (Adobe Acrobat required) DIGI*TRAC Reference Information Uninstall Information Install Adobe Acrobat Reader As noted above, several of these documents cannot be run or read without Adobe Acrobat Reader. (Velocity includes a copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader installer in the option list.) The topics in this section include:
Topic See page:
How to Use the Learning Center 281
Opening the Learning Center 280
Learning Center Main Screen 280
Closing the Learning Center 281
279 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Opening the Learning Center
To open the Learning Center: 1. Open Velocity. The Velocity main screen appears. 2. From the menu bar, select Help > Velocity Learning Center. The Learning Center main screen appears. Learning Center Main Screen
The Velocity Learning Center website uses the Microsoft Internet Explorer or the default browser on your computer. Its screen and function should be familiar to you. The Learning Center screen looks like this example:
This screen contains these features:
Navigation Bar This bar depends on the browser you are using and contains the necessary tools to navigate the screen.
Display Screen This window displays any linked topic requested. Most web pages, including the main Velocity web page, contain linked text and graphics that enable you to click and jump to additional referenced page. For example, when you click Release Notes, the program displays the release notes page in the Display Screen window. For more on using this screen, refer to “How to Use the Learning Center” on page 281.
280 Opening the Learning Center MAN007-0211
How to Use the Learning Center
The Velocity Learning Center works like any other browser except that its focus is solely the Velocity site. Click on the linked text or graphic in the pane and the requested topic appears in the pane. Use your navigation tools at the top of the page as you would normally with your browser. Closing Learning Center
To close the Learning Center, do one of these:
Click the button at the upper right corner of the Learning Center Press Ctrl + F4 You are returned to the main Velocity screen.
How to Use the Learning Center 281 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
282 Closing Learning Center MAN007-0211
Glossary
2-person rule The 2-person rule feature can be used to require that two people enter valid access codes to access a secure area. This is typically used in high security areas or in areas where industrial safety is an issue. AATL - Alarm Active Too Long This applies to "non-door" locations that allow an alarm condition to occur for a specified time period before an alarm is actually issued. Doors report DOTL (door open too long) alarms rather than AATL alarms. In this situation, an alarm is issued when the door is held open longer than a specified time. absentee rule mode A User Management Command. Sets the maximum number of days for non-use of an ID (1 – 255 Days). On expiration (no ID usage - for the maximum number of days set) the User will be automatically disabled or deleted. ACB - Alarm Action Control Block The ACBs, Alarm Action Control Blocks, are the means by which DIGI*TRAC controllers control actions and events based on Alarm conditions. ACBs are Factory programmed for specific actions; however, they are all reprogrammable, if required. For a complete list of ACBs, Table 4-2 starting on page 4page 184. access Refers to the ability to enter a secured area at a facility; also refers to the ability to enter/use different applications/windows/dialog boxes within Velocity. access control The monitoring or regulation of which persons are allowed to enter secured (protected) areas in a facility. access control system (ACS) A security management system, consisting of a network of field panels (hardware) whose behavior is controlled by software, which acts to maintain the security of a facility via card access. access delay time An Access Delay Timer can be set to delay the actuation of a Relay for special Access and Exit applications. The relay actuation can be delayed for 1-8100 seconds after the use of a valid Access ID or an RQE Exit request.
Glossary 283 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
access point Point of entry or exit (e.g., door, gate) which can be controlled by the Velocity system via the host computer and its peripheral devices. access time The amount of time a door will remain accessible (unlocked) after a valid access is granted. Access Time should be set to allow enough time for the badge holder to remove their card from a reader and open the door. action Something which occurs in response to an input or trigger. activate Enable; make functional, as in enable codes activating certain manufacturer features to a door attached to a panel. activation state Indicates the behavior of an output point when it is called. The activation state is configured on the Output Points property sheet when defining output points for doors. address A number by which the host recognizes a panel (e.g., for the purpose of receiving messages from the panels). administrator One of the operators of the Velocity system. Also, as used in the context of Velocity, a user or system administrator. address Each ScramblePad Reader requires an Address setting from 1-16. Each MATCH Reader Interface Board also requires an Address setting from 1-16. The address alerts the controller from which ScramblePad/ MATCH Reader the access or control request originated. alarm The activation of an alarm device that causes a sound to occur at the location of the alarm as well as a message to be sent to the alarm monitor which will display information regarding the alarm, and cause the alarm monitor terminal to beep. Alarms are caused by an open switch; alarms may occur as a result of forced entry into an access point or a door being held open beyond its shunt time, for example. alarm cancel Cancels all alarms within the specified control zone. This also enables the DIGI*TRAC Annunciator.
284 Glossary MAN007-0211
add-ins Features or subprograms added to the basic Velocity program through the use of the Add-In Manager. alarm control The practice of controlling the alarm monitoring and reporting capabilities of a controller automatically by time and manually by individual User ID. alarm input The physical connection of an alarm circuit to the interface panel controller. alarm levels Settings that indicate what designated operators can acknowledge. If, for example, an operator is able to acknowledge alarms with a level of 10 or less, then any alarm that is designated as being 11 or above cannot be acknowledged by this operator. alarm masking The controller can mask any line module input to allow authorized use of a monitored door or area. Masking prevents alarm conditions from being reported but still allows line trouble alarms and tamper alarms to be reported during the masking condition. alarm monitor The user interface in the Velocity system which monitors if alarms have been activated, and allows them to be acted upon. alarm queue A list of alarms requiring the operator's attention. In Graphic Designer, there is a pane called the Alarm Queue pane that displays a list of alarms and their current status. alarm point A location in the facility where an alarm detector is located and operating. alarm relays Dedicated Alarm Relays are for interfacing to local alarm annunciators or to digital communicators for monitoring the controller's alarm status from off-premise central alarm stations.
Glossary 285 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
alarm type The type of alarm which may be reported in the Velocity System. All alarms which occur in Velocity are assigned a type; alarm types are differentiated by their priority, global shunt status, forced note, auto clear and RTN separate alarm characteristics, and the message which is received by the alarm monitor when alarms of this alarm type are reported. alarm shunting Alarm shunting is different than alarm masking. Masking is performed by the controller's software for its own line module inputs. Alarm shunting is performed by the controller's relays to shunt the alarm reporting of line module inputs of other controllers or alarm panels. Shunting of alarms is an insecure and outmoded technique no longer in use by state-of-the-art systems. alarm stacking If enabled in the Alarm Options preferences page, the same device can issue more than one alarm. For example, if Expansion Input 3 on Controller 2 triggers an alarm at 2:01 AM, it is displayed in the Alarm Viewer. Subsequently, it can issue a second alarm at 2:03 without overwriting the first, then issue a third without overwriting the first or second one. All three alarms can appear together in the Alarm Viewer. To discriminate amongst them, you can view either the Count or Time columns. alarm triggers control zone Any Line Module Input can trigger a Control Zone. This is used for point-by-point annunciation of Inputs or for special control applications such as turning on security lighting when an alarm has been tripped. alert When a person is alerted, they are signalled by beeps or a tone whenever they enter a secure area or use their code at a keypad location to alert the person to their special alert condition. AMT Alarm Monitor Terminal. A type of terminal that is equipped to monitor input points only. anti-passback reader A reader which will refuse access to cards which attempt access for a second time within a specified period of time after a valid card read. arm Enable; to make a function of the Velocity system usable. See also Unmask.
286 Glossary MAN007-0211
arm points Enable the Velocity system to report conditions that may occur at a particular alarm point. auto-relock A monitored Door will automatically relock ¾ second after it is opened, thereby reducing the chance of unauthorized follow-on entry by tailgating after a valid access. To accommodate various types of electric locks and door operators, auto-relock can be set to relock ¾ second after the door closes or can be disabled. For example, if the door time is set to 45 seconds to allow access by a handicapped person, but someone accesses the door in ten seconds, auto-relock can be used to automatically relock and rearm the door as soon as the door is opened. Therefore, the door does not remain unlocked and unarmed to allow an unauthorized person access. In a “non-door” situation, there is no lock to relock so auto-relock will only rearm the alarm. This can be used for doors not used for normal access (such as a fire door). For example, someone (such as a maintenance person or inspector) could be granted one-time access through a fire door that is set up to trigger an alarm if opened; auto-relock can be used to automatically rearm the alarm for the door as soon as the door is closed. backdrops Drawings created using the Badge & Graphics Designer that are not badges. These can include maps used within the Graphics module, background designs (such as company logos, icons, and emblems) used on other badges, or drawings required by Security for other purposes like bulletins or notices. badgeholders In Velocity, these are known simply as people or persons. Anyone who holds a card or code is an enrolled person. balloon text Text that appears when the cursor moves over an icon or text on the screen. Usually a balloon or box appears with some explanatory text inside it, describing the button or text just touched. In Velocity, this is called a ToolTip. blue prints Architectural designs for a building or part of the building. Electronic versions of these designs can be imported into Graphics Designer for use as maps. See also Maps.
Glossary 287 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
bundled used to describe a door that incorporates at least one associated relay, input, and reader (normally an entry reader). In Velocity, bundled doors are indicated by a checked box to the left of the item. canvas The window in Designer where a drawing is actually made. cardholder A person in the Velocity system who is assigned a credential specifying the use of a card. card event An action that the panel has been programmed to execute after a valid access (green light) has been registered at a door. This event is triggered specifically by reading a card into a card reader. CCM (Command & Control Module) This daughterboard sits on the DIGI*TRAC controller board and contains all the logical instructions the Controller Board uses to process its information including the DIGI*TRAC Programming Language. CCOTZ A variant of COTZ. See COTZ. child The module cannot be dragged outside the main Velocity screen. circuits, electrical High voltage—a circuit involving a potential or not more than 600 volts and having circuit characteristics in excess of those of a low-voltage power-limited circuit. Low-voltage—a circuit involving a potential of not more than 30 volts alternating current (AC), 42.4 volts direct current (DC), or AC peak.
288 Glossary MAN007-0211
Power-limited—a circuit whose output is limited as described in the following tables. The first table lists power limitations for inherently limited power sources; the second specifies power limitations for sources not inherently limited. The power limitation is provided by the design of the transformer, a fix impedance, a non-interchangeable fuse, a nonadjustable manual reset circuit protective device, or a regulating network.
Circuit voltage Maximum nameplate ratings Current limits V AC-DC max I (amps) (volts) VA (volt-amps) Current (amps) max
0 - 20 5.0 x Vmax 5.0 8.0
over 20 - 30 100 100 / Vmax 8.0
over 30 - 100 100 100 / Vmax 150 / Vmax
over 100 - 250 DC 0.030 x Vmax 0.030 0.030 only
where Vmax = maximum output voltage regardless of load with rated input applied and Imax = maximum output after one minute of operation under any non-capacitive load, including short circuits.
Maximum nameplate Circuit Power Maximum ratings Current voltage limits over-current limits I V AC-DC max (VA) protection max VA Current (amps) max (volts) (volt-amps) (amps) (volt-amps) (amps)
0 - 20 5.0 x Vmax 5.0 1000/Vmax 250 5.0
over 20 - 100 100 100 / Vmax 1000/Vmax 250 100/Vmax
over 100 - 0.030 x Vmax 0.030 1.0 NA 1.0 250 (DC only)
where Vmax = maximum output voltage regardless of load with rated input applied, Imax = maximum output after one minute of operation under any non-capacitive load, including short circuits and with over-current protection, and (VA)max = maximum volt-amp output regardless of load with over-current protection bypassed. If the power source is a transformer, (VA)max is 350 or less when Vmax is 15 or less. class A group of users which has been defined to possess the same access privileges (to the features of the system software and hardware) within the system/facility.
Glossary 289 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
clearance code A clearance code is a set of doors that have been grouped together for access purposes. Clearance codes may be assigned to a company so that all new badges assigned to the company will have access to all doors in the clearance code. Modifications may be made to individual user's clearance codes in the Badgeholder Maintenance application. click Refers to the act of point the mouse cursor at an object on the screen and depressing the left mouse button. If you press the right mouse button, this is called 'right clicking.' code Access codes are used to gain access to secure areas. Each user is assigned a unique access code, and when an access code is entered, the controller knows which user the access code belongs to and whether the user is authorized to access the area. Access codes can be entered manually on a ScramblePad, or they can be entered by scanning a card in a MATCH reader. There are 3 Code ID Formats: Keypad Code ID, Card Code ID, and Dual Code ID (Keypad Code ID + Card Code ID). IDs can be programmed to perform different functions and are controlled by time, day, location and User Management Limits. They can be issued when an event occurs to perform designated activities (such as a turning on lights, unlocking doors, and masking alarms), by selecting a button on the Control window (to lockdown a door, for example), by scanning a card with a control code in a MATCH reader, or by manually entering codes on a ScramblePad. Programming codes can be used by trained personnel to program optional features or to test and troubleshoot a controller from a keypad. code holder A person in the Velocity system who is assigned a credential specifying a code. code ID tamper alarms The controller can detect and Report Code ID Tampers. A Code ID Tamper results from an invalid Keypad Code ID being entered at a ScramblePad Keypad or an invalid Card Code ID at a MATCH Card Reader. An invalid Code ID is one that does not exist in the controller's database, or one that is being used at the wrong door at the wrong time. The controller reports Code ID Tampering on the system printer and on the Tamper Relay after three invalid Code ID entries and may be programmed to alarm on from one invalid Code ID to none.
290 Glossary MAN007-0211
code tamper The act of attempting to enter a code which is either invalid or incorrect. Normally after three attempts, an alarm is issued. command & control Describes the ability for the owner, operator or authorized user to issue Commands & Control the way in which the security system manages access, alarms, relays and users. See also CCM. computer system, redundant Two computer systems maintained at a central station, either of which can quickly be connected and operational for handling alarm signals in the event that the other computer fails to operate. A fault-tolerant computer system is considered to be redundant. See also fault-tolerant computer system. concatenate To hash or combine a set of numbers or values to create a new number or value. configuration The way in which the host computer and the peripheral equipment in a facility are interconnected and programmed to operate as a system. control delay timer A Control Delay Timer can be set to delay the actuation of a control relay for special control applications. The relay actuation can be delayed for 1-8100 seconds after a valid Control ID entry, or after a relay has been triggered by a Time Zone or by an Alarm or Relay triggering a Control Zone. control record A Velocity file which contains system configuration information, which in most cases will only be used by a system administrator or technician. controller Another term for panel. The term controller is generally applied to Hirsch panels, such as M1N or M8 controller. control zones Control Zones are used to control Relays and Line Module Inputs by Control IDs, and for special Control applications. A Control Zone includes a Time Zone and a set of Relays or Line Module Inputs to be controlled. There are two types of Control Zones: Standard Control Zones and Master Control Zones. • standard control zones: 0 - 191
Glossary 291 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Consists of a Time Zone and a combination of the Line Module Inputs and Relays to be controlled. (CZ 0 = Never/No Inputs or Relays) • master control zones: 192 - 255 Consists of a combination of Standard Control Zones each capable of performing different access and control functions simultaneously. COTZ (Sometimes also called CCOTZ) Card/Code Only Time Zone. During a specified time zone, the user can use either the card or code even at a dual technology access point. credentials codes or cards assigned to people in Enrollment Manager. A person within the system can possess more than one credential. credential management Known as User Management in the context of the DIGI*TRAC language, this term encompasses a group of tasks that enable Velocity to control how many people enter or exit a specified area. These tasks include day, use, and absentee limits as well as 2-person rule, and occupancy settings. day limiting Also called temporary days, this sets a maximum number of days an authorized credential can access an assigned area before access privileges are withdrawn. See also Temporary day. deadman timer A Deadman Timer Code is a special control code used to track the safety and security of a user while a specific task is being performed. The use of “deadman timers” is common in many industrial applications such as railroads, refineries, and other dangerous or hazardous locations. default (condition/behavior) A standard condition either imposed by the system (unless changed by the user) and/or when no other condition exists. default time zone The time zone controlling a feature(s) of the system that will be in effect unless another time zone has been imposed on the feature that will override the default time zone. device server Device servers (also called terminal or serial servers) have been developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals, printers, and modems to the network and making those devices available as networked devices. The Lantronix MSS is such a device.
292 Glossary MAN007-0211
DESFire Data Encryption Standard Fast, Innovative, Reliable and Secure. This is a contactless smart card technology that employs Triple-DES (Data Encryption Standard), an encryption scheme that provides a high level of security. DIGI*TRAC The Hirsch line of controllers. DIGI*TRAC Command Language The language used to program and talk with Hirsch controllers. This is a large and flexible language, using hundreds of commands that can implement almost any procedure a security system might encounter. disable In the Velocity System, to make a function or feature that is normally enabled or usable, unavailable for use. disarm See Mask. disk backup devices Disk backup devices are files on hard disks, or other disk storage media, and are the same as regular operating system files. Referring to a disk backup device is the same as referring to any other operating system file. Disk backup devices can be defined on a server’s local disk or on a remote disk on a shared network resource, and can be as large or as small as needed. The maximum file size is equivalent to the free disk space available on the disk. If the backup is to be performed over the network to a disk on a remote computer, use the universal naming convention name (UNC) in the form: \\Servername\Sharename\Path\File to specify the location of the file. As with writing files to the local hard disk, the appropriate permissions needed to read or write to the file on the remote disk must be granted to the user account used by SQL Server. Because backing up data over a network can be subject to error, verify the backup operation after completion. dock Anchoring a screen as a dependency within another window's workspace. For example, if you dock the Event Viewer within the Velocity main menu, you cannot drag the Event Viewer outside the confines of the Velocity work space.
Glossary 293 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
domain A group of computers and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures. Within the Internet, domains are defined by the IP address. All devices sharing a common part of the IP address are said to be in the same domain. domain controller A Windows server with a copy of the Active Directory database, allowing it to support client/server authentication. door alarms The controller can monitor the doors it controls for two types of door alarm conditions: Door Forced Open and Door-Open-Too-Long. Door Forced Open is reported on the system printer and the General Alarm Relay whenever a monitored door is opened without the entry of a valid ID, or an RQE Input first. Door-Open-Too-Long is reported whenever a monitored door that has first been opened by an authorized User and is held or propped open beyond an owner settable time period. The DOTL alarm is reported on the system printer and on the General Alarm Relay. door delay A specified period of time before a door is actually unlocked. For example, a bank vault might have a 10-minute door delay before it is opened. door delay timer For special entrance or exit control applications, the door timer can be delayed from starting after a granted code, RQE, or time zone actuation. This is especially useful for implementing delayed egress control on emergency exit doors where local building codes permit such controls to be installed. door groups Two or more doors associated with a time zone. Door Groups answer the questions When and Where. The When is the Time Zone and the Where is the Door (Reader). This replaces the old Velocity access zone concept. Several door groups can be defined as a Master Door Group. door time Relays have a Door Time setting for use by Access Users and RQE devices. The Door Time can be set for 1-8100 seconds. It can be set to 0 (Zero) seconds for Toggle ON/OFF by consecutive uses of an Access ID, or RQE device.
294 Glossary MAN007-0211
DOTL - Door Open Too Long Door-Open-Too-Long is reported whenever a monitored door has been opened by an authorized User and is held or propped open beyond an owner-assigned time period. The DOTL alarm is reported on the system printer and on the General Alarm Relay. download To send data from a main computer system to a subsystem. In Velocity, information from the database is downloaded from the host computer to a panel when changes have been made to the system. For example, when a large number of badges or cards have been assigned, or a new door has been configured. dragging The act of using a mouse to move an object from one place on the screen to another. Normally this is done by selecting the object with the left mouse key then pulling the object to another location while continuing to depress the mouse key. At the new location, release the mouse key and the object is placed. dropping The act of pasting an object to a particular location usually by releasing the left mouse button. It is associated with the concept of dragging and dropping, wherein an object is selected, then moved (dragged), and finally placed (dropped) at a new location. dry contact A switch or relay which provides no power to the circuit but redirects or turns on/off power supplied from another source. DTLM To monitor door switches, or other alarm sensors, the controller requires a DIGI*TRAC Line Module, DTLM, to be installed for each monitored input. The Line Module provides line supervision of 2% sensitivity for line security and line trouble reporting. The DTLM1 provides one input terminal for the alarm sensor. The DTLM2 has two terminals, one is for the alarm sensor and one for the RQE Push-button or sensor Input. The DTLM3 has three input terminals, one for an alarm sensor, one for an RQE device, and one for a Tamper switch. The MELM may be substituted. dual code ID only Description of User ID Format 3 (IDF 3). This ID Format is for Dual Code ID (Card Code + Keypad Code) Users only and is entered on a Dual Technology Reader (ScramblePad + MATCH Reader). This ID takes up 1 User Record in the DIGI*TRAC User Record database. See Command 311.
Glossary 295 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
dual technology reader The use of two reader technologies at one location, usually a ScramblePad and a MATCH reader. Either or both IDs may be used for Access or Control Functions. duress A state in which a badgeholder is being forced to provide entry into a secured area at the facility. duress alarm An alarm that is functional with keypad card readers; a duress alarm is activated by a badgeholder by pressing the digit 9 in place of one of the PIN digits when entering the normal PIN code into the card reader. duress digit If a qualified person is being forced to open a door against his/her will, the person can indicate this coercion by entering an extra ‘duress’ digit. By entering this digit, the controller permits access while issuing a silent alarm, immediately alerting the Velocity operator to the situation. enable Activate; to make a feature or function of the system usable. enable code Numeric codes necessary for enabling (assign to activate) added manufacturer features to the interface panel attached to a panel. enter Means to type characters using your computer keyboard. It also refers to a specific key, the Enter key, on your keyboard that is most often used to execute a specific procedure. Pressing the Enter key often serves the same purpose as clicking the OK button with the mouse. Event Report An Event Report is the result of an action or event generated by the controller automatically, or an event that occurred to the controller from outside the controller. There are two types of System Events: Internal Events and External Events. • External Event Types •AC OK • Line Module Input Secure • Box Tamper Secure • Forgive All Users • Keypad Tamper Secure • Keypad On-line
296 Glossary MAN007-0211
•Line Fault Cleared • Multiple Keypads Alert • Parallel Printer On-line • Passback Violation • Serial Printer On-line •UPS Restored • Internal Event Types • End Of Time Zone Masking Of Input • End Of Time Zone Disable Of Relay • End Of Time Zone Actuation Of Relay • End Of Time Zone • Relay Clear At End Of Time Zone • Relay State Change •Start Of Time Zone • Start Of Time Zone Masking Of Input • Start Of Time Zone Actuation Of Relay • Start Of Time Zone Disable Of Relay executive override The granting of privileges specifying that passback limitations don't apply to this credential or person. No passback violation messages will be issued and an access-grant always works. executive privilege Allows the card to obtain a valid access at any reader on the panel, and also allows the card to obtain a valid access regardless of any other privileges assigned to the card or any time zones assigned to any readers on the panel. fast poll A condition by which panels are polled continuously, and there is no pause between poll cycles. fault-tolerant computer system A computer system containing multiple power supplies, disk drives, processors, and controllers, each of which back up and check on the processes of the others. In the event of a component failure, the other modules take over the function performed by the failed components without affecting the operation of the computer. In addition to the duplicating hardware, a fault-tolerant system includes the necessary software to make the system operational.
Glossary 297 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
firmware revision Refers to information related to the panel's own software. float Allow a window to go wherever you drag it whether it is inside or outside the main Velocity window. force note A characteristic assigned to an alarm which requires operator's comments to be added in response to the alarm before the alarm may be acknowledged on the alarm monitor. forgive In the context of security access, the act of overlooking all current passback and occupancy restrictions in the interests of a speedy exit from an endangered area. function groups Function templates that are predefined through the Function Group option that can be applied to credentials. Like credential templates or operator groups, function groups provide administrators and qualified operators with a less time-consuming way to apply many functions to a credential. global In the context of Velocity, it refers to the program's ability to share values amongst a large number of controllers if they are connected to the same XBox. Globalizing a value indicates that the value will be recognized by any controller to which the XBox and the Velocity host is connected. global shunt A condition that may be programmed for a specified period of time during which door open alarms are suppressed after valid card access requests. hardware The physical equipment that make up the access control system at the facility such as the panels and doors. hardware components In a facility using Velocity, the hardware components include loop, panels, doors (interface panels), CCTV cameras and monitors, printers and workstations. holiday schedules Groups of holidays. Velocity supports four schedules.
298 Glossary MAN007-0211
holidays Days during the year when special rules (access and control) apply. These normally include Christmas, New Years, and July 4th. Velocity groups holidays into Holiday Schedules. hot keys One or more keys that can be pressed to open or close a program or feature. These shortcuts enable operators to work within Velocity more efficiently and more quickly. HTML HyperText Markup Language.The language used to create World Wide Web pages, with hyperlinks and markup for text formatting (different heading styles, bold, italic, numbered lists, insertion of images, etc.). icon The Velocity term for the point (alarm or relay) or door placed on a map. Each type is represented by a different icon. Icons on a map are linked to the point or door represented. ID Hirsch controllers enable the use of a Personal ID to perform different control Functions: access control, door control, elevator control, alarm control, etc. When used, the ID identifies the user. There are 3 ID Formats supported: Keypad Code ID, Card Code ID and Dual Code ID (Card Code ID or biometric + Keypad Code ID.) Hirsch controllers are code based. Codes can be entered by using a ScramblePad. Codes can be entered by using a Card. Cards are converted by the MATCH Reader Interface Board to a Card Code and a combination of Card plus Keypad Code is converted to a Dual Code. Each ID Format is stored in the controller's internal memory by a User Record Number and checked for code conflicts (duplicates) during programming. IDK Interoperability Development Kit. In-X-It Entry/exit; if In-X-It readers are set up in the facility the procedure refers to this sequence of events - a card is read and gains access to an area but does not exit through an “out” reader. When the same card is read at another “in” reader, access is denied, and an alarm is set off. input points Electrical contacts that open or close to indicate a change of state in the system. Input points are always designated as odd numbers when being configured in the Door Maintenance application. Input points may be of a 2-state (on/off) or 4-state (on/off/open/short) type.
Glossary 299 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
interface panel The physical device for controlling access through an access point or connecting an alarm input or connecting a digital output. There are three types of interface panels that can be defined in the system; STI's (Smart Terminal Interface), AMT's (Alarm Monitor Terminal, and OCT's (Output Control Terminal). interface panel controller The physical device for controlling the behavior of the interface panels. interoperable A word describing systems or applications that can communicate or work with each other. IP address The Internet Protocol address; a numeric address such as 123.231.32.2 that the domain name server translates into a domain name. keypad Any device that possesses keys and can be used for entering a code. The most common keypad used with Velocity is a ScramblePad; however, other types of keypads can be used as long as they conform to MATCH standards. keypad code ID only Description of User ID Format 1 (IDF 1). This ID is used for Keypad Code ID only Users. This ID takes up 1 User Record in the DIGI*TRAC User Record database. keypad tamper See physical tamper. LED Light emitting diode. LEDs are used on ScramblePads, MATCH readers, SNIBs and Net*Adapts to indicate status and respond to entries. line modules Line modules are used to monitor door switches or other alarm sensors. There are two types of line modules: DIGI*TRAC line module (DTLM) and miniature embedded line module (MELM). Line modules provide line supervision of 2% sensitivity for line security and line trouble reporting. The DTLM1 and MELM1 provide one input terminal for the alarm sensor. The DTLM2 and MELM2 have two terminals: one for the alarm sensor and one for the RQE push-button or sensor input. The DTLM3 and MELM3 have three input terminals: one for an alarm sensor, one for an RQE device, and one for a tamper switch.
300 Glossary MAN007-0211
line voltage The voltage at any field-connected source of supply, nominally 50 – 60 Hz and 115, 208, or 230 volts (depending on the country standard). local relay The communication occurring between the doors (interface panels) and the interface panel controller (panel). loop An optical fiber or wire network by which each panel is connected to other panels and communicates with the host. loop pause The time to pause between poll cycles. loop unload Messages returned to the server when a panel is polled. This feature of Velocity limits the amount of data sent by the loop at one time so as not to slow down the system. mask Turns off reporting of all alarms from any of the line module inputs as defined by the code's control zone. Also called Unarm. master control zones Master control zones (MCZs) are a compilation of standard control zones. Using MCZs, a qualified operator can create sophisticated control routines that can be triggered by either a single control code entered at any authorized ScramblePad/MATCH reader or a line module input or relay. master time zones Two or more standard time zones. These can be assigned to door groups, function groups, credentials, or many other components within the Velocity system. MATCH The term MATCH is an acronym for Multiple Access Technology Control by Hirsch. It describes the ability to use multiple compatible technologies such as card readers, biometrics, fingerprint/retinal scanners, smart cards, etc. on a DIGI*TRAC controller, one at a time, or all at the same time. MATCH Reader Interface Board (MRIB) This board is required to interface compatible card readers, by themselves or in combination with ScramblePads, to a DIGI*TRAC controller. Each MRIB supports 2 ScramblePads and 2 Readers (ABA/ISO or Wiegand).
Glossary 301 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
MATCH2 A later version of MATCH with a second DIP switch bank to enable configuration of newer reader protocols such as the Corporate 1000. MELM The MELM is a Miniature Embedded Line Module version of the DTLM. Available in MELM1, MELM2 and MELM3, 1, 2 and 3 input versions perform the same functions as the DTLM. See also DTLM. modem A MOdulator/DEModulator. A device that adapts a terminal or computer to a telephone line. In Velocity, the use of a local modem connected to the host PC and a remote modem connected to the XBox which in turn is connected to the controller. modem pools Two or more modems defined as a single group. modules Programs that are part of the Velocity group. These include Event Viewer, Alarm Viewer, Graphics Editor, Badge Designer, Customization Manager, and the Administration window. momentary single mask Momentarily disables the reporting of a single alarm condition from any of the line module inputs as defined by the card/code's control zone. mouse buttons Most mice that use Windows possess two buttons: a left button that 'clicks' or causes a particular procedure to occur and the right button that 'right clicks' or provides additional options to appear on the screen. multiple ID user Describes a User who can Use different IDs (Keypad, Card, Dual) on the same controller at different locations. See ID Formats 4, 5, 6, & 7. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology. The government entity responsible for overseeing Smart Card standards. occupancy control Occupancy Controls are used to keep track of the number of users within a designated secure area or zone. Occupancy controls require entry and exit readers on the controlled area. output control group A numbered group of output points that can be activated when the status of an input point (assigned to the output group) changes.
302 Glossary MAN007-0211
OCT An Output Control Terminal. A type of interface panel which contains relays to turn on or off field equipment via instructions received from the main server or a user in the system. occupancy This allows control over how many users occupy the secure area at any one time. The system counts the number entering and counts the number exiting. A running total is kept and whenever the total exceeds the maximum allowed or equals the minimum allowed, access is denied and an occupancy violation alarm is recorded. In addition, the occupancy count can be used to trigger a control zone for automatic masking and unmasking of the protected area and to change 2-Person-Access-Rule to 1-Person Rule once the area is occupied by the minimum required number of persons. operators Persons qualified to access and use Velocity. Operators are defined and maintained through the Administration module. output points Contact points on the interface panel controller that can be opened or closed by the system to turn something on or off. Output points are numbered sequentially when being configured in the Door Maintenance application. override A function used in relation to card readers and doors; a door which is overridden is unlocked and the reader shows a valid access (green light). panel A computer that controls up to sixteen interface panels. The panel maintains a database of cards. All interface panel alarms and card transactions are registered by the panel to which the interface panel is attached. This information is sent via a loop to the main server. It is also called a controller. parameter Information that controls the behavior of the system. partial unmask Unmasks all inputs in the specified control zone previously detected as secure. All unsecured inputs are left unarmed.
Glossary 303 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
partitioning The act of dividing processes or persons into groups that can be viewed by only some operators. This is achieved in Velocity through Roles which can include or exclude particular Velocity physical access devices or logical applications, such as person groups or credential templates, from the view of certain operators. passback This requires users to pass through an entry reader, and, later, through an exit reader before their ID can be accepted at another designated entry reader. Passback is used to reduce multiple entries on a single ID by different persons (ID sharing by passing the card back to another entrant) and tailgating (more than one person entering on the single use of an ID). It also enables the system to track and report on who is inside the secure area. Hirsch has added an internal layer to passback controls that allows access to an internal area only after a user has entered the secure area through an entry keypad or reader. permissions Permissions are those privileges assigned to Operators. Permissions are assigned through Roles. persons Card and code holders for this system. They are enrolled through the Enrollment Manager and are assigned credentials. They are distinguished from operators who have access to Velocity. See also: Persons. person groups A feature within Enrollment Manager that allows the administrator to group enrolled users for easier searching and more logical arrangement. person templates Templates incorporating pre-defined values for Personal Information panes. In this way, people can be enrolled more quickly. physical tamper When the keypad’s DIP switch for the Tamper Enable is set to ON, and the outer keypad bezel is pried up or removed, the keypad goes into a physical tamper mode. This will be evident when all four of the keypad's LEDs flash on and off. There are two distinct behaviors that can occur with the keypad in physical tamper mode, depending on which model keypad you are using:
304 Glossary MAN007-0211
• DS37L - 4 LEDs flash on and off and the START button is disabled, so pressing it does not generate the numbers display that allows code entry. The keypad will beep once every few seconds. • DS47L - 4 LEDs flash on and off. Pressing the START button will generate numbers and allow a valid access code to be entered to unlock the door. The keypad will beep once every few seconds. physical zone (PZ) Extensions of common passback and occupancy definitions that enable programmers to create an arbitrary topology around a reader or group of readers. A defined area inside of which passback and occupancy definitions are observed. If users are detected inside a prescribed PZ during an emergency or other predefined condition, they are reported to the controller according to existing definitions. pick Clicking with the left mouse key on an object to highlight it within the Badge Designer drawingboard. When picked, the object's handles appear. PIN Personal Identification Number. Also called a code. PIV Personal Identification Verification: a standard devised by NIST to regulate the development of smart cards for federal employees. This includes all cards that conform to the DESFire FIPS201 standard. PIV reader A smart card reader developed to conform with U.S. government NIST standard for smart card readers. This includes all SmartCard readers that conform to the DESFire FIPS201 standard. pocket PC A mobile handheld computer that can communicate with the network via wireless router or switcher. polling The sending of information from one device to another, which indicates or determines the status of the device. populate To place objects or definitions within a particular space. In the context of the Designer, it refers to placing devices on an existing map. Within a dialog box, it refers to entering or selecting values for the required fields.
Glossary 305 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
pre-arm status Tests all available inputs within the specified control zone and reports whether they are inactive (secure) or active (unsecured).If all inputs are secure, the ScramblePad flashes its green LED once for an access grant and twice for a control. If there are unsecured inputs detected, the ScramblePad flashes its red LED and beeps—one beep for each active input. press The act of pressing keys on your computer keyboard. For example, to press Ctrl + F8 means to press both the Ctrl key and the F8 key on your keyboard at the same time. print server Print servers (also called terminal and serial servers) have been developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals, printers, and modems to the network and making those devices available as networked devices. programming mode The controller must be in Programming Mode in order to enter Programming Commands at the keypad. The ScramblePad will scramble its display to a normal pattern when in Programming Mode for ease of Command entry. The right most Yellow LED will be flashing while in Programming Mode. Both Yellow LEDs will be flashing while in Programming Mode if the System Code is to the Factory Default code of 123. A ScramblePad and MATCH Reader combination is required to enroll cards into a stand-alone DIGI*TRAC controller. Contact Hirsch for information on pre-configured Enrollment Stations. reader A generic term applied to an access or alarm control device such as a keypad, card reader, dual keypad + card reader combination, or biometric reader. re-enable A return to normal operation; in reference to doors, reverses the effect of a “Lock” or “Unlock” command, and returns the doors to normal operation. real time Data processing concerning events occurring in current time. redundant Possessing a backup in case the original is corrupted.
306 Glossary MAN007-0211
relay An electrically operated device that is activated by a change in conditions in an electrical circuit and that can actuate other devices in the same or another electric circuit. relay triggers control zone Any Relay can trigger a Control Zone. This is for special control applications such as shunting other alarm systems when doors are unlocked or when relays are actuated. response code A code used to represent a commonly used response to an alarm occurring in the facility in lieu of a written comment entered by the operator for an alarm. retrigger To trigger again after an initial trigger is over. For example, a RQE can be set to trigger a relay once unless it is set to retrigger the relay for as long as it is actuated, such as when using a motion sensor for automatic RQE activation. return to normal The act of an alarm point returning to its normal operation after being in an alarm state. Return to Normal status advises the user that the alarm condition no longer exists, but the horn may still be sounding and the security in the area may be compromised. return to normal alarm An alarm that is reported to the alarm monitor indicating that the alarm point has returned to its normal state. rights Rights are privileges assigned to Roles. roles The permissions and rights that can be assigned to a specific person or operator. This takes the place of the old operator groups feature and enables the administrator to partition access down to the feature and event level. RQE Request to Enter button. Normally this button must be pressed in order to gain access to or exit from a restricted area.
Glossary 307 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
RQE device RQE means Request-To-Exit. An RQE device can be used to mask an alarmed Door for authorized exit and to unlock magnetic locks for exit. RQE devices can be push-button or motion sensors. An RQE Push-button can be installed at a receptionist's desk to manually grant access at an intercom controlled visitor's entry door. RQE Devices are connected to a controller through a DTLM2, DTLM3, MELM2, or MELM3 Line Module. RQE Devices may also be used to locally mask an expansion line module input, either for momentary passage through an alarmed door, or using a key switch for masking interior motion sensors prior to area occupancy. RSS RSS technology is used to create a list of headlines that can be delivered to you. For example, when you report new alarms on a site that supports RSS, those alarms can be added to a feed that a specified operator or administrator subscribes to. RSS feeds enable a specified operator to get update notifications delivered directly to their desktop through a third-party news aggregator program. scaling Changing the size of an object without distorting the shape of the object. Normally this is accomplished in Badge Designer by holding the object at one of its corner handles and pulling. SCRAMBLE*NET The proprietary system incorporating Hirsch controllers, multiplexers, and connected devices into a single network that can be overseen by a computer running one of several Hirsch programs, such as S*NAP or SAM. Velocity normally uses X*NET in conjunction with Hirsch products. ScramblePad keypad The unique and patented Hirsch ScramblePad Keypad. This type of keypad is the most secure keypad available because it scrambles the display - places the illuminated digits under different keys every time it is used - to protect codes from being stolen by pattern recognition. It also includes a built-in optical viewing restrictor to prevent anyone except the authorized user from reading the display. ScrambleProx A ScramblePad with proximity reader built in. screen The frame within which a program or subprogram appears. Used interchangeably with Window.
308 Glossary MAN007-0211
secure In the Velocity system, another word for arm or enable. secured access area An area in the facility protected by a door or gate that can only be opened by use of a card or PIN number and card combination. serial port A port that uses a serial (sequential) protocol, such as RS-232 or RS-485, to pass data between two or more devices. A USB port is a type of serial port since it passes data sequentially. serial server Serial servers (also called terminal and print servers) have been developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals, printers, and modems to the network and making those devices available as networked devices. server The host computer. The host computer is the computer that maintains the Velocity database. shunt Disable; to make a function of Velocity unusable. Synonymous with mask. shunt points Suppress the reporting of an alarm point. Alarm points may be shunted by group as defined in the Alarm Group Maintenance application, by accessing the appropriate Monitor Control Option. Synonymous with masking points. shunt time The length of time a door open alarm is suppressed (shunted) after a valid card access request. Shunt time should be set to allow the badge holder to open the door or gate, pass through the doorway, and close the door. single zone access This feature allows a controlled area to be occupied by only a single Access Zone at a time. More than one Access Zone may be authorized for the same secure area, however, when it is unoccupied, the first Access Zone to enter will automatically exclude all other authorized Access Zones until the area is again unoccupied.
Glossary 309 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
smart cards Cards with integrated circuitry including microprocessor and memory. This card is more of a solid-state PC than a dumb card, with capabilities for storing far more information and performing calculations. Velocity conforms to the FIPS201 federal standard. S*NET Abbreviation for SCRAMBLE*NET. Hirsch’s proprietary Hirsch Encrypted Standard (HES) protocol SCRAMBLE*NET network. This network protocol provides communication between the Hirsch controller and any one of several devices including host PCs. SNIB S*NET Interface Board. This board must be installed in a controller before it can communicate with a host PC. SNIB2 The latest version of the SNIB2 board that allows high-speed TCP/IP Ethernet connection between a controller and a networked Velocity server. The SNIB2 can be assigned a unique IP address, enabling remote controllers to be accessed from a networked server. SQL Structured Query Language. A database query and programming language originally developed by IBM for mainframe computers. It is widely used for accessing data, querying, updating, and managing relational database systems. There is now an ANSI-standard SQL definition for all computer systems. standard control zones Standard Control Zones (SCZ) link a time zone with any combination of available relays for output control or inputs for alarm control. In this way, a SCZ can be used to designate when and which input can be masked, or when and what relay controlled. SCZs are only used by Velocity when they are grouped together into Master Control Zones. STI Smart Terminal Interface. A terminal that is designed to interface with one of a wide selection of card readers. In a system like Velocity, STI's are set up to maintain a relay that is used to unlock the door adjacent to the card reader. The STI interfaces to and receives its access control instructions from the host computer, and has the ability to make access control decisions based on valid card access requests, should communications be lost with the host computer.
310 Glossary MAN007-0211
soft alarm An alarm that is encoded within the field panels (panels and doors). Soft Alarms are assigned numbers that are recommended by the manufacturer to be reported to the host to indicate the specified condition. Examples of panel soft alarms include Tamper Alarm or Battery Low Alarm; examples of door soft alarms include STI Tamper, Forced Door, or Duress. Soft Alarms are configured in the Panel Maintenance application on the property sheet for Soft Alarms. software The non-physical instructions that are loaded onto the host computer that controls the access control system. Also, instructions that are temporarily or permanently stored in the computer’s memory and used to provide function and control of the computer’s components. status The current state or condition of a (Velocity) parameter. system thresholds The maximum number of components the system is set up to handle. system administrator The system administrator is a user who when logged into Velocity maintains full privileges to all applications that are part of the access control system. This person is familiar with both the hardware components that make up the security system at the facility as well as the software that controls it. The system administrator is also responsible for assigning users their passwords and privileges for using the Velocity system. system code The System Code must be entered on a ScramblePad to enter Programming Mode. The System Code, a settable 3-8 digit Keypad Code ID, protects the controller from unauthorized programming. table A SQL Server object in a database that stores data as a collection of rows and columns. tagging When tagged, a tag alert report is printed on the system management printer whenever the tagged user enters a secure area.
Glossary 311 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
tamper alarms The Controller can detect and report several types of Tamper Alarms. It will report a Box Tamper whenever the controller enclosure is opened. It will report a Tamper whenever the ScramblePad or MATCH Reader Bezel is removed and if Address Tamper reporting is set to on. It can also report a Code Tamper if so programmed. A Line Module Input Tamper will be reported from an Input equipped with a DTLM3 or MELM3 Line Model with Tamper Switch installed. Tampering with alarm monitoring circuits will trip line trouble alarms. Tamper Alarms report on the System printer and trip the Alarm Relay. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) on top of the Internet Protocol (IP).These protocols enable communication between different types of computers and computer networks.The Internet Protocol is a protocol which provides packet routing. TCP provides reliable communication and multiplexing. temporary day This sets which days of the current week and the next week the user will be authorized. Once the last day expires the user is disabled or optionally deleted. temporary-day mode A User Management Command. Describes the ability to set which days this week, next week, and the week after (up to 14 days) that a User will be authorized to use their ID. Upon expiration, the User will be disabled or optionally deleted automatically. terminal server Terminal servers (also called print and serial servers) have been developed specifically for the task of connecting computers, terminals, printers, and modems to the network and making those devices available as networked devices. threat level A numeric value assigned to each card reader. For access to be granted at a card reader, the reader checks the threat level of the badgeholder’s card against the reader's own threat level, then against the system's threat level. If the card threat level is greater than or equal to (>=) both the reader's and the system's threat level, access is granted. If the card threat level is less than either, access is denied. Badge Holders with executive privilege enabled are exempt from the threat level criteria. Changing the system's threat level can act to either grant or deny access to all the doors in the facility. The greater the number, the greater the threat level.
312 Glossary MAN007-0211
timed override A period of time during which the door is unlocked, and the green lamp on the card reader is on, indicating an access granted condition. time log Logs code entry for recording the arrival and departure times of time log code holders. time zone A period of time during which a reader, card, alarm point or other system feature is active or inactive. Time zones are used in Velocity to define when certain features of the system are enabled or disabled. • Standard Time Zones: 0 - 65 Consists of a start time, end time and set of days. (TZ 0 = Never; TZ 65 = Always) • Master Time Zones: 66 - 129 Consists of up to eight Standard Time Zones • Grand Master Time Zones: 130 - 149 Consists of up to eight Standard or Master Time Zones tool tip text Text that appears in a box or balloon when your cursor touchs the link. This text usually explains the word or concept in a little more detail. transaction A transaction is an event that occurs as a result of a card access attempt or a timed override being issued for an interface panel in the system. Transactions are recorded in the real-time Transaction History log. transaction processing method A way to indicate how access decisions are made within the system. A transaction processing method is defined for each panel that is configured within the system. The three types available are local, shared and central. transaction report A Transaction Report results from an ID being used. An RQE transaction also generates a transaction report.
Glossary 313 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
trigger A stored procedure that executes when data in a specified table is modified. Triggers are often created to enforce referential integrity or consistency among logically related data in different tables. For example, an RQE input can be set to trigger a relay for use with magnetic locks. The RQE will trigger the relay once unless it is set to retrigger the relay for as long as it is activated, such as when using a motion sensor for automatic RQE activation. See also retrigger. trouble alarms The controller can detect and report several types of Trouble Alarms. These alarms include line module input circuit troubles such as opens, shorts, excessive noise, and line out-of-spec. Trouble alarms also include printer off line, printer out-of-paper, UPS fail and other internal controller conditions. Trouble Alarms are reported on the printer and the Trouble Relay. T-SQL The standard language for communicating between applications and SQL Server. The Transact-SQL language is an enhancement to Structured Query Language (SQL), the ANSI-standard relational database language. It provides a comprehensive language for defining tables; inserting, updating, or deleting information stored in tables; and for controlling access to data in those tables. Extensions such as stored procedures make Transact-SQL a full programming language. turnstile This type of gate allows one person at a time to pass its point. It is frequently used for access control in crowded areas, such as airports or department stores. There are three basic types of turnstiles: full-height, half-height, and optical. unbundled Disassociate the parts of a door. The relays, inputs, and readers associated with a door are unassigned so that they can be used for other purposes. See also Bundled. unload This tem refers to the exchange of data during a poll cycle. Data is unloaded from the panel during these poll cycles; the panel is configured to unload a maximum number of messages at a time during a poll cycle. unmask To arm or rearm a device. To enable and allow the input to talk with the controller. The opposite of this to disarm or mask. See also Mask.
314 Glossary MAN007-0211
upload This term refers to sending data from a subsystem to a main computer system. In Velocity, information is uploaded from a panel to the host, for example, when the panel is brought down for repairs to be made. use count This sets a maximum number of uses for which an authorized user can use their ID in order to enter a secure area or perform a control function. Up to a maximum of 31 uses can be allowed. Once the use-count expires the user is disabled or optionally deleted. use-count mode A User Management Command. Describes the ability to set the number of times a user can use their ID (1-31 times) before it is automatically disabled or optionally deleted. user A person who is allowed access to the Velocity system's database. Users are identified in the Velocity system by use of a User ID, and must obtain this User ID and a password from the system administrator. user-defined fields Fields that may be custom defined by the user in the Company Code Maintenance application to maintain information (specific to the company's own needs) about badgeholders employed by the company. User defined fields will be fields that do not already appear on any of the screens in the Velocity system. After defining the field names in the Company Code Maintenance application, the fields will appear in the Badgeholder Maintenance application on the User Defined Fields property sheet. user function Description of what Function DIGI*TRAC controller will perform upon a valid transaction, e.g. Access, Unlock, Mask, etc. user function and priority Each User in the controller can perform one of the functions listed below. The Functions are prioritized. Each higher priority Function can override the lower priority Functions. For example, a Force Off Function User can override an Unlock Function that is in effect. A Lock Open Function User can override a Force Off Function that is in effect. Time Zone controlled Functions fall in the middle of the priority list and override lower priority User Functions, but can be overridden themselves by higher priority User Functions. • ACCESS USERS (Lowest Priority) • Momentary Access
Glossary 315 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
• Single Use Access • Temporary Access •Unlock •Relock •CONTROL USERS • Trigger Relays • Force Relays ON •Force ON Release • Force Relays OFF •Force OFF Release •TIME ZONE CONTROLS • Time Zone Actuate • Time Zone Disable • Time Zone Clear • TOP-PRIORITY CONTROL USERS (Highest Priority) • Lock DOWN • Lock DOWN Release • Lock OPEN • Lock OPEN Release user ID format The type of ID issued to a User determines the Format of the User Record in the controller database. There are 7 available User ID Formats which include Keypad Code ID Only, Card Code ID Only, Dual Code ID (Card Code ID + Keypad Code ID) Only, as well as all in combination. user number When added to a controller, each User is assigned a User Number as well as issued a personal ID or set of Multiple IDs. If a User is issued Multiple IDs, then more than one User Number will be associated with that User. The User Number is used to change or delete a user as well as to track and report transaction activity. Available User Numbers are 1-999 in a standard controller. User Expansion is available to 4,000 or 16,000.
316 Glossary MAN007-0211
user record The controller maintains in its internal Database a Record on every User. The User Record is listed by User Number and contains all the information needed on every User: The User Number, User Function, ID Format, Access Zone or Control Zone, Duress Digit if assigned, and current Passback Status. The Record also maintains the User's Alert and Tag status and any Use-Count and Absentee-Rule Limits. For Temporary-Day Users, the Record also contains their valid days. Whenever Users are printed on the System printer, they are listed in the User Record format listing most of the above information, but selectively with or without Code IDs showing. See Command 330 to be able to selectively print out User Records by printout style, each showing different user setups and status information. view An alternate way of looking at SQL Server data from one or more tables in the database. A view is a virtual SQL Server table, usually created as a subset of columns from one or more tables. virtual relays Non-physical relays available for programming use for special applications. watch log Logs code entry for tracking guards on their appointed rounds. XBox The SCRAMBLE*NET Gateway (XBox). It provides a high-speed gateway from a Host PC to a network of DIGI*TRAC controllers. The XBox can support up to 63 DIGI*TRAC Controllers through a single XBox and is required to form an XNET network. XML Extensible Markup Language. A subset of SGML. X*NET An advanced network protocol incorporating Hirsch XBoxes, connected controllers, and a host PC for a fast, server-controlled network environment. This is the arrangement normally used by Velocity.
Glossary 317 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
318 Glossary MAN007-0211 Index
Symbols Administration main screen 6 % 114 administrator definition 284 Numerics alarm 2-person rule definition 284 definition 283 alarm active too long definition 283 A Alarm cancel 221 AATL alarm control definition 283 definition 285 Absentee limiting 172 Alarm functions for credentials 153 cancel entry delay 208 absentee rule mode 283 conditional unmask 209 ACB introduction 208 definition 283 mask/cancel entry delay 208 access masking doors 210 definition 283 masking inputs 211 access control momentary door masking 210 definition 283 momentary input masking 210 access control system partial unmask 209 definition 283 pre-arm status 209 access delay time start exit timer 208 definition 283 unmask/start exit timer 209 Access functions 203–229 unmasking doors 211 extended 207 unmasking inputs 211 in Designer 75 alarm input introduction 206 definition 285 momentary door access 206 alarm masking relock door 207 definition 285 unlock doors 207 alarm monitor access point definition 285 definition 284 alarm points access time definition 285 definition 284 Alarm queue access users acknowledging alarms in 77 priority level 315 clearing alarms in 77 Acknowledging alarms entering comments about alarms in 78 in Designer 75, 76 alarm relays Acknowledging an alarm 46 definition 285 Acquire alarm shunting 286 files 133 alarm triggers control zone 286 photographs 128 alarm types TWAIN 131 definition 286 video capture 129 Alarm viewer 39–52 action acknowledged alarms pane 43 definition 284 acknowledging an alarm 46 activate clearing alarms 47 definition 284 clearing all alarms 47 Activating credentials on specific dates 150 closing 52 activation state columns 42 definition 284 copying to clipboard 48 Actuate 228 displaying notes 49 Add-ins get recorded DVR video 50 options 20 icon bar 42 Add-ins options 20 introduction 39 address main screen 41 definition 284 placing on the Velocity desktop 45
319 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
playing DVR video 50 assigning badge templates to credentials 148 refresh alarms on 51 Badge & graphics designer 67–82 replay WAV file 50 Badge templates starting 40 assigning to credential 148 unacknowledged alarms pane 42 Badges using 46 credential overview 146 viewing instructions for alarms 51 double-sided printing 145 viewing maps for alarms 51 previewing 142 Alarms printing 144 acknowledged pane 43 printing an example from credential property sheet 148 acknowledging in Designer 76 specifying for credential 149 clearing 47 Batch enroll credentials 87 clearing all 47 Batch enrollment clearing in Designer 76 card credentials 123 copying to clipboard 48 Biometrics entering comments about in Designer 78 credential property sheet 159 get recorded DVR video 50 GUID 160 host DVR 252 panel ID 160 host NVR 252 site ID 160 playing associated DVR video 50 Biometrics page 160 refresh alarms on viewer 51 Browser 279–281 suspend switching 79 closing 281 unacknowledged pane 42 main screen 280 viewing instructions for 51 opening 280 viewing maps for 51 using 281 alarms tamper 312 C Alert Cameras credentials 156, 171 addressing DVR 238 overview 174 addressing DVR directly 239 All video events 265 addressing NVR 238 American Dynamics addressing NVR directly 239 see DVR drag & drop DVR views 258 see NVR drag & drop NVR views 258 AMT DVR control 260 definition 286 NVR control 260 Annunciator PTZ controls using DVR 263 alarm cancel 221 viewing DVR video 240 anti-passback reader viewing NVR video 240 definition 286 viewing video from attached DVR 240 arm viewing video from attached NVR 240 definition 286 Cancel entry delay 208 arm points Capturing filters 133 definition 287 Capturing photos 128 Assign credential to person dialog box 101 Capturing signatures 126 Assign person to existing credential Capturing TWAIN images 131 dialog box 103 Capturing video images 129 Assigning a credential template to a person 104 Card codes Assigning a new credential to a person 103 assigning PIN 151 Assigning a person to an existing credential 103 length 151 Assigning existing credential to a person 101 overview 146 Auto enroll 124 see also Credentials Auto pan 235 specifying for credential 149 Auto-delete card event overview 175 definition 288 Auto-delete credentials 154 Card select number 160 Auto-generate PIN codes 151 Card types Auto-generate PINs 151 indicating for credentials 149 auto-relock Cards definition 287 overview 146 see also Credentials B Caret sign (^) 114 Badge & Graphic Designer CCM
320 MAN007-0211
definition 288 lock open door 214 CCTV viewer 231–236 lock open relay 214 auto pan 235 lock open release door 214 focus mode 235 lock open release relay 215 functions 235 triggering doors and relays 213 grab 233 control record introduction 231 definition 291 iris mode 235 control users 316 pan-tilt 235 control zone presets 232 definition 291 starting 232 controller tool bar 234 definition 291 tours 233 Controllers view 233 viewing in Designer 71 zoom mode 235 Controlling placed objects in Designer 75 Central stations conventions graphics icons 73 guide iii Check secure 209 Copying alarms to the clipboard 48 circuits Count users other side 224 electrical 288 Count users this side 225 class Credential pane 86 definition 289 Credential templates Clear code tamper 224 assigning to person 104 Clear state 229 see also Credentials clearance code Credentials definition 290 absentee limiting 172 Clearing alarms 47 absentee limits 153 in Designer 75, 76 access time extension 156 Clearing all alarms 47 activating dates 150 code alert 175 definition 290 alerting 156, 171 code ID tamper alarms 290 apply global management 153 Code tamper assign threat authority 153 clear 224 assigning badge templates 148 overriding 171 assigning duress digits 151 Column management 31 assigning existing to persons 101 rearranging column headers 33 assigning function groups 152 resizing columns and panes 34 assigning functions 152 sorting by column header 33 assigning IDFs 149 Command sets assigning new to person 103 executing in Designer 81 assigning person to existing 103 Components pane 14 assigning PINs 151 Components windows 14 assigning template to persons 104 Conditional unmask 209 assigning to persons 101 configuration auto-delete 154 definition 291 auto-generate PIN 151 Configuration folder 8 auto-generate PINs 151 Console options 19 batch enroll cards 123 Control functions 203–229 biometrics page 160 force off doors 218 biometrics properties sheet 159 force off relays 218 code length 151 force off release doors 219 day limiting 173 force off release for relays 219 day limits 153 force on doors 217 defining 147 force on relays 217 delete 172 force on release door 217 displaying from who’s inside 274 force on release for relays 218 downloading 104 in Designer 76 downloading multiple 105 introduction 212 dual technology 149 lock down door 216 executive override 155, 156 lock down relay 215 executive passback override 173 lock down release door 216 expiration dates 151 lock down release relay 216 finding card 110
321 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
fingerprints for 160 lock down release 216 force download 171 lock open 214 forgive passback 174 lock open release 214 forgive users 174 masking 210 forgiving from Who’s Inside 277 momentary access 206 function property sheet 152 momentary masking 210 general property sheet 148 relock 207 indicating card type 149 triggering 213 limits property sheet 153 unlock 207 modifying existing for persons 118 unmasking 211 options property sheet 156 viewing in Designer 72 overview 146 doors passback 156 alarms 294 printing a badge example from 148 time 294 properties 147 DOTL reassigning from Who’s Inside 278 definition 295 response to expiration 151 Double-sided badge printing 145 special needs 156 download tagging 156, 171, 175 definition 295 tasks 169 Downloading credentials 104 two-person rule 155 Downloads unassign 172 credentials 104 unassigning 104 force credentials 171 use limiting 173 forcing 105 use limits 153 multiple credentials 105 using function groups 152 Drag & drop with live view DVR 258 writing fingerprints to 162 Drag & drop with live view NVR 258 Criteria list pane 196 Drag & drop with Video Explorer 259 Criteria page 193 dry contact CSN 160 definition 295 Custom reports DTLM saving 197 definition 295 Customizing existing reports 190 dual code ID only 295 Dual technology D specifying for credential 149 Day limiting 173 dual technology for credentials 153 definition 296 Deadman timer 222 duress deadman timer definition 296 definition 292 duress alarm default definition 296 definition 292 Duress digits 165 default time zone assigning in credentials 151 definition 292 defining 165 Designer using with extension digits 165 entering comments about alarms 78 DVR fire alarm icon behavior 73 address camera directly 239 suspend alarm switching 79 addressing attached cameras 238 DIGI*TRAC configuration folder 10 all video events 265 disable AVI files 252 definition 293 camera control 260 Disable state 229 customizing event logs 269 Disarming doors 210 drag & drop camera views 258 door alarms event history viewer 268 definition 294 event list functions 271 Door open 65 export recorded video 246 Doors export video 252 extended access 207 generate and stop host alarms 252 force off 218 generating history logs 268 force off release 219 get alarm list 253 force on 217 get recorded video from Alarm Viewer 50 force on release 217 introduction 237 lock down 216 live video screen 241
322 MAN007-0211
manual time synchronization 258 file capture 133 operating 238–264 finding card credentials 110 override or stop host alarms 253 finding persons 106 patterns 262 force download 105, 171 play local video 246 forcing downloads 105 play recorded video 246 forgive passback 171 play video from Alarm Viewer 50 IDFs 149 play video window 247 image preview 133 PTZ camera controls 263 image preview dialog box 134 quick view 262 main screen 85 retrieve recorded video 245 menu bar 87 right click options 255 modifying an existing person 117 search & retrieve recorded video 245 modifying existing credentials for a person 118 time synchronization 258 opening 84 usage 237–271 override code tamper 171 video explorer 243 overview 83 view camera video 240 personal information form 95 view groups 259 personal information pane 90 viewing video from attached cameras 240 photo capture 128 DVR and NVR previewing badges 142 live view 240 print preview screen 142 DVRs printing badges 144 get motion events list 256 saving an image to another source 138 see also Credentials E signature capture 126 electrical circuits 288 signature capture dialog box 126 E-mailing images from enrollment manager 137 start Badge Designer from 171 Employees TWAIN capture 131 see Persons and Enrollment Manager unassign credentials 172 enable unassigning credentials 104 definition 296 video capture 129 enable code wildcard symbols 114 definition 296 Event history viewer for DVR 268 Enrolling a new person 97 Event history viewer for NVR 268 Enrollment event report auto 124 definition 296 Enrollment manager 83–175 Events acquire 128 customizing DVR logs 269 adding persons 97 customizing NVR logs 269 additional images 94, 136 DVR history viewer 268 alert 171 DVR list functions 271 apply credential management globally 153 NVR history viewer 268 assign credential to person dialog box 101 NVR list functions 271 assign person to credential dialog box 103 Executing command sets 81 assigning a credential template to a person 104 Executive override assigning a new credential to a person 103 credential passback 156 assigning a person to an existing credential 103 for credentials 155 assigning credential to person 101 Executive passback override 173 assigning existing credential to a person 101 Executive password 220 auto enroll 124 executive privilege batch enroll card credentials 123 definition 297 capturing signatures 126 Exiting Velocity 4 closing 87 Expanding and contracting the system tree 8 credential pane 86 Expiration dates 151 credential properties 147 response to 151 credentials 146 Export DVR video 252 defining credentials 147 Export local video 246 delete credentials 172 Export NVR video 252 double-sided badges 145 Extended access 207 downloading credentials 104 Extension digits downloading multiple credentials 105 using with duress digits 165 e-mailing images 137 external event types 296 enrolling new person 97
323 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
F acknowledging alarms 75, 76 fast poll clearing alarms 75, 76 definition 297 command sets 81 fault-tolerant system 297 control functions 76 File capture 133 controllers 71 File options 18 controlling placed objects 75 lock workstations 29 doors 72 switching operators 28 inputs 72 Finding card credentials 110 monitoring placed objects 71 Finding persons 106 readers 72 Fingerprints relays 73 enrolling for credentials 160 special icons 71 writing to a credential 162 viewing linked maps 70 Fire alarms XBoxes 73 icons in graphics 73 GUID 160 firmware revision H definition 298 hardware FlashBus TWAIN32 setup dialog box 132 definition 298 FlashBus video capturing photos using 128 help technical support iii Focus mode 235 Help options 21 Force download 105 force note Help topics 21 Hirsch definition 298 fax number iii Force off door 218 Force off relays 218 technical support iii Force off release for doors 219 web page iii Holidays Force off release relays 219 manual tables 226 Force on doors 217 Force on relays 217 manual unholiday tables 227 Host alarms Force on release doors 217 generate and stop DVR 252 Force on release for relays 218 Forgive all users 226 generate and stop NVR 252 Hot Keys Forgive passback 171, 174 using to access programs 19 Forgive users 174 Forgiving credentials from Who’s Inside 277 I Freeze pane 201 Icon tool bar 15 Function groups Icons assigning to credentials 152 system 24 duress digits 165 ID duress digits with extension digits 165 definition 299 using with credentials 152 ID formats 164 Functions 203–229 IDFs 164 assigning to credentials 152 assigning to credential 149 priority levels 227 Image preview 133 G Images additional 136 Generating DVR history logs 268 Generating NVR history logs 268 capturing 128 e-mailing from Enrollment Manager 137 Generating reports 183 file capture 133 Get motion events list 256 Get recorded DVR video 50 preview dialog box 134 saving from enrollment manager to another source 138 Getting started 3 TWAIN capture 131 Global credential management 153 global shunt updating 136 video capture 129 definition 298 Indexed commands 223 Global unique identifier 160 glossary 283–317 clear code tamper 224 count users other side 224 Grab 233 count users this side 225 Graphics fire alarms 73 forgive all users 226 manual holiday tables 226 Graphics designer 67–82 manual unholiday tables 227 access functions 75
324 MAN007-0211
Input functions Managing columns 31 masking doors 210 Managing desktop space 30 input points Managing Velocity windows 30 definition 299 Manual holiday tables 226 Inputs Manual time synchronization for DVR systems 258 masking 211 Manual time synchronization for NVR systems 258 momentary masking 210 Manual unholiday tables 227 unmasking 211 Maps viewing in Designer 72 viewing alarms on 51 Integral DVRs viewing linked 70 get motion events list 256 Mask/cancel entry delay 208 Integral NVRs masking get motion events list 256 definition 285 interface panel Masking doors 210 definition 300 Masking inputs 211 interface panel controller master control zone definition 300 definition 291 Interfaces configuration folder 13 MATCH internal event types 297 definition 301 In-X-It MELM definition 299 definition 302 Iris mode 235 Menu tool bar 17 modem pools K definition 302 Keyboard functions 26 modems keypad code ID only 300 definition 302 keypad tamper 304 Momentary door access 206 Momentary door masking 210 L Momentary input mask 210 LEDs Monitoring placed objects in Designer 71 definition 300 Mouse functions 26 line modules MRIB definition 300 definition 301 Live view 240 multiple ID user 302 local relay definition 301 N Local video Navigating between modules 26 play & export 246 Navigating Velocity 26 Lock down door 216 Noisy 65 Lock down relay 215 Notes Lock down release door 216 displaying in Alarm viewer 49 Lock down release relay 216 NTSC 130, 133 Lock open door 214 NVR 259 Lock open relay 214 address camera directly 239 Lock open release door 214 addressing attached cameras 238 Lock open release relay 215 all video events 265 Locking workstations 29 AVI files 252 Logs camera control 260 time 221 customizing event logs 269 watch 221 drag & drop camera views 258 loop event history viewer 268 definition 301 event list functions 271 loop pause export recorded video 246 definition 301 export video 252 loop unload generate and stop host alarms 252 definition 301 generating history logs 268 get alarm list 253 M introduction 237 main menu live video screen 241 system tree pane 6 manual time synchronization 258 Main menu description 5 operating 238–264 Main screen override or stop host alarms 253 status line 23 patterns 262
325 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
play local video 246 Patterns 262 play recorded video 246 percentage sign (%) 114 play video window 247 Personal information form 95 PTZ camera controls 263 Personal information pane 90 quick view 262 additional images 94, 136 retrieve recorded video 245 general property sheet 91 right click options 255 Persons search & retrieve recorded video 245 adding 97 time synchronization 258 enrolling new 97 usage 237–271 finding 106 video explorer 243 forgive access 174 view camera video 240 modifying 117 viewing video from attached cameras 240 modifying existing credentials 118 NVRs Photographs get motion events list 256 capturing 128 file capture 133 O image preview 133 occupancy control TWAIN capture 131 definition 302 video capture 129 OCT physical tamper mode 304 definition 303 physical zones Off normal points 24 definition 305 One-field ABA 149 PINs Open circuit 65 assigning to credential 151 Operator password 220 auto-generate 151 Operators Play DVR video 50 switching 28 Play local video 246 Out of spec 65 polling output control group definition 305 definition 302 Pre-arm status 209 output points Preferences option definition 303 accessing 19 override Preliminaries 3 definition 303 Presets 232 Override code tamper 171 Preview screen Override executive passback 173 features 200 Previewing badges 142 P Print preview PAL 133 reports 198 Pan Tilt Zoom Print preview screen 142 see PTZ Printing Panel ID 160 badges 144 panels double-sided badges 145 definition 303 preview screen for enrollment manager 142 Pan-tilt 235 Printing reports 202 parameter priority definition 303 definition 315 Partial unmask 209 Priority levels for functions 227 Passback programming mode assigning to credentials 156 definition 306 executive override 173 PTZ forgive 174 using DVR 263 forgiving 171 using NVR 263 Pass-thru 149 Password functions Q executive password 220 Quick views 262 introduction 220 operator password 220 R priority levels 220 Readers supervisor password 220 viewing in Designer 72 system password 220 readers passwords definition 306 priority levels 220 real time
326 MAN007-0211
definition 306 reports Rearranging column headers 33 event types 296 records transaction 313 user 317 Resizing columns and panes 34 redundant response codes definition 306 definition 307 redundant computer system Retrieve recorded DVR video 245 definition 291 Retrieve recorded NVR video 245 re-enable retrigger definition 306 definition 307 Refresh alarms on alarm viewer 51 return to normal relay definition 307 definition 307 RQE relay triggers control zone 307 definition 308 Relays actuate 228 S clear state 229 Saving a photo from enrollment manager to another source disable state 228 138 force off 218 SC readers field 160 force off release 219 ScramblePads force on 217 definition 308 force on release 218 secured access area lock down 215 definition 309 lock down release 216 server lock open 214 definition 309 lock open release 215 Service Password functions states 228 service password 220 triggering 213 Set threat levels 224 viewing in Designer 73 Short 65 relays Short-cut keys 22 virtual 317 Show last access for unassigned credentials 88 Release force off for doors 219 Show UDF summary 88 Release force off for relays 219 shunt Release force on for doors 217 definition 309 Release force on for relays 218 shunt points Release lock down door 216 definition 309 Release lock down for relay 216 Signal type 130 Release lock open for door 214 Signatures Release lock open for relay 215 capture dialog box 126 Relock capturing 126 door 207 single zone access 309 Report manager 177–202 Site ID 160 add new reports 183 smart terminal interface criteria page 193 definition 310 customizing existing reports 190 soft alarm flowchart 178 definition 311 freeze pane 201 Sorting by column header 33 generating a report 183 Sorting page 195 icon tool bar 182 Special functions introduction 177 alarm cancel 221 list of existing reports 184 deadman timer 222 main screen 180 indexed commands 223 opening 179 introduction 221 preview screen 198 set threat level 224 preview screen features 200 time log 221 print reports 183 watch log 221 printing 202 Special needs saving custom reports 197 access time extension for credentials 156 selected criteria list pane 196 Square brackets 114 sorting page 195 standard control zone Reports definition 291 list of existing 184 Start exit timer 208 see Report manager Starting Velocity 3
327 Velocity Version 3.1 R3 Operator’s Guide
Status groups threat level column headers 64 definition 312 creating 62 Threat levels properties 63 set 224 Status line 23 Time log 221 Status messages 65 Time synchronization 258 active 65 time zone door open 65 definition 313 inactive 65 timed override masked 65 definition 313 noisy 65 Timers open circuit 65 deadman 222 out of spec 65 start exit 208 secure 65 unmask/start exit 209 short 65 Tool Bars Status viewer 53–65 console options 19 columns and rows 55 Tours 233 how to use 60 transaction main screen 54 definition 313 opening 53 transaction processing method right-click options 60 definition 313 status groups 62 transaction report 313 status messages 65 trigger tasks 60 definition 307, 314 Std 26-Bit Wiegand 149 Triggering doors and relays 213 Std 27-Bit Wiegand 149 trouble alarms Std 28-Bit Wiegand 149 definition 314 Std 29-Bit Wiegand 149 turnstiles STI definition 314 definition 310 TWAIN capture 131 Supervisor password 220 FlashBus setup 132 support setup dialog box 131 technical iii Two-person rule Suspend alarm switching 79 for credentials 155 Switching operators 28 Symbols U wildcards 114 UL requirements iv system administrator Unassign credentials 172 definition 311 Unassigning credentials 104 system code Underscore sign (_) 114 definition 311 unload System icons 24 definition 314 System password 220 Unlock system thresholds door 207 definition 311 Unlocking workstations 29 System tree pane 6 Unmask expanding and contracting 8 conditional 209 System tree window 6 partial 209 Unmask/start exit timer 209 T Unmasking doors 211 Tagging Unmasking inputs 211 credentials 171 Update image 136 for credentials 156 upload overview 175 definition 315 tamper alarms Use count definition 312 overview 173 technical support iii Use limiting 173 Temporary days for credentials 153 see Day limiting use-count temporary-day mode 312 definition 315 Test if secure 209 user Threat authority definition 315 assign to credentials 153 user numbers
328 MAN007-0211
definition 316 main screen 275 user-defined fields overview 273 definition 315 pause button 276 Users persons inside pane 277 count other side 224 reassigning credentials 278 count this side 225 refresh screen 275 forgive 174 resume button 276 forgive all 226 right-click functions 277 users start polling button 276 multiple ID 302 status indicator 276 Using fields and tools 26 stop polling button 276 Using the mouse and keyboard 26 zone tree pane 276 Using the mouse and keypad 26 Wildcard symbols 114 Using Velocity fields and tools 27 % 114 Using Velocity programs 35 square brackets 114 underscore 114 V Workstations Velocity locking 29 administration main screen 6 unlocking 29 browser 279 Writing fingerprints to a credential 162 enrollment manager 83–175 exiting 4 X fields and tools 27 X*NET hot keys 22 definition 317 main menu 5 XBox managing desktop space 30 definition 317 managing windows 30 XBoxes menu tool bar 17 viewing in Designer 73 mouse and keyboard 26 navigating 26 Z placing alarm viewer on 45 Zoom mode 235 status viewer 53–65 using programs 35 Velocity configuration folder 8 Velocity icon tool bar 15 Video export DVR 252 export NVR 252 retrieve recorded 245 Video capture 129 dialog box 130 signal 130 Video dialog box 130 Video explorer 243 drag and drop with 259 View DVR camera video 240 View groups 259 View NVR camera video 240 Viewing instructions for an alarm 51 Viewing maps for alarms 51 virtual relays definition 317 W Watch log 221 WAV file replaying 50 Who’s Inside alternative method for using 274 displaying credentials 274 forgiving credentials 277 hide zones 275 how to use 274
329